[3-D Tic-Tac-Toe] File=/rom/3dTicTacToe.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=0 A 3D Tic Tac Toe Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=Place four X's or four O's in one horizontal, vertical, or diagonal row, or through all the panes. Play against an opponent or against the computer. To win, complete a row first. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to cycle between single player difficulty levels 1 - 8, where 1 is the easiest, looking 1 move ahead and taking ½ second to move, and 8 is the hardest, looking 9 moves ahead and taking 20 minutes or less to move. Level 9 is for two player games and is indicated by a 2 in the upper right corner. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 (as X), or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player (as O) in two player games. \ Push the joystick to move your X or O into position. Press the joystick button to place your X or O. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch determines who begins. For one-player games, when the switch is in the A position, P1 starts, and when the switch is in the B position, the computer starts. In two-player games, the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch determines whether P1 or P2 starts. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch may be used to create a setup mode on the screen by placing the switch in the A position. You may then use the P1 joystick to place X's or O's anywhere on the screen. Press the joystick button to place markers. Hold the button down and the cursor alternates between X's, O's, and blanks on the screen. \ Whenever you place the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the game is ready for normal play. After using the setup mode, either X or O may play first. This is determined by the position of the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch, the same as at the start of the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Adventure] File=/rom/Adventure.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Adventure 0 Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Rescue the Enchanted Chalice stolen by an evil magician and return it to the Golden Castle without getting eaten by evil dragons. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose between three difficulty levels, with 1 being the easiest, and 3 being the hardest.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. To pick up an item, touch it. To drop an item, press the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, it is more difficult to escape the dragons. With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the dragons will hesitate before biting. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each area shown on your screen will have one or more barriers or walls, through which you cannot pass. There are one or more openings that can be moved through to get to the next screen. \ Scattered throughout the Kingdom are certain objects to help you in your search for the Enchanted Chalice, including a sword that can slay dragons. To open any Castle, touch the Gate with that Castle's corresponding colored key. The Gate will slide open and you can enter the Castle by moving upward through the Gate. If you are leaving the Castle, it is advisable to push the Key out first or you may inadvertently close the Castle Gate behind you. \ You cannot pick up and carry a slain dragon. In Skill Levels 2 and 3, besides the dragons, the evil magician has created a black bat that carries objects around throughout the Kingdom and trades them for an object that you may be carrying. The black bat may trade a live dragon for the sword and leave you defenseless, or it may trade you something for the Enchanted Chalice just as you are ready to put it into the Golden Castle. \ You can catch the black bat and carry it and whatever the black bat may be carrying. However, sometimes the black bat will escape. If you have slain a dragon and he is blocking your path so you cannot get through, you can use this to your advantage by placing one or two objects in the same area and then move through the slain dragon. Finally, sometimes the black bat can be used to your advantage by getting it to swap for an object you need that may be stuck in a wall. [Adventure 1k] File=/rom/Adventure1k.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Adventure 1 Year=1979 Genre=unclassified Description=Rescue the Enchanted Chalice stolen by an evil magician and return it to the Golden Castle without getting eaten by evil dragons. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose between three difficulty levels, with 1 being the easiest, and 3 being the hardest.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. To pick up an item, touch it. To drop an item, press the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, it is more difficult to escape the dragons. With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the dragons will hesitate before biting. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each area shown on your screen will have one or more barriers or walls, through which you cannot pass. There are one or more openings that can be moved through to get to the next screen. \ Scattered throughout the Kingdom are certain objects to help you in your search for the Enchanted Chalice, including a sword that can slay dragons. To open any Castle, touch the Gate with that Castle's corresponding colored key. The Gate will slide open and you can enter the Castle by moving upward through the Gate. If you are leaving the Castle, it is advisable to push the Key out first or you may inadvertently close the Castle Gate behind you. \ You cannot pick up and carry a slain dragon. In Skill Levels 2 and 3, besides the dragons, the evil magician has created a black bat that carries objects around throughout the Kingdom and trades them for an object that you may be carrying. The black bat may trade a live dragon for the sword and leave you defenseless, or it may trade you something for the Enchanted Chalice just as you are ready to put it into the Golden Castle. \ You can catch the black bat and carry it and whatever the black bat may be carrying. However, sometimes the black bat will escape. If you have slain a dragon and he is blocking your path so you cannot get through, you can use this to your advantage by placing one or two objects in the same area and then move through the slain dragon. Finally, sometimes the black bat can be used to your advantage by getting it to swap for an object you need that may be stuck in a wall. [Adventure II] File=/rom/AdventureII.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Adventure 5 Year=2004 Genre=atari Description=In this remixed sequel, once again rescue the Enchanted Chalice stolen by an evil magician and place it inside the Golden Castle. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. To pick up an item, touch it. To drop an item, press the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each area shown on your screen will have one or more barriers or walls, through which you cannot pass. There are one or more openings that can be moved through to get to the next screen. \ Scattered throughout the Kingdom are certain objects to help you in your search for the Enchanted Chalice, including a sword that can slay dragons. To open any Castle, touch the Gate with that Castle's corresponding colored key. The Gate will slide open and you can enter the Castle by moving upward through the Gate. If you are leaving the Castle, it is advisable to push the Key out first or you may inadvertently close the Castle Gate behind you. \ You cannot pick up and carry a slain dragon. \ You can catch the black bat and carry it and whatever the black bat may be carrying. However, sometimes the black bat will escape. If you have slain a dragon and he is blocking your path so you cannot get through, you can use this to your advantage by placing one or two objects in the same area and then move through the slain dragon. Finally, sometimes the black bat can be used to your advantage by getting it to swap for an object you need that may be stuck in a wall. [Air·Sea Battle] File=/rom/AirSeaBattle.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Air Sea Battle Year=1977 Genre=atari Description=The object of this game is to score points by hitting moving objects. Air-Sea Battle is made of six different shooting games that total 27 game variations. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 6 (anti-aircraft), 7 - 12 (torpedo), 13 - 15 (shooting gallery), and 16 - 27 (polaris and bomber). Games 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, and 27 are one player games. All other games are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Use the P2 joystick or slot for one player games. \ Moving the joystick changes the angle of your anti-aircraft gun and also the angle of the missile flight in guided missile games; forward = 30 degrees; center or rest = 60 degrees; and back = 90 degrees (straight up). Press joystick button to fire. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, the missile is 1/4th the size it is in position B, making it harder to hit targets. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ All games end after 2 minutes, 16 seconds of play, or when either player scores 99 points. During the last 16 seconds, the score will flash to show that the game is nearing the end. [Aquaventure] File=/rom/Aquaventure.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Aquaventure Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Discover what the ocean depths hide as you dive to retrieve the hidden treasure. Along the way you must avoid fish, seahorses, and other underwater creatures attempting to block your path. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move your diver. Press the joystick button to fire a spear. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Use your spear gun to temporarily kill a sea creature. Since each enemy you kill is soon replaced by a faster and indestructible version of itself, take care to only kill creatures that get in your way. After retrieving the treasure and returning it to the top of the cavern, a mermaid will appear. Touching the mermaid will take you to the next level, where you get to retrieve another treasure. \ At the top of the screen is a turtle, which shows how much air you have left. If the turtle reaches the air sign at the far right of the screen before you complete the level, you lose a life. [Asteroids] File=/rom/Asteroids.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Asteroids 1 Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=Destroy as many asteroids as you can to keep your ship safe. Watch out for satellites and UFOs as well! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 66. Odd numbered games feature slow asteroids, and even numbered games feature fast asteroids. \ Hyperspace is a feature offered in games 1 through 8 for one player and games 34 through 41 for two players. By moving the joystick down, hyperspace makes your spaceship disappear in space and reappear at some other place on the screen, although not always in a better location. \ Shields is a feature offered in games 9 through 16 for one player and games 42 through 49 for two players. Move the joystick down to put up shields, but don't use shields for more than two seconds or your spaceship will blow up. \ Flip is a feature offered in games 17 through 24 for one player and games 50 through 57 for two players. Move the joystick down to flip your spaceship 180 degrees, which aims it in the opposite direction, and is a fast way to attack asteroids coming from behind. \ Games 25-32 for one-player and games 58-65 for two-players have no optional features, making those variations more challenging. \ Games 33, for one player, and 66, for two players, are easy variations, featuring slow asteroids, Hyperspace, and an extra ship every 5000 points. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Push the joystick up for thrust, left to turn counterclockwise, right to turn clockwise, and down to use an applicable special feature (Hyperspace, Shields, Flip, None). Press the joystick button to fire photon torpedoes at the enemy objects. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, difficulty is increased. With switches in the B position, or normal difficulty, there are no UFOs or satellites. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Points are determined by the size of the asteroid boulders between large, medium, and small. The smaller boulders are the hardest to hit and therefore worth the most points. [Atari Climber] File=/rom/AtariClimber.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Atari Climber Year=2004 Genre=atari Description=A home run ball has landed on top of the roof of a building and you'll need to get it back. On your way up, you'll need to avoid moving obstacles. Hurry, as time is of the essence! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button or move the joystick to choose between Novice, Standard, or Advanced games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Push the joystick in the same direction you want to move. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Touch the ball to move onto the next level. [Basketball] File=/rom/Basketball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Basketball Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=Get ready for a fast-paced game of one-on-one basketball! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select between game 1, which is a two-player game, and game 2, which is a one-player game.\ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Push the joystick in the direction you want to move your player. The player with the ball will dribble automatically and always face the basket; the defending player always faces the ball. \ To shoot, press the joystick button; your player will stop dribbling and will hold the ball, waving it back and forth over his head. When the joystick button is released, the player will shoot. If the shot is made when the ball is over the player's head, it will be a long, high arching shot. If the shot is made when the ball is held low in front, it will be a short, easy shot. The shot will always go towards the basket. \ To defend against your opponent's shot, place yourself between the ball and basket. When the shooter releases the ball, press the joystick button. Your player will jump and you can block the shot and try to recover the ball. You can only block a shot when the ball is in its upward arc. \ To steal the ball, put the player's feet even with your opponent's feet. When the ball leaves your opponent's hand during the dribble, take the ball and head towards your own basket. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the left or RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, your player can move from basket-to-basket much more quickly than in the A position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each player can move in one of eight directions with the joystick; the player with the ball constantly dribbles it. Score by shooting the ball to the basket. The player with the highest score after four minutes is the winner. [Blackjack] File=/rom/Blackjack.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Blackjack Year=1977 Genre=atari, paddle Description=It's real casino-style blackjack where you and up to two of your buddies can try your luck against the computer dealer. The object of the game is to obtain a hand of cards that adds up to more than the dealer's hand, without going over 21. Up to three players can compete at the same time. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-3) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 3, which indicate the number of human players. A player can leave the game at any time by pressing the SELECT button until that player's set-up disappears. A player can return to a game by doing the reverse. \ When you Go Broke (lose all your chips), you can still play by asking the bank for another set-up. Stop the play action and push the SELECT button to cycle through all the set-ups. When your new set-up appears along with the other player's previous set-ups, release the SELECT button. Now place your bets and continue play. \ When you have 1000 chips, you Break the Bank! Now you must start play again with 200 chips. To produce another set-up, follow the directions for Going Broke above. Your 1000 chip score will remain on the screen until you press the SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Three player games are not supported with joysticks. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port for one or two player games. For three player games, plug a second set of paddle controllers into the right joystick port. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the computer automatically shuffles the cards after every hand. With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, the computer automatically shuffles the cards after dealing two-thirds, or 34 cards of the deck. \ With the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, casino blackjack rules apply: Computer dealer must hit a soft 17 or less; computer dealer must stay on a hard 17 (aces = 1 point). Your score is not affected by tie games between the dealer and you. A player is allowed four hits. If your hand equals 10 or 11 points, you may double your bet before the first hit, you must take one hit, and only one hit is allowed. \ With the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, private blackjack rules apply: Computer dealer must stay on 17 or more points. All tie games are won by the computer dealer. You may double your bet on any combination of cards before the first hit, you must take one hit, and only one hit is allowed. A player automatically wins the game when that player hits four times without going over 21. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin or reset play. \ Each player starts play with a total of 200 chips. Bet from 1- 25 chips on each game. Your bet is added or subtracted from your total score depending on whether you win or lose. When you score a blackjack, you win 1.5 times your bet. A player is automatically removed from the game when that player has 1000 chips or no chips remaining in their score. \ If you are satisfied with the points of your first two cards, stay on that hand. If you want to add more points to your hand, request a hit, and the dealer will give you another card. You may continue to hit until you are satisfied with your hand (stay) or until you exceed 21 points and lose the game (bust). \ When all players have played their hands, the dealer reveals the face-down card. Like all players, the dealer will hit or stay to get as close to 21 points without busting. \ You win the game when your card hand is equal to more points than the dealer's hand without exceeding 21 points, the dealer busts and exceeds 21 points, or you score a blackjack (an ace and a face card or a 10). A tie game (push) occurs when the dealer's card points equal your card points. [Bowling] File=/rom/Bowling.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Bowling Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=It's bowling fun for one or two players. Choose between curve ball, steerable ball, and straight ball variations! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 6. For games 1 and 2, the ball stays in a steady curve pattern once the joystick is moved in either direction. The ball does not come out of this pattern until that roll is completed. \ For games 3 and 4, you can steer the ball up and/or down while it is moving down the alley. If the joystick is returned to its neutral position, the ball straightens out. \ Games 5 and 6 are straight ball games, where the ball's direction cannot be altered. \ Games 1, 3, and 5 are for one player only games. Games 2, 4, and 6 are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick forward (away from you) or back (towards you), to position the bowler. Press the joystick button to release the ball. Depending on which game you chose, the joystick controls the direction of the ball as it moves down the alley. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, difficulty is increased. With switches in the B position, gameplay is set at normal difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ You have the possibility of scoring from 0 to 30 points in each frame. However, just as in real bowling, the difference in your score depends on whether you strike, spare, or leave an open frame. [Breakout] File=/rom/Breakout.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Breakout Year=1978 Genre=atari, paddle Description=A brick wall appears at the top of the screen, and your mission is to smash it off the playfield, one brick at a time! Up to four players can compete at the same time. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 12. Games 1 - 4 are breakout games, with game 2 steerable, game 3 catch, and game 4, invisible. Games 5 - 8 are timed breakout, with game 6 steerable, game 7 catch, and game 8 invisible. Games 9 - 12 are breakthrough, with game 10 steerable, game 11 catch, and game 12 invisible. Press START button to lock in the game selection. After locking in the game selection, press SELECT to select the number of players, from 1 - 4. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Three and four player games are not supported with joysticks. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port for one or two player games. For three and four player games, plug a second set of paddle controllers into the right joystick port. \ Press the controller button to launch the ball. Move the joystick or paddle left or right to hit the ball. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the B position, the paddle is full-sized. With switches in the A position, the paddle is ¾ the size. When there are two players on one team, the difficulty switch affects both paddles. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ After choosing the game selection and number of players, press START button to begin play. Press the controller button to release the ball. \ Use your paddle to bounce the ball into the brick wall. Each time you hit a brick, it disappears! Once you break through, the ball will bounce around the top, knocking out blocks rapidly. Try to get rid of all of the bricks on the screen. High scoring bricks speed up your ball, and hitting the ceiling shrinks your paddle. \ For one player games, attempt to destroy the two walls using five balls, or win by scoring the maximum number of points, 864. \ For two player games, players take turns hitting the wall. Each player receives five balls and a brick wall that appears during a player's turn. One player continues to hit a ball into the wall until that player misses the ball. Upon a miss, the opponent's wall appears on the screen. The opponent then takes his turn hitting the ball into the wall. The first player to destroy two walls or score the most points after playing five balls wins the game. \ For three player games, two players act as a team and play against a one-player team. Just as in two-player games, the two teams take turns hitting the ball into the wall. Each team receives five balls and a separate brick wall. When one team misses the ball, the opposing team's wall appears and play begins. The first team to destroy a wall or score the most points after playing five balls wins the game. \ Four player games have two players on each team. These games are played just like two- and three-player games. The first team to destroy a wall or score the most points after playing five balls wins the game. When a team or player destroys the brick wall, a new brick wall automatically appears on the screen. If any bricks remain on the screen after five balls are played, begin a new game, and create a new brick wall by pressing START button. \ In games with two-players on each team, each player controls a paddle that moves across only half the playfield. \ Some games rely on speed scores instead of point scores to win. \ For invisible games, it's the same Breakout action, except this time it's in the dark! The wall is invisible until you hit a brick with the ball. When this happens, you score points and the entire wall lights up. [Canyon Bomber] File=/rom/CanyonBomber.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Canyon Bomber Year=1979 Genre=atari, paddle Description=Fly over a canyon full of colored bricks. Drop bombs on more bricks than your opponent. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 - 6 are Canyon Bomber games, with games 2, 4, 5, and 6 for two players. Games 7 and 8 are Sea Bomber games. Game 7 is for one player and game 8 is for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Three and four player games are not supported with joysticks. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port for one or two player games. \ For Canyon Bomber games, press the controller button to drop bombs. The joystick or paddle itself is not used. \ For Sea Bomber games, push the joystick or turn the paddle to move the dashed depth indicator up and down the playfield, which sets the depth at which the charge explodes. Press the controller button to release the bomb. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, you must wait until a bomb runs its course before firing again. With difficulty switches in the B position, you can recover and refire your bomb by pressing the controller button, and the computer opponent is harder to beat. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ After choosing the game selection and number of players, press START button to begin play. \ For Canyon Bomber games, a miss is recorded each time you fail to hit a target in the canyon. A miss is also recorded if your plane travels across the canyon without dropping a bomb. There are eight bars of bricks which extend across the canyon. Each brick in the first two bars is worth one point each. The bricks in the third and fourth bars are worth two points each. In the fifth and sixth bars the bricks are worth three points each, and the bricks in the last or bottom two bars are worth four points each. \ For Sea Bomber games, play ends when you, another player, or the computer score 1000 points. There are five levels at which you score points when blowing up ships. The lower the ship on the screen, the more points you score. Point values for the five levels are 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 points. [Centipede] File=/rom/Centipede.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Centipede 0 Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Aim your magic wand and shoot sparks to stop the slithering Centipede, the poisonous scorpion, mischievous spider, and pesky flea in their tracks! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to cycle between EASY PLAY and STANDARD PLAY. A teddy bear figure appears at the bottom right side of the screen to indicate EASY PLAY. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Push the joystick in the same direction you want to move your magic wand. You can move about one-quarter of the way up the screen, as well as to the left and right edges of the screen. \ To shoot sparks, press the joystick button. You can fire sparks as long as you press the button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Each time START button is pressed, the game starts over. [Championship Soccer] File=/rom/ChampionshipSoccer.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Championship Soccer Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=Score more goals than your opponent in this fast-paced soccer game. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to choose between games 1 - 54. Games 1 - 27 are for two player games, and games 28 - 54 are for single player games. Each change in game modifies team speed, penalties, goal size, and computer difficulty (in one player games). \ For one player games, no matter what level of computer difficulty you choose, if your score is higher than the computer's score, the computer becomes harder to beat. If the computer's score is higher, the computer becomes easier to beat. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick to direct the ball. Press the joystick button to pass and kick the ball. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Games are normally played with the LEFT and RIGHT DIFFICULTY switches set to B. However, if you want to give yourself a handicap, set your difficulty switch to A. This will enlarge your goal, making it harder for you to defend and easier for your opponent to penetrate. If you have the right, or P2, joystick, set the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch to A. If you have the left, or P1, joystick, set the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to A. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each team consists of three fielders, including a Forward and two Backs, and a goalkeeper. The fielders always move together in whatever direction you move the joystick. \ The goalkeeper moves from side-to-side within his goal area. While the ball is in play, the computer moves the goalkeeper and keeps him in front of the ball. You can make him move faster by moving your joystick left and right. When the goalkeeper takes possession of the ball, you control his moves with the joystick. \ In one player games, sidelines and goal lines rebound the ball. [Circus Atari] File=/rom/CircusAtari.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Circus Atari Year=1980 Genre=atari, paddle Description=Bounce clowns on a seesaw to pop all the balloons. Be sure to catch the clown on his way down! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 - 6 can be played by one or two players. Games 7 and 8 are two player only games. Games 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8 feature Breakout Circus modes, while games 3 and 4 feature Breakthru Circus modes. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. \ Use your joystick or paddle to move the teeter-totter across the screen. Press the controller button to start a turn, or press the controller button to start a clown bouncing from the trampoline. Pressing the controller button while the clown is in the air changes the direction of the teeter-totter. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ When the difficulty switch is in the A position, the clowns bounce faster after contact with the balloons and the teeter-totter. In the B position, you have better control of the clowns because they are not moving as fast. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ For Breakout Circus games, as the clown pops balloons he rebounds from balloon-to-balloon, both horizontally and vertically. Each time a full row of balloons is popped, a new row appears and you receive bonus points. When the top row of red balloons are all popped, you receive an extra clown. \ For Breakthru Circus games, the clown does not rebound off the balloons. Instead, he continues to move in a horizontal direction off the balloons. This version is considered somewhat easier for the beginning player. [Combat] File=/rom/Combat.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Combat 1 Year=1977 Genre=atari Description=Arm yourself against your opponent with tanks, planes, or fighter jets in diverse stages in this two player game. Blast your opponent as many times as you can for the highest score. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 27. Games 1 - 5 are Tank games. Games 6 - 9 are Tank-Pong games. Games 10 - 11 are Invisible Tank games. Games 12 - 14 are Invisible Tank-Pong games. Games 15 - 20 are Bi-Plane games. Games 21 - 27 are Jet games. Variations applicable to specific game selections include straight missiles, guided missiles, machine guns, direct hit, billiard hit, open field, easy maze, complex maze, and clouds. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left joystick, for the first player, and the P2, or right joystick for the second player. To shoot, press the joystick button. \ For Tank games, to move forward, move the joystick up. To turn right, move the Joystick to the right. To turn left, move the joystick to the left. \ For Bi-plane games, control speed by moving your joystick from the left (slowest) to the right (fastest). To dive, move the joystick up. To climb, move the joystick down. \ For Jet games, the speed of your jet is controlled by moving your joystick from the up position (fastest) to the down position (slowest). Right and left turns are controlled by moving your joystick from left to right. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The player using the A switch difficulty in all games will have a shorter range missile than the player using the B switch difficulty. In the Bi-plane and Jet games, the player using the A switch difficulty will also fly slower than the B switch difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Tank and Jet games are viewed from the top. Bi-plane game action is viewed from the side. All games end after 2 minutes, 16 seconds. [Combat Two] File=/rom/CombatII.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Combat 2 Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Battle against your opponent's tank for control of an expansive terrain in this two player game. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left joystick, for the first player, and the P2, or right joystick for the second player. To shoot, press the joystick button. \ To move forward, move the joystick up. To turn right, move the Joystick to the right. To turn left, move the joystick to the left. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play, then go to battle, using the terrain to your advantage. [Crystal Castles] File=/rom/CrystalCastles.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Crystal Castles Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Help Bentley Bear collect gems throughout various castle levels to escape Berthilda the Witch's evil clutches. Avoid the enemies, except when you wear the magic hat! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose a starting level between 1 and 8. Press SELECT to return to the title screen after beginning play. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move Bentley Bear with the joystick and press the controller button to jump in the direction you're pointing. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to the A position to play the easy version of the game or to B to play the hard version. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Pick up magic gems by running over them. Avoid the deadly touch of the evil castle inhabitants by jumping over them. \ Bentley can make himself temporarily invincible if he dons the magic hat by running or jumping over it. Wherever a witch appears, so does the magic hat. No enemy can pass through this headgear. At game level 4 and above, the hat bounces up and down; at game level 9 and above, it turns into a crystal ball if Bentley doesn't grab it immediately. [Demons to Diamonds] File=/rom/DemonsToDiamonds.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Demons to Diamonds Year=1982 Genre=atari, paddle Description=Shoot demons whose color matches that of your gun. If successful, the demon transforms into a diamond, which can then be shot for even more points. Take care, because shooting a demon with the wrong color transforms it into a skull! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 6. Games 1 - 3 are standard versions, while games 4 - 6 are easier versions suitable for beginners. Games 2, 3, 5, and 6 are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. \ Push or turn the controller to move your laser back and forth across the top or bottom of the playfield. Press the controller button to fire at demons. The longer you hold in the controller button, the farther your laser will extend up or down the screen. The laser disappears when it hits a demon, skull, or any other object on the screen. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches control the speed of the skull's bullets in all games. In the A position, the bullets fire almost twice as fast as in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Every time you hit a demon of your own color, you receive 1 to 8 points, depending upon which row the demon occupies. For example, a demon in the row nearest your laser base is worth 1 point, while a demon in the third row from your laser is worth 3 points. \ Each pulsating diamond is worth 10 to 80 points, or 10 times the value of the row it occupies. \ Create skulls as far as possible from your laser base; these are more likely to hit your opponent than you. \ Try to hit the diamonds whenever you can. They are worth a lot of points and, if you can hit them consistently, your score will rise quickly. \ Spontaneous skulls usually appear at the edge of the rows. Don't spend too much time in this vicinity. The safest position is just to the right or left of the center. [Desert Falcon] File=/rom/DesertFalcon.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Desert Falcon Year=1987 Genre=atari Description=You are the royal Desert Falcon on a quest for precious gems and Egyptian hieroglyphics hidden in an endless desert. Watch out for the flying beasts, blazing firepots, and Howling Sphinxes as they guard the jewels you seek. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Choose game options by pressing the SELECT button or using the P1, or left joystick. Move the joystick handle up or down to choose one of four skills levels, from Novice (easiest), to Expert (most difficult), and to choose between a one- or two-player game. An option is selected when it lights up. \ Press SELECT to redisplay the options screen at any time. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Push the joystick down to fly and gain altitude. Push the joystick up to land, hop, or swim. Release the joystick to maintain altitude in the air or stop on land. Push the joystick left and right to move left and right. \ Press the controller button once to fire darts. Press the controller button quickly twice to activate super powers. The temporary super powers are: Air Bomb, Decoy, Hold Sphinx, Invincible, Omnicide, Points, Polywater, Roulette, Shackles, and Warp. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to start the game. \ The Pharaoh's lost treasures--enormous gems, big golden eggs, and silver ingots--are scattered among the ancient pyramids and obelisks. Fly towards the treasures, then hover or hop over them to pick them up and earn points. \ All enemies will destroy you, so protect yourself by maneuvering around them or firing darts. The end of each desert trek brings you to the Howling Sphinx. You must shoot this Sphinx in the middle of its face to get past it, all the while dodging the darts and nasty creatures it spits at you. \ Destroying the Howling Sphinx gains you entrance to the bonus round. Here your goal is to pick up as many treasures as you can in the time allowed, so be sure to go for items with the highest value. [Dodge 'Em] File=/rom/DodgeEm.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dodge Em Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=Steer your car at high speed around a maze to collect dots. Be sure to avoid the other car! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 3. Game 1 is for one player. Game 2 is for two players alternating, where the computer controls one car. Game 3 is for two simultaneous players who alternately control a point-scoring car and a crash car. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ To steer your car right or left, move the joystick up or down. The joystick button acts as your gas pedal and accelerates your car. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, the computer car or cars travel at twice their normal speed after the first and third sets of bonus points are awarded. In the B position, the car or cars travel at a slower, or normal, speed. \ With the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, the computer car begins gameplay in different playfield positions. In the B position, the computer car always begins gameplay next to your race car. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In all games, your race car automatically moves forward around the four lane track. \ During a game, each player receives three turns or heats. Each turn or heat ends when your car crashes--three heats, three crashes! \ When you run over all the dots on the track, you score eight bonus points and another set of dots appears. However, you are allowed only five sets of dots per turn. The number of your remaining turns is displayed at the upper center of the playfield. [Double Dunk] File=/rom/DoubleDunk.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Double Dunk Year=1989 Genre=atari Description=Score the most baskets in this sophisticated two-on-two, half-court basketball game. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to display the game options screen. Move the joystick up or down to select the seven options for One or Two Players, Game Length, 3-point Shots, 10-second Clock, 3-second Lane Violation, Foul Detection, and Team Color Selection. \ During play, press SELECT to return to the options screen. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Choose your offensive or defensive play before the ball is put in motion. After a score or a turnover, select your offensive or defensive play (you don't get to select a play after a defensive foul, rebound, or a steal). OFF and DEF flash at the bottom of the screen until you choose your offensive or defensive play. To select your play, move the joystick into the appropriate position and press the controller button. \ Once the ball is in play, use the joystick to move your players. When your team is on the offense, press the controller button once to start the next part of your selected play. If you move the joystick down and press the fire button while the ball is in play, the player with the ball will ignore the play and start a jump shot. When the player jumps, press the fire button a second time and the player shoots the ball. \ If a player is very close to the basket when he shoots, he will dunk the ball. After an opponent misses a shot and you get the rebound, you must clear the ball by moving your player until both feet are behind the 3-point line before you can shoot for a basket. \ If your team is on defense, you can either attempt to steal the ball or jump to block a shot. To attempt a steal, press the controller button while your defensive player is close to the ball carrier. Make sure the ball carrier is dribbling when the attempt is made. \ To block a shot, wait until the ball carrier jumps for the shot. Time your own jump to most effectively block the shot. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the P1, or left, joystick button, to begin play. Press START button again to restart the game. \ Two teams, with two players (Mr. Inside and Mr. Outside) on each team, compete in this basketball game. You control your players with the controller. If your team has the ball, your controller moves the player who has the ball. If the other team has the ball, your controller moves your player who is guarding the man with the ball (the player with his hands raised). \ The two players of each team have different playing skills. Mr. Inside (the bigger player) is great at rebounding and blocking shots, can dunk his shots easier, and sets picks for Mr. Outside. Mr. Outside (the smaller player) is adept at stealing the ball and is great at making long shots. [Fatal Run] File=/rom/Fatalrun.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Fatal Run Year=1990 Genre=atari Description=Drive through all 32 levels to release the life-saving satellite. Along the way you must distribute the radiation vaccine throughout the major cities and collect the pieces of a launch code. If you complete the code and all levels, the satellite launches, and you win the game! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ You may either start a new game at the beginning or resume play at a specific location. For a new game, push the joystick up or down to highlight NEW. Press the controller button. The instruction screen appears, showing a city with information running across the bottom of the screen. Press the controller button again to begin play. \ To resume a game at a specific level, push the joystick up or down to highlight RESUME. Press the controller button. The Code Selection screen appears. To identify the level code, which is shown after every fourth run during the game, position the square Character Selector next to the number or letter you want to choose (up to seven characters), then press the controller button. Select the asterick (*) character and press the controller button to start the game. \ Use the joystick to maneuver your vehicle. Push up to accelerate and down to slow down. When the joystick is in its neutral position, the car will coast. \ Press the controller button to fire your machine gun at the enemy. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Press START button again to return to the title and options selection screen. \ As you move from city to city, you will encounter various obstacles. The black patches on the screen are oil slicks, which can damage your tires. Yellow and white striped roadblocks should be avoided at all costs; if you hit one of these, it can damage your car severely. Roadside obstacles include houses, trees, and other hazards. Hitting obstacles will damage your car and slow you down. \ You must also be on the lookout for henchmen. They will try to run you off the road, often banding together to stop your progress. \ If you run out of ammo, you can destroy the car in front of you with a power surge. To power surge, hold down the controller button and move the joystick up. If you fail to power surge the car in front, you may crash, damaging your vehicle. \ If an enemy car comes up behind you, you can destroy it by pushing down quickly on the joystick to brake. To survive a side attack, you must smash into the vehicle and destroy it. If the enemy car gets you first, you will receive damage. \ You can also receive 20 bonus points for permanently passing an enemy car. To do this, you must stay ahead of him until he disappears off the bottom of the radar. If he comes up from behind and passes you again, you receive no bonus points. \ Look for yellow diamonds alongside the road. You will see the diamonds after you destroy enemy vehicles. Grab one of these to restore your car's engine and armor. In addition, you can replace your fuel and ammunition by running over dots along the way. Green dots replace bullets and blue dots replace fuel. If you still have fuel remaining when you run over a blue dot, you will receive 20 bonus points. If you have run out of fuel, you receive no bonus points. \ If you arrive too late to save the city, fewer survivors appear and you receive fewer bonus points. After you receive your bonus points, press the controller button. \ A message from headquarters appears on your screen. Read the message, then press the controller button. The Vehicle Upgrade screen appears. To upgrade your vehicle or purchase fuel, move the joystick up or down until your selection highlights. Then, move your joystick right to purchase the highlighted item. After purchasing upgrades, highlight the word Go and press the controller button. \ If you arrive safely at the rocket base, the rocket will launch the world-saving satellite and you will win the game. [Flag Capture] File=/rom/FlagCapture.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Flag Capture Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=Find the flag hidden somewhere in a 9x6 grid of squares. Clues under each square can tell you how far you are from the flag or in which direction it lays. Watch out for the bombs! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 10. Games 1, 2, 5, and 8 feature stationary flags. Games 3, 6, and 9 feature moving flags with walls. Games 4, 7, and 10 feature moving flags with wraparound. \ Game 1 is Free-For-All for two players, and games 2 - 4 are Double for two players. Games 5 - 7 are Solo for two players. Games 8 - 9 are Timed (75 seconds) for one player. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ To move the explorer up or down the maze, move the joystick up or down. To move the explorer to the right or left, move the joystick to the right or left. Move the explorer to diagonal squares by moving the joystick in one of the four diagonal directions you want. \ When you are satisfied with the position of your explorer, press the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In Two-Player Solo games (games where players try to score the lowest number of points), a player scores one point for each flag when the difficulty is in the B position. In the A position, a player scores two points for each flag. \ In Two-Player Free-For-All games, the moving action of a player's explorer is slowed down when the difficulty switch is in the A position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each player controls an explorer. Your object is to find the flag using your explorer. The P1, or left joystick's explorer starts in the upper left corner square; the P2, or right joystick's explorer starts in the lower right corner square. Explorers can move from square-to-square. During your turn, you can move your explorer to any square position, except for one occupied by an opponent's explorer. \ A player scores one point for each flag he finds during Free-For-All and Double Two-Player games. The first player to score 15 points wins the game. During Two-Player Solo games, each player scores the number of turns it takes to find the flag. [Football] File=/rom/Football.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Football Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=This four-on-four football game focuses on high scoring touchdowns and defensive safeties. Field goals are not included, so go for the big score in this two player game! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 3. For game 1, after programming your play, use the joystick to control your players. The offensive player controls only the ball carrier and the flight of the pass or punt. The defensive player controls his lineman or, by holding the controller button down, the defensive back. The players will randomly follow the play as programmed when not controlled by your joystick. \ For game 2, when your players are not controlled by the joystick, they will follow the play exactly as programmed. \ For game 3, program in your offensive and defensive plays and watch the computer run them out. Neither player can control the player's movements, but the offense can pass or punt the ball by pushing the controller button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for the first player, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player. \ Move the joystick to control your player, or, in select games, steer the ball. Press the controller button to throw or kick the ball. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ When placed in the A position your players cannot move from side-to-side as quickly as in the B position. This will give the more experienced player a handicap. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ All offensive plays can be pass plays, except when a "punt" play is set. Any player (including your opponent) is an eligible receiver. \ All passes must be made behind the "line of scrimmage" or the line on which the play started. \ To punt, push the controller button to program the "punt formation." After the play starts, push the controller button again and your Quarterback will kick the ball. On a punt play, only the defensive back can catch and return the ball. If the ball is not caught, the computer will randomly select the yardage or length of your kick. \ In games 1 and 2, the path of the ball on a pass or punt can be "steered" after it leaves the Quarterback by using the joystick. You can steer the ball left or right only. \ The offensive team scores a "touchdown" (seven points) by moving the ball past the opponent's goal line. The defensive team can score a "safety" (two points) by tackling the opponent behind his goal line. In addition, the defensive team gets the ball. [Golf] File=/rom/Golf.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Golf Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=It's nine holes of golf, where you control the direction and the power of your shot. Watch out for the hazards! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between a 1 or 2 player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move your golfer with the joystick. The golfer's club always points toward the ball. The golfer will walk in all vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions in accordance with the joystick's position. \ To start the golfer's backswing, press the controller button. The longer you hold the button, the longer the backswing, and the farther the ball will travel when hit. When you release the controller button, the golfer starts the forward swing. If any part of the club (or the golfer) hits the ball while the forward swing is in progress, the ball will be set in motion. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch is used by the left player in a two-player game, or the only player in a one-player game. The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch is for the right player in a two-player game. \ The A position for each difficulty switch corresponds to an advanced skill level. The B position represents a beginning skill level. When the switch is in the B position, the cup for each hole will be large and the ball will stop at the edge of the rough. \ In the A position, each hole will be smaller in size. Also, the ball will travel off the course and into the rough if hit too hard. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ There are nine holes in which you must succeed in hitting the ball into a cup. Each time you hit the ball in an effort to reach the cup, it's called a stroke. Although the number of strokes you take to hit the ball into the cup is unlimited, each hole has a designated par. Par represents the number of strokes you are ideally supposed to take to complete the hole. \ Total par for this course is 36. The par for each hole is displayed at the top of the screen, next to the hole number. When playing a one-player game, try to match or beat par. In two player games, the player with the least amount of strokes is the winner. \ The golfer's club always points toward the ball, so, to change the angle of the club (in relation to the ball), position the tip of the club over the ball and walk the golfer around the ball using the joystick. When you find the position you want, leave the tip of the club over the ball and press the controller button to start a backswing. \ Once hit, the ball will travel in a perpendicular direction away from the club. The direction the ball travels is set the moment the backswing begins. You may not change the direction once the swing has started in motion. Move or walk the golfer away from the ball and take a practice swing to confirm the direction of the swing when in doubt about a shot. There is no penalty stroke when you take a practice swing. \ The ball loses power while traveling through the rough. When hit from the rough, the ball starts with one-half the normal amount of power. The ball is invisible when in the rough, so, when searching for the ball there, remember that the club will always point towards it. [Gravitar] File=/rom/Gravitar.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Gravitar Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=The evil Gravitar has conquered four galaxies, each made up of three solar systems. Fight against gravity and break Gravitar's hold on the 12 solar systems under his power by destroying all bunkers on every planet, or by setting off the reactor in the alien reactor base. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose one of five skill levels, with level 1 being the hardest and level 5 being the easiest. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move the joystick right or left to rotate your ship in that direction. Move the joystick up to thrust in the direction your ship is pointing. Move the joystick down to activate your tractor beam and to raise your protective shields. Press the controller button to release missiles. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. Press START button to return to the title screen to make a new game selection. \ Your task is to break Gravitar's hold on the 12 solar systems under his power. You can do this by destroying all bunkers on every planet or by setting off the reactor in the alien reactor base. \ Each solar system consists of a killer sun, an alien reactor base, and three or four blockaded planets - each housing fuel deposits and enemy bunkers. \ To move from one solar system to the next, you must either visit all the planets and destroy every enemy bunker or activate the reactor at the core of the alien reactor base and escape before it explodes. \ When you complete your mission in the three solar systems of one galaxy, you are automatically transported to another galaxy, where your rescue mission will continue. \ You start the game with 6 to 100 starships, depending on the game level, and with 10,000 fuel units. Your ship consumes fuel every time you use your thrust engines, activate your shields, or extend your tractor beam. A warning beep sounds when your fuel level goes below 2,000 units. \ The game ends when you run out of fuel or lose all your spaceships. When you complete your mission, the game resets and your points continue to accumulate. [Hangman] File=/rom/Hangman.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Hangman Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=Complete the Hangman word before you make 11 incorrect letter guesses. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 - 4 are one player games, and games 5 - 8 are for two players. Games 1 and 5 are first through third grade vocabulary, games 2 and 6 are first through sixth grade vocabulary, games 3 and 7 are first through ninth grade vocabulary, and games 4 and 8 are first through high school vocabulary. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Use the joystick to select the alphabet letter you wish to enter into the computer. Letters of the alphabet appear one at a time on the right of the screen. Push the Joystick forward to cycle through the alphabet letters from A to Z. Move the joystick back to cycle through the letters in reverse order from Z to A. When the letter you want appears on the screen, release the joystick and press the controller button to enter the letter you select into the computer. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ When the difficulty switch is in the A position, a player has 20 seconds to select the next letter with the joystick. When the difficulty is in the B position, there is no time limit. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player Hangman games, a player is allowed 11 incorrect letters. If the player has not completed the word after 11 incorrect guesses, the game is lost. You score one point for each game you win; the computer scores one point for each game you lose. \ During two-payer games, 11 incorrect letter selections are also allowed between the two players. The player who completes the last letter in the word receives one point. The first player to score five points wins the game. [Human Cannonball] File=/rom/HumanCannonball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Human Cannonball Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Carefully judge angle, speed, and distance to launch your human cannonball to the target. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8, and the number of players. In games 1 - 4, the water tower can be moved back and forth after the man is shot out of the cannon. Games 5 - 8 have a moving window that is positioned in front of the water tower on the screen, and the water tower cannot be moved. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick to adjust and set the game variables. Press the controller button to shoot the man out of the cannon. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In the B position, the water tower is twice as wide as it is when the difficulty switch is in the A position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player games, you score one point for each successful shot. The computer records one point against you for each miss. Your score is shown at the top, left side of the screen. The number of misses is displayed at the top, right side of the screen. The game ends after seven successful shots or seven misses. \ In two-player games, each player scores one point for a successful shot. Misses have no effect on scoring. The first player to score seven points is the winner. [Haunted House] File=/rom/HauntedHouse.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Haunted House Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=To escape the haunted house, find the pieces of a magic urn. Along the way, you'll encounter terrifying monsters like hairy tarantulas, vampire bats, and a ghost. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 9, with 1 being the easiest and 9 being the hardest. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Push the joystick in the direction you want to move. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ If the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch is in the B position, periodic flashes of lightning will help you to see your way around the mansion as the creatures chase you. If in the A position, you'll have to feel your way around, listening to sounds and bumping into walls. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The object of the game is to find the three pieces of the magic urn and carry them back to the main entrance of the mansion, before losing all 9 of your lives. Your score is based on the number of matches you use during your search, and the number of lives you use. \ The pieces of the urn are randomly scattered throughout the 24 rooms in the mansion. There are four floors, and each floor has six rooms. The floors are connected by staircases. The rooms are connected by corridors and doorways. Some of the doors are locked, so find the master key which is also hidden in the mansion. \ Finding the urn wouldn't be so difficult, except that the mansion is dark. To enable you to see your way around, we have provided an unlimited supply of matches, which you light by pressing the controller button. \ Now that you know that you must use matches, we want to warn you about the creatures you'll encounter as you stumble through the mansion. Be prepared to see a vampire bat, hairy tarantulas and the ghost of old man Graves himself. Every time one of these creatures touches you, you'll be "scared to death", and consequently lose a life. \ The scepter is a magic stick used to make you invisible to all creatures in the mansion. To use the scepter you must drop any other object, and pick up (touch) the scepter. As long as you hold the scepter, you cannot be "scared to death". Like all other objects, while you are holding the scepter, it appears at the bottom, right side of the screen. \ Each stairway travels in one direction only up or down. Stairways leading down start with large steps decreasing in size. Stairways leading up start with small steps increasing in size. Each floor is numbered and color coded. The number is located at the lower left portion of the screen. [H.E.R.O.] File=/rom/Hero.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=HERO 1 Year=1984 Genre=atvi Description=Guide R. Hero through caverns filled with flying critters, tentacles, moving walls, and other dangers. He's equipped with a jetpack, laser beam, and a limited supply of dynamite, all of which will be needed to negotiate a path to his ultimate goal, the trapped miners. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 5. The higher the number, the deeper within the mine R. Hero begins and the more advanced the challenge. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move with the joystick. Press the controller button to fire the Microlaser Beam. To drop dynamite, land and move near the wall you want to destroy and place and ignite the dynamite by pushing the joystick down. Once set, move out of the way or be blown up! \ Press and hold the joystick up to fly again.\ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Move the joystick to start. \ Rescue all miners before running out of lives. \ The power gauge fills at the start of each level. Power begins to diminish when the joystick is moved at the beginning of each level or after a reserve life appears on the screen. If power runs out and a reserve life remains, R. Hero reappears at the top of that level. \ Use the Microlaser Beam to vanquish enemies. Use the dynamite (you start with six) to get past otherwise impassable walls. \ A heat-resistant raft floats on certain stretches of the lava river. A word to the wise: Getting off isn't always easy! \ Score 20,000 points to earn an extra life. [Home Run] File=/rom/HomeRun.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Home Run Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=Play a scaled-back, fast-paced version of baseball, America's favorite pastime. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 - 4 are for one player, and games 5 - 8 are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ As the Batter, swing the bat by moving your Joystick from the neutral position to any other position. If, after hitting the ball, it looks as though the outfielder has a chance to make a putout if you take an extra base, push the controller button before reaching base and your runner(s) will stop at that base. \ As a Pitcher, to pitch the ball, press the controller button. Throw curves, fastballs, screwballs, or change-up pitches by moving your joystick after the ball leaves the pitcher. \ As an Outfielder, after the batter hits the ball, move with the joystick to catch the ball and make putouts. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The difficulty switches control the speed of the outfielders and batted balls. In the A position, the outfielders and batted balls will move more slowly than in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Play Home Run just as you would play baseball. The left or blue player is the "visiting team" and is the first to bat. The pitcher pitches the ball. Three strikes (either swinging or pitched) are an out; four balls (any pitch not struck at that is not over the plate) are a walk and the batter advances to first base. \ If the pitcher hits the batter (and the batter does not strike at the pitch, or the pitch does not pass over Home Plate) the batter will advance to first base. \ If the batter hits the ball, the outfielder(s) can catch the ball and make a putout by touching first base ahead of the runner or by tagging the runner. If there are other runners on base, a putout can be made by tagging any runner, or, if the runner is in a "force play", by touching the base in front of that runner. With practice, double-plays (two outs on one pitched ball) can be made with ease. [Indy 500] File=/rom/Indy500.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Indy 500 Year=1977 Genre=atari Description=Steer your car around one of the many tracks, racing around hairpin turns to get to the finish line before your opponent. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 14. Games 1 - 4 are Race Car games. Games 5 - 8 are Crash n' Score games. Games 9 and 10 are Tag games. Games 11 - 14 are Ice Race games. Games 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, and 14 are one-player time trial games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move your joystick in the direction you want to steer and press the controller button to accelerate. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, your car travels at a higher speed than in the B position, making it harder to control. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player time trial games, you race against the clock. See how many laps you can make around the tracks in 60 seconds. Race against another player in two-player racing games. The first player to complete 25 laps wins. \ In games of Crash n' Score, a player scores one point each time his race car crashes into the white square. In one-player games, a player has 60 seconds to make as many hits as possible. In two-player games, the first player to score 50 points wins. \ During two-player Tag games, you score one point for each second you avoid being tagged by your opponent. \ In all games you lose only time, not points, when you crash into any playfield boundary or barrier. [Kaboom!] File=/rom/Kaboom.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Kaboom Year=1981 Genre=atvi, paddle Description=You're about to face the world's most unpredictable and relentless "Mad Bomber." He hates losing as much as you love winning. So, to keep him frowning, grab your water buckets to catch and extinguish his falling bombs! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to alternate between a one player game and two players taking turns. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. \ Push the joystick or turn the paddle left or right to move the buckets of water in that direction to catch the falling bombs. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, water buckets are only half size. With switches in the B position, water buckets are full size. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Press the joystick or paddle button to start the action. \ Each time you catch a bomb in one of your buckets of water, you score points. The point value of each bomb depends on how fast that bomb is falling and which of eight successively harder groups, or levels, that the bomb is in. The object of the game is to catch as many bombs as you can and get as close as possible to the 999,999 maximum points. \ Score 1,000 points to earn an extra life. [Maze Craze] File=/rom/MazeCraze.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Maze Craze Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=Control a blue or red cop and patrol a maze of robber-infested city blocks as you try to make it to the exit. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 16, visibility, and speed you wish to play. \ Although this is primarily a two player game, it may also be played by one player depending whether anything has to happen to a second player in order for you to exit the maze and end the game. \ All of the 16 games have four visibility options. Games 6 and 7 feature additional variations. Game 6 with visibility 1 is a 5 Robbers game variation. Game 6 with all other visibilities is a Player Peek game variation. Game 7 with visibility 1 combines the 5 Robbers and Terror game variations. Game 7 with all other visibilities is a Scouts game variation. All other games allow you to choose your visibility options. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move your cop with the joystick. Press the controller button to select a new maze for the game you've just completed, or use special features offered in some game variations. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In the A position, your cop moves at the same speed as the robbers. In the B position, your cop moves faster than the robbers. The left player uses the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch and the right player uses the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play, choose a different maze for the game you've selected, or to see an invisible maze before you exit. \ The first player to reach the exit on the right side of the maze wins the game. \ How fast can your cop react to danger? The number at the top left side of the playfield represents the speed at which cops and robbers travel: 1 - Medium, 2 - Fast, 3 - Slow, and 4 - Calculatingly slow. \ During some games, all or some of the city blocks may suffer blackouts. The top right number on the screen represents the amount of the maze you can see during a game: 1 - Straight forward action with all of the maze visible throughout the game, 2 - A small portion of the maze is invisible, 3 - Danger increases with a large portion of the maze invisible, and 4 - The ultimate in suspense with all of the maze invisible. [Miniature Golf] File=/rom/MiniatureGolf.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Miniature Golf Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Play a nine hole mini golf course, complete with moving obstacles. To beat the par for each hole, you'll need a good sense of timing, along with an ability to judge distance. Win by getting the lowest score. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between a 1 or 2 player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick to position the club. Press the controller button to release the club and hit the ball. \ The club actually covers the ball at the beginning of each hole. Your first step therefore is to move the club into a hitting position away from the ball. The farther away you move the club, the longer the ball rolls or travels when hit. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The ball travels a much longer distance when the difficulty switch is in the A position than it does when it's in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ There are nine holes in which you must succeed in hitting the ball into a cup. Each time you hit the ball in an effort to reach the cup, it's called a stroke. Although the number of strokes you take to hit the ball into the cup is unlimited, each hole has a designated par. Par represents the number of strokes you are ideally supposed to take to complete the hole. \ After being struck, the ball travels along the same line of trajectory already established by the club. \ You may position the club anywhere on the playfield (regardless of course boundaries), before releasing it to hit the ball. Remember however, that the ball must travel around all boundaries, including moving obstacles. [Missile Command] File=/rom/MissileCommand.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Missile Command Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=Defend your cities and missile base from waves of ballistic and cruise missiles. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 34. Games 1 - 17 are for one player, and games 18 - 34 are for two players. Game selections change between Fast Target Control, Slow Target Control, Dumb Cruise Missile, Smart Cruise Missile, and First Wave combinations. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move your ABM missile cursor with the joystick. Press the controller button to launch your ABM. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ When the difficulty switch is in the A position, your ABMs move at a slower pace, making it more difficult to defend your cities and missile base versus the B position. Each player may choose his or her own difficulty level. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The object of the game is to defend your cities and missile bases. The enemy fires interplanetary ballistic missiles and cruise missiles, both of which are aimed to destroy your cities and missile base. There are only two types of cruise missiles; smart cruise missiles, which try to evade your anti-ballistic missiles (ABMs), and dumb cruise missiles, which fall in a straight path. \ With each wave you have 30 ABMs for defense. Your launching missile base (bottom, center of playfield), contains only 10 ABMs at a time. As each set of 10 ABMs is fired, you automatically receive 10 more from your underground missile dump. Once you have fired all 30 ABMs, you are defenseless until a new wave begins. [Millipede] File=/rom/Millipede.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Millipede Year=1984 Genre=atari Description=Blast the creepy, crawly bugs - jumping spiders, buzzing bees, bouncing beetles, mosquitoes, dragonflies, inchworms, and earwigs - that have invaded your little garden patch. But watch out, the millipedes - cousins to the famed centipede - are the most insidious insects of all! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT or controller button to select the number of points you want to begin a game with. \ In the first game of any gameplaying session, you can start with 0, 15,000, or 30,000 points. Move your joystick up to increase your score and back to decrease your score. After the first game, you can start at up to 15,000 points below your previous high score (in 15,000 point increments up to 300,000). \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Push the joystick in the same direction you want to move your magic wand. You can move about one-quarter of the way up the screen, as well as to the left and right edges of the screen. \ To shoot sparks, press the joystick button. You can fire sparks as long as you press the button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play or the controller button and joystick to first select the starting score. Each time START button is pressed, the game starts over. \ If a millipede touches a poisonous mushroom - poisonous mushrooms are colored differently from most - watch out! The millipede will charge directly at you! \ When the insects swarm, you're in for big trouble if you're not alert. Only a spider can enter the garden while the mosquitoes, bees, or dragonflies are swarming. You get 100 extra points (above the normal point value) for the second swarming bug you destroy, 200 for the third, and so forth - up to 1000 extra points per bug. But beware! Swarming bugs fly fast and furious! [MotoRodeo] File=/rom/Motorodeo.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=MotoRodeo Year=1990 Genre=atari Description=Use your monster truck to power through death-defying jumps, car crushing, wall smashing, mud plowing, and more. To be king of the road, you'll have to outscore your competitor in this most dangerous obstacle course. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick to control your truck or blazer and press the controller button to accelerate. Move the joystick right and left to quickly get through muddy bogs. Move the joystick left or right to control spin while you jump. Move the joystick down to do a wheelie if you are on flat ground. \ If you picked up a nitro unit (an N), tap the joystick up to use the nitro for a quick burst of extra acceleration and a small jump. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Push LEFT DIFFICULTY to position A for point scoring and position B for timing. If you are in timing mode, the first player to cross the finish line wins. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Move each connected joystick forward or backward to select player or computer. Then select the type of vehicle, truck or blazer, equipped with either tires or trax. Tires allows you to go over obstacles easier. With trax, you bounce higher, making it easier to fly over obstacles. Once satisfied with the selections, press either controller button. \ The second selection screen offers either competition or practice. For competition, you play against another player or the computer. A competition includes all obstacles. Move the controller forward or backward to highlight Easy, Medium, or Hard and press the controller button to begin the competition. \ For Practice, move the controller forward or backward to highlight Jump, Platform, Car Crush, Wall, Spring, Ramp, Mud, or Spin. Press the controller button to begin a practice run of the obstacle you selected. \ To return to the opening screen and restart the game with the currently selected options, press START button. [Night Driver] File=/rom/NightDriver.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Night Driver Year=1978 Genre=atari, paddle Description=You're in the driver's seat and the track is just ahead of you. All you have to do is accelerate and steer your car through one of the four tracks. Each time you veer off the track and hit one of the pylons or hit an oncoming car, you'll crash. How far can you get before time runs out? Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 - 4 are timed, while games 5 - 8 have no time limit. Games are rated from easiest (games 1 and 5) to hardest (games 3 and 7). Games 4 and 8 have random difficulties. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle. \ Move the controller to steer. Use the controller button to accelerate and start the action. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch controls the maximum speed that your car will travel. In the A position, the car will travel the fastest. In the B position, the maximum speed will be slower, which is good for beginners. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch may or may not act as a warning device, depending on its position. In the A position, oncoming cars will not honk before they appear on the screen. In the B position, oncoming cars honk just before they appear. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The object in all of the games is to obtain a high score. Scoring is done automatically by the computer as you travel through the course. As you pass certain spots (invisible to you) on the track, the computer automatically tallies one point to your score, which is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen. [Off The Wall] File=/rom/OffTheWall.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Off the wall Year=1989 Genre=atari Description=Play as Kung Fu Lu in your quest to crush an ancient, evil wall guarded by a mystical dragon and cunning blackbird. Use your staff to deflect the dragon's spell balls and destroy the wall. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select the skill level (Peasant, Student, or Master) and number of players (one or two) for the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one or two player games. \ Move Kung Fu Lu left and right with the joystick. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Change the difficulty switch to increase (position A) or decrease (position B) Kung Fu Lu's speed. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin. Press START button to start a new game. \ The objective in Off The Wall is to score the highest number of points. Play against another player or try to beat your best score. Score points by using the ball to knock bricks out of the wall, hitting the dragon beyond the bricks, or catching the Mystery Token for bonus points. When the player clears four brick waves, he automatically advances to the next skill level. \ Using the joystick, the player must position Kung Fu Lu in the path of the falling ball. Kung Fu Lu uses his staff to deflect the ball back to the brick wall to break out bricks. If Kung Fu Lu misses a ball, he loses a life. \ In each game the player starts with five lives. The number of lives remaining displays in the upper left hand corner of the screen, with one square for each remaining life. If you break out all the bricks, or hit the dragon six times, the wave finishes and you receive another life. Each time you hit the dragon, the background behind the bricks becomes lighter. \ After you hit the ball the first time, different tokens begin dropping at random. If Kung Fu Lu catches a token, he receives special powers. Each token has its own special power. Kung Fu Lu keeps these special powers until he misses a ball or the token timer (a bar graph in the upper right corner) runs out. [Outlaw] File=/rom/Outlaw.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Outlaw Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=As a gunslinger, take aim to shoot targets or your opponent's gunslinger. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 16. Games 1 - 12 are two-player Gunslinger Games. Games 13 - 16 are one-player Target Shoots. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the gunslinger with the joystick. When you want to aim the gunslinger's gun, press the controller button. Hold the button down while you control the movement of the gunslinger's arm up and down and aim. After you have aimed the gunslinger's arm, release the controller button to shoot the bullet. \ In one-player games (Target Shoot), you control the movement of a gunfighter with the left, or P1, joystick controller. Practice target shooting with the moving target that appears on the screen. \ In two-player games (Gunslinger Games), each player controls the movement of a gunslinger with a joystick controller. You score points when your gunslinger shoots your opponent's gunslinger. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In A position, your bullets will disappear in flight if your gunslinger is shot before your bullets hit a target. \ In the B position, your bullets will continue in flight even if your gunslinger is hit before your bullet hits a target. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player games, you score one point each time a bullet from your gunslinger's gun hits the moving target. You have 99 seconds to score a maximum of ten points. The timing clock appears in the upper right corner of the playfield; the gunslinger's score is in the upper left corner. \ In two-player games you score one point each time a bullet from your gunslinger's gun hits the opposing gunslinger. When a gunslinger is hit, it will sit down and the point appears at the top of the screen. The score of the gunslinger from the left side of the playfield appears in the upper left corner; the right playfield gunslinger's score appears in the upper right corner. The first player to score ten points wins the game. [Pitfall!] File=/rom/Pitfall.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Pitfall 1 Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Guide Pitfall Harry through a maze of jungle scenes, jump over or avoid many deadly dangers, and grab the most treasures in the shortest possible time. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick left or right to run in that direction. Press the joystick button while running to the left or right to jump over obstacles. To climb up ladders, push up on the joystick, and, to climb down, push down. To grab a swinging vine, press the joystick button while running to the left or right. To let go of the vine, push down on the joystick at the end of a swing. To collect a treasure, run over it. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. The timer counts down from 20 minutes as soon as Pitfall Harry is moved. Each time START button is pressed, the game starts over. \ There are 255 jungle scenes through which Pitfall Harry can travel. Each scene covered underground is equivalent to three on the surface. Pitfall! has a circular maze, which means that, if Pitfall Harry safely goes through all 255 different scenes, he will come back to the starting point. \ Each treasure you find will add points to your score. There are eight of each type of treasure in the entire game, 32 in all, for a total of 112,000 points. A perfect score is 114,000 points, reached by collecting all treasures and without losing any points by falling down holes or tripping on logs. [Pressure Cooker] File=/rom/PressureCooker.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Pressure Cooker Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Help Short-Order Sam fill each order with the proper combination of tomatoes, onions, lettuce, and cheese. And don't forget the bun! Be sure to rush the completed orders to the Wrapping Room as fast as you can. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1, 3, 5, and 7 are for one player. Games 2, 4, 6, and 8 are for two players. The higher the game level, the less time you have to complete each order. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move Sam with the joystick. Press and hold the controller button to reject unwanted condiments. Press the controller button to drop completed hamburgers into the wrapping chute. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, music only plays between waves. In the B position, music plays continuously. The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch is not used. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each time you catch a condiment you score 5 points. You score 10 points for placing any type of condiment on any hamburger for the first time. 100 points are awarded each time you drop a completed hamburger into the correct wrapping chute. Efficiency Bonus Points and Burger Bonus Points reward you and boost your score at the end of each wave. The game ends when your Performance Rating drops to zero. \ Flying condiments must collide with Sam's rather rotund stomach -- head-on, left or right sides -- to be caught. When they hit him anywhere else, splat! \ When you don't want a condiment, press the controller button and the condiments will bounce off Sam's stomach. None of the orders ever require any condiment more than once. \ Condiments are placed one at a time on the burgers. Touch the burger with the ingredient to place the ingredient on it. When every ingredient needed has been placed on a burger, the color bar on the Electronic Order Board corresponding to that order flashes. \ To complete the order, rush Sam to the bottom of the Assembly Room and enter the Wrapping Room. Drop the hamburger into the wrapping chute that is the same color as the flashing bar on the Electronic Order Board. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Video Olympics] File=/rom/VideoOlympics.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Video Olympics Year=1977 Genre=atari, paddle Description=Compete in classic ball and paddle games like Pong, Soccer, Hockey, Handball, Volleyball, Basketball, and more! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 50. \ Games 1 - 8 are Pong games, with games 1 and 2 for one player, games 3 and 4 for two players, and games 5 - 8 for four players. \ Games 9 - 12 are Super Pong games, with games 9 and 10 for two players, and games 11 and 12 for four players. \ Games 13 - 22 are Foozpong games, with games 13, 14, 19, and 20, for two players, and games 15 - 18, and 21 and 22, for four players. \ Games 23 - 32 are Hockey games, with games 23 - 28 for two players, and games 29 - 32 for four players. \ Games 33 and 34 are four player Quadrapong games. \ Games 35 - 38 are Handball games, with 35 and 36 for two players, and 37 and 38 for four players. \ Games 39 - 42 are Volleyball games, with games 39 and 40 for two players, and games 41 and 42 for four players. \ Games 43 - 50 are Basketball games, with games 43 - 46 for two players, and games 47 - 50 for four players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Four player games are not available with joysticks. \ If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. For four player games, a second set of paddles must be plugged into the P2, or right, joystick port. \ Push or turn the controller to move the paddles. Press the controller button to speed hit, whammy, catch the ball, or jump the paddle depending upon the game selected. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switch position A makes your paddle half the size it is in position B. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Radar Lock] File=/rom/RadarLock.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Radar Lock Year=1989 Genre=atari Description=The safety of a nearby aircraft carrier is in your hands. You are the ace of a supersonic F-22, the latest, most powerful airborne weapon yet created. Your allies are nowhere in sight, so it's up to you to clear the skies of enemy interceptors, stealth fighters, and bombers! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button or move the controller left or right to choose between a one or two player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick, and the P2, or right, joystick. In one player games, the player uses both joysticks. \ In one-player games, the pilot controls both the firing of weapons and the jet's flight. Press the controller button on the left, or P1, joystick, to fire the selected weapon. To increase your jet's speed, hold down the controller button on the right, or P2, joystick. \ In two-player games, the flight officer uses the left, or P1, joystick, to fly the ship, and the weapons officer uses the right, or P2, joystick, to control and select the weapons. \ For the P1, or left, joystick, push up to dive, down to climb, left to bank left, and right to bank right. For the P2, or right, joystick, push up to select the machine gun, push left to select the guided missiles, and push right to select the proximity missiles. \ When the currently selected weapon runs out of ammo, it will automatically change to the next available weapon. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. Press START button to restart the game. \ Your jet starts out equipped with five guided missiles and about 2550 rounds of machine gun ammunition. In Missions 3, 4 and 5, your jet also carries three proximity missiles. \ The primary function of guided missiles is to destroy enemy bombers. When an enemy jet is within range, the missile-lock radar will turn bright blue and you will hear a beeping tone. Steer your jet until the locked-on enemy jet is in the cross-hairs. The missile-lock radar will then turn deep-red, and you will hear a steady tone. Fire your missile immediately to destroy the enemy jet. \ When an enemy jet is not within range, the missile-lock radar will be light blue if the jet is in front of you and violet if the jet is behind you. \ In addition to the guided missiles, your jet is equipped with rapid-fire machine guns. You begin your missions with this weapon ready to fire. The number of rounds remaining is displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the screen. Use the machine guns to destroy all enemy jets except for bombers; it takes 25 hits from a machine gun to destroy a bomber. \ In Missions 3, 4 and 5, your jet is equipped with proximity missiles. Press the controller button to launch the missile; release the fire button to detonate it. When you detonate the missile, all visible enemy jets other than bombers will be destroyed. \ Do not release the fire button too soon, or you will risk detonating the missile too close to your own jet and destroying it. [Realsports Baseball] File=/rom/RealSportsBaseball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Realsports Baseball Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Hit a home run, make a spectacular catch, or force a triple play! Here's your chance to prove your skills on the baseball diamond. You control the ballplayers and the strategy in this sophisticated, action-packed sports simulation. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. Games 1 and 2 are for two players, and games 3 and 4 are for one player. In game 1, the batter can hit every pitch. In games 2 - 4, the batter cannot hit balls. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. To start the first inning, press one of the controller buttons. \ Make the batter swing by holding down your controller button and flicking the joystick at the same time. The direction you move the joystick determines the direction and trajectory of the ball. \ Move the joystick straight up to bunt the ball; to the right to hit a ground ball in left field; to the left to hit a ground ball in right field; and straight back to hit fly balls and home runs. Fly balls and home runs can also be hit by moving the joystick diagonally to the lower left and lower right; the lower right position hits the ball to left field, and the lower left position hits to right field. \ When an outfielder catches a fly ball, the batter is automatically out. If the outfielder misses the ball, however, the ball will sail over the stadium wall and will be counted as a home run. When a home run is hit, the ball will reappear only after the batter has rounded the diamond and touched home base. \ The direction of a hit ball can be affected by the timing of your swing. Like regular baseball, swinging early will "pull" the ball to left field. Swinging late--that is, swinging when the ball is nearly past you--will tend to slice the ball towards right field. \ Once a batter has successfully hit the ball, he becomes a runner. A runner's direction is determined by holding the controller button down and pushing the joystick to either the right of the left (Right: runner advance, Left: runner retreat). After a batter has hit the ball, let the joystick return to the neutral (center) position, then push it to the right to make him advance to first base. To continue running, keep holding the controller button down and push the joystick to the right. To make a runner retreat--if, for example, he must go back a base to avoid being tagged out--simply hold down the controller button and push the joystick to the left. \ Stealing a base is a two-step maneuver: First you transfer control from the batter to a base runner, then you make him run. To transfer control, move the joystick without holding down the controller button in the direction of the base that the runner is on. Move the joystick right to indicate first base; up to indicate second base; left to indicate third base; and down to indicate home plate. The controlled player will turn slightly brighter in color. \ Make the base stealer run by holding the controller button down and pushing the joystick to the right. If the pitcher on the opposing team has the ball and is not moving, the base runner will steal the base quickly. If any outfielder with the ball is moving, e.g., running or throwing the ball, the runner will move much more slowly towards the base. Therefore it is best to steal a base when the pitcher is motionless and "isn't looking." \ After the runner has stolen a base, transfer control back to the batter by pushing the joystick straight down. \ Pitching the ball is also done in two steps: First you program the type of pitch, then you throw the ball. As an ace pitcher, you can select a FASTBALL, a RISER, or a SINKER. You can also psych out your opponent by throwing an INTENTIONAL BALL. Push straight up to pitch a fastball; directly right to pitch a sinker; directly left to pitch a riser; and straight down to pitch an intentional ball. An intentional ball will always be counted as a ball unless the batter swings, in which case it counts as a strike. \ Occasionally a batter can hit an intentional ball (just as a real batter can sometimes hit a ball outside the strike zone), but this happens less than 20% of the time. All other pitches deliver more strikes than balls. The percentage of strikes to balls is randomly controlled by the computer--some days your fastball will deliver more strikes than your sinker, other days the reverse will be true. Experiment to discover your best pitch! \ After programming the pitch, throw the ball by holding down the controller button and lightly flicking the joystick down. \ The player with the ball can throw to the pitcher or any of the four basemen. To throw to first base, hold down the controller button and push the joystick to the right. To throw to second base push straight up. To throw to third base push to the left. Throw to the catcher at home plate by pushing the joystick straight down. Leave the joystick in the neutral (center) position to throw the ball to the pitcher. \ Remember to release the controller button after the ball is thrown, or you may accidentally throw the ball again after it is caught. \ If an intended receiver of the ball misses the catch, the ball will roll and come to a stop on the field. Pick up the ball by running the controlled player over it. You'll hear the "plop" of the ball hitting the glove when it is picked up. \ You can identify a controlled player by color; controlled players are solid yellow or pink. Non-controlled players are two-toned white and blue. If you're in doubt, move the joystick to see which team member is under your control. \ Use your joystick to move a controlled player in the outfield. [Realsports Basketball] File=/rom/RealSportsBasketball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Realsports Basketball Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=It's fast-breaking, two-on-two basketball excitement! Shoot the ball in the basket and score more points than your opponent. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 12. Games 1 - 6 are for one player, and games 7 - 12 are for two players. Game selections alternate between Fast and Slow speeds and game length. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Use the joystick to move your two players, or, in combination with the controller button, direct your shot or pass. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Use the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to enable (A) or disable (B) foul detection. \ Use the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch to affect the computer defense. A is intense and B is relaxed. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ The clock runs continuously during plays. \ There are no time outs, no penalties, no shot clock, no 3-point shots, no foul line shots, and no running out-of-bounds for either the player or ball. Each game consists of four quarters. [Realsports Soccer] File=/rom/RealSportsSoccer.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Realsports Soccer Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Fast moving player-control lets you kick, pass, and dribble the ball down the field, around your opponents, and on to victory! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 14 to select between three skill levels, duration of the game of five or nine minutes, and number of players between one or two. Games 1 - 8 are for two players, and games 9 - 14 are for one player. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Use your joystick to move your controlled player, who appears brighter than their teammates, in the direction you want the player to run or to dribble the ball. To KICK or PASS, point the joystick in the direction you want the ball to go, and press the controller button. Fielders must touch the ball with their legs to have control; the ball cannot be passed or blocked with any other part of the body. \ When playing defense, you can switch control from one player to another. Press the controller button until the desired player appears brighter. Notice that the control switches from player to player in sequence. When you are ready to steal the ball, run your controlled player into the ball. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the switch in the B position, the wraparound feature is active. The A position has no function. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ At the start of the game, the ball is placed at the center of the halfway line. Blue fielders are on the left side of the line and reds on the right. \ Either team can take possession of the ball. Fielders are assigned to one of three lanes in the playing field and must dribble the ball within their lane or pass to another fielder. \ Each player controls one fielder at a time. The computer controls the rest of the team. As the offense, you control the player with the ball. As the defense, you can switch control from one player to another by pressing the controller button. \ You can use the wraparound feature in this game, if active, to run your player off one side of the screen to have him reappear on the other side of the screen. When using this feature, the controlled player must not be in possession of the ball. A controlled player can run off either side of the screen, but cannot run off the end of the field. \ Only your controlled player can score a goal. [Realsports Volleyball] File=/rom/RealSportsVolleyball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Realsports Volleyball Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Judge the height of the ball from its shadow in this fast-paced game of volleyball. As the sun sets, the shadow disappears, and you're on your own! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. Games 1 and 3 are for one player, and games 2 and 4 are for two players. Games 1 and 2 include the setup feature. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ There are two players on each team. Use the controller to move both players around the court. The players move in the same direction as the directional control. \ The computer randomly awards the first serve to either team. To pick up the ball, move your joystick until your top player connects with the ball. Press the controller button to serve. \ Move your players to meet the ball as it comes over the net. In games 1 and 2, your team sets up the ball by passing it back and forth between themselves before hitting it over the net. In these games, a set up consists of three hits unless you spike the ball. \ To spike the ball, press the controller button as your player meets the ball. Spiking will make the ball move faster and lower over the net. A player must be at least halfway to the net in order to spike. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With switches in the A position, the players move more slowly than when in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the first controller's button to begin play. \ As in a traditional volleyball game, two teams hit the ball back and forth over the net. If the serving team misses the ball or hits it out of bounds, the other team is awarded the serve. If the receiving team misses the ball or hits it out of bounds, the serving team scores 1 point. \ A team must score 15 points with a 2-point lead to win the game. [Return to Haunted House] File=/rom/ReturnToHauntedHouse.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Return to Haunted House Year=2004 Genre=atari Description=Find the skull of old man Graves and return it to the crypt under the cemetery by utilizing various keys and tools to explore the house and avoid the ghosts. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose the skill level. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Push the joystick in the direction you want to move. To pick up an object, just touch it. To drop an object, press the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ If the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch is in the B position, the ghosts will hesitate before trying to consume your life force. If in the A position, it will be more difficult to escape the ghosts. \ If the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch is in the B position, all ghosts will flee from the scepter. If in the A position, not all ghosts will flee from the scepter. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ To open any locked door, touch it with that door's corresponding colored key. Some entranceways are opened with objects other than keys. The door will slide open and you can enter by moving upward through the door. \ If you are leaving through the door with the key, it is advisable to push the key out first or you may inadvertently close the door behind you. \ Various objects are scattered about to help you in your quest. For instance, the scepter will protect you from ghosts and the ladder will help you climb over walls into normally unreachable areas. [River Raid] File=/rom/RiverRaid.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=River Raid 0 Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Your mission is to score as many points as possible by destroying enemy tankers, helicopters, fuel depots, jets, and bridges before your jet crashes or runs out of fuel. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to alternate between a one player game and two players taking turns. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick left or right to turn in that direction. Press the joystick button to fire missiles. Push the joystick up to fly faster, or down to go slower. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, missiles streak straight ahead. With switches in the B position, you can control the direction of your missiles after they have been fired by steering with your joystick. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Move the joystick or press the joystick button to start the action. \ Always keep an eye on your fuel gauge. Fuel is used up at a constant rate, regardless of speed. When your fuel drops below 1/4 full, a warning siren sounds to alert you--it's time to refuel! The slower you fly over a depot, the more fuel you receive. A bell will sound while you are refueling. The sound changes to a higher pitch when your fuel tank is full. The farther down the river you fly, the fewer fuel depots you'll find, so you'll have to increase your flight speed if you want to survive. \ You lose a jet when it collides with the river bank or one of the enemy objects (except fuel depots), or when you run out of fuel. If you lose a jet before destroying a bridge, you will restart at the beginning of that section. If you lose a jet after destroying a bridge, you will instead restart at that location. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Saboteur] File=/rom/Saboteur.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Saboteur Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Take the role of cybernetic life-form Hotot, who has discovered an alien missile base hidden on his planet. Manned by strange blue aliens, these evil intruders are using the planet as a launching site for their deadly warhead, which is poised to destroy the galaxy's power source. With the help of the bird-like Gorfons, you must destroy the warhead, and prevent the destruction of the galaxy in this multi-level shooter! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4, with 1 being normal difficulty and 4 being insane difficulty. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Use the joystick to move Hotot through the rocket complex. \ At the Launch Site, press and hold the controller button to shoot up to four shots at one time. Use the joystick to aim shots in one of eight directions. \ At the Warhead Assembly and Warhead Battle, press the controller button to shoot up to two shots at once. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Use the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to control game difficulty. If set to A, Hotot will have 29 seconds to complete the Warhead Assembly Screen. If set to B, Hotot will have 38 seconds. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ The object of the game is to help Hotot destroy the warhead and save his galaxy from annihilation. Gameplay takes places across three different boards, each of which represents different stages of the rocket construction. [Save Mary] File=/rom/SaveMary.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Save mary Year=1990 Genre=atari Description=Use your crane to drop blocks for Mary to climb on top of and escape the rising water level! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button or move the controller to choose between Novice, Standard, and Advanced difficulty levels. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move the crane with the joystick. Press the controller button to grab a block or power-up. Lower the crane with the joystick. Press the controller button again to drop a block or power-up. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ Drop blocks to build a platform for Mary to climb above the rising water level. \ Grab and drop one of the six power-ups at the top of either canyon ledge to activate them. \ When dropping blocks, the bottom portion of the pieces must be supported, or they will break. \ Two-block pieces never break. They only need the bottom block to be supported. Three-block pieces need at least two blocks to be supported. Four-block and six-block pieces need two blocks to be supported. \ Blocks will break if parts of them fall on the left and right edges of the canyon or if you try to place them above a full water level. [Secret Quest] File=/rom/SecretQuest.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Secret Quest Year=1989 Genre=atari Description=Vicious creatures now occupy eight vital space stations in their effort to conquer our peaceful solar system. It is up to you to destroy these locations and their evil inhabitants in order to save the human race. It's furious, non-stop action, and you'll need speed, courage, combat skills, and a sharp sense of direction. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button on the console and UP to bring up the Status screen. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Push the joystick in the direction you want to move. To pick up an object, walk over and touch it. You will be able to pick up all objects you find, but you can have only one active weapon or sonic key. You can change the active weapon/sonic key from the Status screen. To use an active object, press the fire button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Search through the rooms and find the secret destruct code on each level. Find the self-destruction mechanism and activate it by entering the secret destruct code(s). Race to the teleporter room and escape the alien station before it explodes. The teleporter automatically sends you to the next station. \ Along the way you pick up weapons and other objects and fight alien creatures such as Spinner and Dragon. Fighting aliens takes precious oxygen and energy, which you can replenish each time you destroy all aliens in a room. \ The game ends when you destroy all eight stations, run out of oxygen, or don't make it to the teleporter room in time after activating the self-destruct mechanism. When the game ends, the title screen appears with your total score. \ You can leave a game in progress and start again later at the same station with the points you've already earned. Any number of games can be left and resumed, as long as each game is started with a different set of initials. \ To leave a game you wish to restart later, follow these steps: \ A. Note the initials you entered when you started the game. \ B. Display the Status screen. \ C. Write down the re-entry code sequence that appears at the bottom of the screen. \ Follow these steps to restart a game: \ A. Start a new game. \ B. Enter your initials. You must enter the initials you used when you started the game you want to resume. \ C. When the game screen appears (the first room of station 1), display the Status screen. You can only restart the game from the first room of station 1. \ D. Push the SELECT button to begin changing codes (the first code will flash.) \ E. Move the joystick up or down to change codes and left or right to move between the codes. Be sure to enter the codes in the correct sequence. \ F. Return to the game screen at the previous level by pressing SELECT button on the console and UP. [Sky Diver] File=/rom/SkyDiver.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sky Diver Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=You're ready for the big jump! The longer you can wait to open your parachute, the more points you score. Steer your parachute against the wind to guide yourself towards the bull's-eye. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 5. In game 2, the landing pads are placed in different spots for each jump. In games 3 and 4, the landing pads move back and forth. In game 5, there's only one landing pad for both sky divers, so first one to land gets all of the points. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for the first player, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in this two player game. \ Push the controller button to release the sky diver from the plane. Push down on the joystick to open the parachute. Move the joystick left or right to steer the sky diver against the wind. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In the A position, the planes fly significant faster across the screen than they do in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ To score points, you must release the sky diver from the airplane, open the parachute, control his downward drift, and then land squarely on the pad at the bottom of the screen. \ The longer you wait to open the parachute, the more points you score. [Slot Racers] File=/rom/SlotRacers.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Slot Racers Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=The goal of this game is to drive a slot car around a maze and shoot your opponent more times than they shoot you. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 9. Games 1 - 4 have missiles that travel faster than the cars. Games 5 - 7 make the cars faster than the missiles. Games 8 and 9 do not automatically make missiles turn corners, which may cause them to become trapped in front of a wall. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for the first player, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in this two player game. \ Push the joystick up to accelerate, back to brake, and left and right to steer. You can only turn the car when it's moving. \ To fire a missile, press the controller button. After you fire a missile, there are three ways the missile can travel. Control the way the missile travels with your joystick. \ If you want the missile to turn left or right after firing, move the joystick to the left or right and press the controller button. Except in games 8 and 9, the missile will automatically turn at every corner when you press the controller button without moving the joystick. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In the B position, you can shoot consecutive missiles. If a previously fired missile is still on the screen when you fire a new missile, the old missile will disappear. \ In A position, you cannot fire another missile if you already have a missile on the screen. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to being play. \ There are four chase mazes. Each player steers one car through the maze. Chase your opponent and attempt to hit him with one of the secret missiles fired from your car headlights. You score a point each time you hit your opponent with a missile. First player to 25 points wins. [Solaris] File=/rom/Solaris.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Solaris Year=1986 Genre=atari Description=Save the brave Solaris Pioneers from the vicious Zylon fleet! Speed your StarCruiser through the galaxy, firing photon torpedoes to show them you mean business. Blast Cobra Ships, Star Pirates, and Mechnoids before they blast you! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left joystick for this one player game. Use of the P2, or right joystick's controller button is optional for viewing the Galactic Scanner at will. Move with the joystick and fire with the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. Press the controller button to launch your StarCruiser into hyperspace. \ To attack a Zylon force or defend a Federation Planet, move to its sector and press the controller button. You immediately hyperwarp to that sector. Watch your Targeting Computer during hyperwarp. It shows your StarCruiser hyperwarping in and out of focus, while the number on the right of the Computer displays your hyperwarp focus value (0 is a perfect warp, 3 is terrible). Move the joystick left or right to keep your fighter in focus. \ Once you land in an enemy sector, start blasting. Watch your Targeting Computer to find unseen Zylon ships. The number on the left of the Computer tells their left/right distance from you; the number on the right tells their up/down distance. Zero means they're straight ahead. \ When your Targeting Computer is damaged it will flash bright white. Use the left/right, up/down numbers to track the enemy until you can dock at a Federation Planet for repairs. \ When you've destroyed all Zylons in a sector, the Galactic Scanner reappears. To hyperwarp to another quadrant, move the StarCruiser to a sector with an Exit and press the controller button. Choose an enemy sector from that quadrant and get going! \ An alarm will ring when Zylons are attacking a Federation Planet in your quadrant, or you'll spot the attack on your Galactic Scanner (the planet will flash). You've got 40 seconds to save the planet. If you fail, the whole quadrant regresses into a Red Zone, and joystick control is reversed. Watch it! \ When your fuel gets critically low, another alarm buzzes. Hyperwarp to a Federation Planet as soon as you can for refueling. Dock in a Docking Bay, by flying into it, to refuel and repair any damage to your StarCruiser. If you run out of fuel, your StarCruiser explodes. \ Battle gets increasingly fast and furious as the game goes on. You must continue to search for Solaris while destroying all enemy ships. You'll know Solaris when you find it -- it's the only blinking planet in the galaxy. \ The game ends when all your ships are destroyed or you can reach Solaris. [Space War] File=/rom/SpaceWar.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Space War Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=Blast off into space with 17 game variations for one or two players. Take control of your starship and penetrate the boundaries of strange galaxies. Drift invisibly through hyperspace, but beware of the gravity of a strange sun. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 17. Games 1 - 13 are for two players, and games 14 - 17 are for one player. Games 1 - 7 are Space War games, and games 8 - 17 are Space Shuttle games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick up to thrust and back for hyperspace. Left and right turns the ship. Press the controller button to fire missiles. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT and RIGHT DIFFICULTY switches must be in the B position during all Space War games. In Space Shuttle games, with the A difficulty, you must exactly match your Star Ship's velocity to the Space Module's velocity. In B position, your Star Ship does not have to travel at the same speed to dock with the Space Module. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In Space War games, the object is to score points by shooting your opponent's Star Ship with missiles. Space War games last ten minutes or until one player scores ten points. \ Each player begins with eight missiles. Once the arsenal is depleted, the game will automatically reset each player with eight more missiles only when both players are out of missiles. In most Space War games, fuel cannot be resupplied. In games 6 and 7, players can refuel and resupply missiles by docking with the Starbase. Fuel is used by adding thrust to your Star Ship or by putting your Ship into Hyperspace. \ In Space Shuttle games, connect your Star Ship with the Space Module to score. \ During Space Shuttle games the Star Ships have an unlimited supply of fuel. In one-player games, you have 10 minutes to score a maximum 10 points. During two-player games each player maneuvers his or her Star Ship to score. \ In two-player games with two Space Modules, the target Space Module will be the same color as your Star Ship. First player to score 10 points or the most points in 10 minutes wins. [Sprintmaster] File=/rom/SprintMaster.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sprintmaster Year=1988 Genre=atari Description=Choose your track, from practice-caliber squares to the curvaceous championship courses. Rev up at the starting line, and take off! You'll need a delicate touch and a cool head to avoid sliding into the wall on those sharp turns. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button or move the joystick in any direction to choose a one or two player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Steer with the joystick and accelerate with the controller button. Push the joystick back for an emergency brake. Release the joystick to slow down. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Use the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to change your steering. Use the A position for less traction and the B position for more. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. The currently selected track appears, with a grid of all track selections above it. \ Press the SELECT button or move the joystick in any direction to see each track selection. When the track you want is on screen, press START button or the controller button. \ Press the SELECT button or move the joystick in any direction to choose a blacktop, dirt, or ice track. Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ Drive over the blue box on the track to gain traction. Drive over the red box for a spurt of speed. Hitting an unpredictable tar slick makes you speed up or slow down. Colliding into a wall costs you time, so move back into position and get going! The race car that completes the required laps in the fastest time wins! [Star Ship] File=/rom/StarShip.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Star Ship Year=1977 Genre=atari Description=Destroy as many spacecraft and robots as possible within the time limit, all while avoiding asteroids and other objects as you try to cover the greatest distance possible in one of three included game variations. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 17. Games 1 - 9 are Star Ship. Games 10 -11 are Warp Drive. Games 12 - 17 are Lunar Lander. Games 1 - 4 and 12 - 17 are one player games, although games 12 - 17 can also be joined by a second player. All other games are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P2, or right, joystick for one player games, and the P1, or left, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick up to climb and down to dive. Left and right turns left and right. \ Destroy enemy space objects with laser beams by pressing the controller button. In Lunar Lander games, press the controller button to fire your retro rockets as you land. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Use the A position during Star Ship games to make your laser missiles weaker. Use the A position during Lunar Lander games to require landing exactly on target to score points. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Steeplechase] File=/rom/Steeplechase.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Steeplechase Year=1980 Genre=atari, paddle Description=Ride your horse against up to three other friends in racing and hurdle games. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 6. Games 1 - 3 feature increasing difficulty levels, while games 4 - 6 feature increasingly difficult random hurdles. All six games can be played by 1 - 4 players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. If using joysticks, you cannot play three or four player games with human opponents. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. For three and four player games, plug in a second set of paddles into the P2, or right, joystick port. Player three uses the left paddle, and player four uses the right paddle. \ Before each race begins, each player has four seconds to press their controller button. This will place your horse in the race. Otherwise, the computer will control the horse. Notice that when you press the controller button your horse changes from a sitting position to a standing position. \ After the race begins, press the controller button to jump your horse. Move the joystick or turn the paddle to select one of four height settings of the height indicator bar. To clear the widest hurdles, you must use the highest height setting. Use lower height settings to clear the small hurdles. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The object of Steeplechase is to be the first player to advance your horse to the right side of the screen display. Each horse gallops at a given speed from left to right. While the horse gallops, hurdles of different sizes approach the horse from right to left. Your task is to jump and clear the hurdles, and get your horse to the right side first. \ As you are jumping each hurdle, your horse actually has no motion from left to right. Whenever you hit a hurdle your horse loses some horizontal position (distance) while it falls to the ground and gets up. The higher you jump your horse, the easier it is to clear all hurdles. However, the more time it takes to clear the hurdles, and the more time it takes to reach the right side of the screen. \ The height of a jump can be set by adjusting your height indicator bar. There are four height settings. Each horse has its own height indicator bar. [Stellar Track] File=/rom/StellarTrack.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Stellar Track Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=Destroy the alien menace before time or energy runs out in this classic game of strategy. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Pressing the SELECT button or START button serves the same function, which is to randomly select the size of a new mission. There are two factors which vary with each mission. One is the number of STARDATES you have and the other is the number of Aliens you must destroy to win. Press either button to change and/or select the size of each mission. Continue depressing either button until you select the size mission you want. \ The best missions to start out with are those with approximately 25 to 35 Aliens, and the most STARDATES you can find. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move the joystick to select options, then the controller button to confirm. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch controls your shield strength of damage probability. In the B position, the probability of damage is lower. In the A position, the probability is twice as high. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch controls your phasor strength. In the B position, your PHASORS, or energy units, are twice as powerful as the Alien phasor strength. In the A position, your PHASORS are equal in strength. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. \ The GALAXY MAP command will appear (flashing) toward the bottom of the screen. In total, there are seven commands available. These commands are selected with the joystick, then entered with the controller button. Each command is displayed (flashing) on the screen as you move the joystick right or left. \ Remember to press the controller button whenever you are finished reading a particular display and are ready to continue with another command. \ The galaxy is divided into 36 quadrants, and each quadrant is divided into 64 sectors. The color of the screen tells you who or what is in the quadrant you are currently occupying: Green = empty, Red = aliens, and Grey = starbase. \ If you destroy all the Aliens, you mission is successful and you receive a ranking (CADET, ENSIGN, LIUTENANT, CAPTAIN, COMMODORE, or ADMIRAL). Ranking is based on how much time and energy it takes you to destroy the enemy. The less you use, the higher your ranking. You're ranked at the end of a mission regardless of how it ended. \ If you run out of time (STARDATES) or fuel (ENERGY), the Terrans must surrender to the Aliens. \ The LR SCAN does not use energy or startime. However, when you are in a quadrant with Aliens, they will fire at you (one by one) after you use the LR SCAN. \ You must use the SR SCAN to find out exactly where the enemy is, or where a starbase is. It does not use energy or startime, but like the LR SCAN, any Aliens in your quadrant will fire at you (one by one) after you use it. \ The Warp command is used to move your ship from one quadrant to another, or from one sector to another. Using the WARP command is expensive - it uses STARTIME and ENERGY. \ Your PHOTON Torpedoes are one of two weapons you have to destroy Aliens. The other weapon is your PHASORS. \ Using your PHOTON Torpedoes requires no ENERGY or STARDATES. The Alien is always destroyed when hit by a PHOTON Torpedo. Any undestroyed Aliens in the quadrant will fire back after you use a PHOTON Torpedo. \ Your PHASORS are an energy weapon. A PHASOR blast can cause damage, or destroy an Alien if strong enough. You must hit an Alien with more energy than he has to destroy him. All Aliens start with 99 energy units. \ Aliens in your quadrant will fire on you only after they detect a maneuver on your part. Their sensors are unable to detect when you use the STATUS or GALAXY MAP, so these are the only "free" moves. All other actions antagonize the Aliens to return fire, which can damage one of five ship functions. \ Your Engines are a special case when it comes to damage, limiting your movement options. Calling up the STATUS Report does not use any ENERGY or STARDATES. \ Docking at a starbase repairs all damage to your ship. This procedure provides you with a new supply of ENERGY (3000 units). It also replaces all 9 of your PHOTON Torpedoes. To dock at a starbase, WARP to the same quadrant and sector as the starbase. This places you virtually on top of the starbase. [Street Racer] File=/rom/StreetRacer.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Street Racer Year=1977 Genre=atari, paddle Description=Street Racer features car racing, slalom skiing, jet shooting, number crunching, and scoop ball games for up to four players! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 27. Games 1 - 6 are Street Racer games. Games 7 - 12 are Slalom games. Games 13 - 16 are Dodgem games. Games 17 - 20 are Jet Shooter games. Games 21 - 24 are Number Cruncher games. Games 25 - 27 are Scoop Ball games. \ One player games are games 1, 7, 13, 15, 17, 19, and 21. Two player games are games 2, 5, 8, 9, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 25. Three player games are games 3, 23, and 26. Four player games are games 4, 6, 10, .12, 24, and 27. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Three and four player games are not supported with joysticks. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port for one or two player games. For three and four player games, plug a second set of paddle controllers into the right joystick port. \ Use the joystick or paddle to steer in all racing games. The controller button is the accelerator. For Dodgem games, the controller button is forward thrust, and in Jet Shooter games, the controller button fires bullets. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ If the difficulty switch is set to A, you lose one point for each collision that occurs. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player games you race against the clock as you try to make points within 2 minutes and 16 seconds. During two, three, and four player games, you compete against opponents to score the most points within 2 minutes and 16 seconds. Your score will flash on and off the screen during the final 16 seconds of game time. [Submarine Commander] File=/rom/SubmarineCommander.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Submarine Commander Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=You are at the helm of a submarine equipped with radar, sonar depth charge indicators, torpedoes, and fuel and temperature gauges. As commander of the submarine, you must sink the enemy ships before running out of fuel! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 and 2 are the easiest games, where enemy ships do not shoot depth charges. Games 3 and 4, only the destroyers attack with depth charges. Games 5 and 6, you have to avoid the depth charges of both destroyers and PT boats. Games 7 and 9, you have to avoid the depth charges from destroyers, PT boats, and tankers. \ Odd numbered games are for one player, and even numbered games are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ What you see on the screen is your view through a periscope. Moving the joystick up and down allows you to see close up or far away to the horizon. You can also use the joystick to maneuver the sub right and left. This will help you catch up to an enemy ship or move away from a dangerous depth charge. The direction in which you move your sub is indicated by the broken black line, just below the temperature gauge. When you move the joystick right, the black lines move right indicating that the sub is moving right. When you move the joystick left, the black lines move left and your sub is moving left. When your sub is moving right or left, any torpedoes launched will travel with a slight curve in the opposite direction. \ To shoot a torpedo, press the controller button. The torpedoes launch from the side where the torpedo status indicator is green. The torpedo launcher changes sides with every other launch. You will see the green light change sides each time you launch a torpedo. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the difficulty switch to A for the expert level, or B for the novice level. The expert level is more challenging because every time your sub is hit by a depth charge, you incur damage that could cause the loss of one of your gauges. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ The object of the game is to sink as many enemy ships as possible. As you sink ships, you score points. Some of the ships can drop depth charges, which might damage your submarine. \ Depth charges are indicated on the depth charge detector gauge. The gauge alerts you to the closeness and the seriousness of a depth charge. Because your sub is equipped with sonar detection you can identify the location of enemy ships before they are sighted through the periscope. This allows you to shoot a torpedo before the enemy drops a depth charge. \ Your sub also carries 3000 units of fuel and two torpedo launchers. The fuel level is proportional to the engine temperature. Watch the engine temperature gauge at the top center of the screen. \ The more maneuvers you make, the hotter the engine gets. Every torpedo launched uses three units of fuel, but every depth charge hit costs 300-377 units of fuel. Some fuel is also used just to run the submarine engines. When all the fuel runs out, the temperature gauge turns black, and the game is over. [Super Baseball] File=/rom/SuperBaseball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Super Baseball Year=1988 Genre=atari Description=Take to the field and outscore the other team in this sophisticated baseball game. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button or push the joystick up or down to choose between a one-player/first up, one-player/second up, or two-player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ To hit the ball, press and hold the controller button while moving the joystick. The direction in which the joystick is moved determines the type of swing (bunt = up, right field = up/left, left field = up/right, fly/right = down/left, and fly/left = down/right). \ To have a runner steal a base, push the joystick handle towards the base the runner is on. To return the action to the batter, pull the joystick down. \ When your team is in the field, first select your pitch by moving the joystick. The direction of the joystick determines the type of pitch (fastball = up, intentional ball = down, riser = left, sinker = right, curve/left = up/left, and curve/right = up/right). Once you have selected the pitch, hold the controller button down and move the joystick down quickly to release the pitch. \ To throw the ball from one player to another, move the joystick to select the direction of the throw; then press the controller button to release the ball (home plate = down, pitcher = center position, 1st base = right, 2nd base = up, and 3rd base = left). \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ The fielder closest to the ball automatically makes the play. Begin moving the fielder into position, using the joystick, as soon as the ball is hit. \ If the ball is thrown away, the runners don't advance. Play is delayed until the appropriate fielder picks up the ball and throws it back to the pitcher. [Super Breakout] File=/rom/SuperBreakout.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Super Breakout Year=1981 Genre=atari, paddle Description=It's super-powered brick-breaking fun! Try your hand at Breakout, Cavity, Double, Progressive, or Children's Versions. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 9. Games 1 and 2 are regular Breakout. Games 3 and 4 are Double Breakout. Games 5 and 6 are Cavity Breakout. Games 7 is Progressive Breakout. Games 8 and 9 are Children's Versions of regular Breakout. \ Games 1, 3, 5, 7, and 8 are one-player games. Games 2, 4, 6, and 9 are two-player games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port for one or two player games. \ Press the controller button to launch the ball. Move the joystick or paddle left or right to hit the ball. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, the paddle is half-sized. With switches in the B position, the paddle is twice the size. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ After choosing the game selection and number of players, press START button to begin play. Press the controller button to release the ball. \ The object in all of the games is to keep the ball in play (as you knock out bricks) to score the highest amount of points possible, or to score more points than your opponent. [Super Football] File=/rom/SuperFootball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Super Football Year=1988 Genre=atari Description=It's five-on-five action in this sophisticated football game. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button or move the joystick in any direction to see the selection screen. On the scoreboard at the top, the game level is displayed in the top row on the left and the number of players is displayed on the right. You can choose a game level from 1 to 4, where the higher the number, the games are more difficult and last longer. \ During a game, you can press SELECT to return to the selection screen. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ Once the action starts, the man currently under joystick control on each team will have a slightly different-colored jersey. \ The defensive (red) team faces you. The green team kicks off to the red team, and the red team's receiver catches the ball. \ The red receiver is now under P1's joystick control. Move your joystick in any direction to maneuver him up the field toward the end zone, while avoiding the green team's players. When the receiver is tackled, the two teams take their positions on the scrimmage line, with the offensive team at the bottom of the screen. \ With both teams at the scrimmage line, you have an opportunity to choose your plays. \ With both teams at the scrimmage line and the plays selected, the offense can press the controller button to hike the ball (the ball will automatically be hiked after about four seconds if the controller button is not pressed). \ Once the ball is hiked to the quarterback, both teams carry out their plays. The defensive rusher will rush the quarterback, the offensive receiver will run the selected pattern, the halfback (or tight end) will try to block the rusher, the linemen will block, and the cornerback and safety will try to cover the receiver. When the quarterback has the ball, he is under joystick control. The quarterback can either run with the ball or pass to the receiver, depending on the play selected. \ When passing, wait until the receiver is "open" before throwing the ball with the controller button. The quarterback cannot pass the ball once he crosses the line of scrimmage. \ When running, you can decide to either make the quarterback run with the ball or pass to a receiver, depending on the play selected. Once the ball is thrown, joystick control switches to the receiver. \ The offensive team has four "downs" to advance the ball 10 yards. If it is the fourth down, you can punt the ball or try for a field goal (if you are within 50 yards of the goal line). If the offense misses a field goal, the defense takes the ball. If a punt is kicked into the end zone, the defense takes over at the 20-yard line. \ The offense can select both a formation and a pattern (the route the receiver will run). The formation number appears as the left digit of your score and the pattern number as the right digit. Move the joystick left or right to choose a formation (from 1 to 9). Move the joystick handle forward or back to choose a pattern (from 1 to 4). \ For defensive plays, once the offense selects a formation, and the formation number appears at the left digit of your score, move the joystick left or right to choose a formation (from 1 to 9). Once the play is under way, use the joystick to control the cornerback. [Surround] File=/rom/Surround.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Surround Year=1977 Genre=atari Description=Control a moving wall to trap your opponent before they trap you. Watch out, because you can crash into your own wall! And if drawing is more your speed, try out the video graffiti mode. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 14. Games 1 - 12 are Surround games. Games 13 and 14 are Video Graffiti (drawing) games. Games 1, 3, and 5 - 14 are for two players. Games 2, 4, 13, and 14 are for one player. \ Games 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 - 12 feature Speed Up. Games 5 - 7 and 10 -12 feature Diagonal Movement. Games 7 and 12 - 14 feature Erase. Games 8 - 14 feature Wraparound. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P2 or right slot joystick for one player games, and the P1 or left slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Use the P2 joystick or slot for one player games. \ Move your joystick in the direction you want your leader block to move. Press the controller button to erase in Erase games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the B position, the player can't back into their previous track block. In the A position, the player can, raising the difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Your basic objective is to surround your opponent, causing him to run out of space in which to move, and at the same time not running into anything yourself. You can set up a blockade, force him into a corner or wander off by yourself and hope that he runs into something on his own. \ Video Graffiti games let you draw on the screen. [SwordQuest: Earthworld] File=/rom/SwordQuestEarthworld.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Swordquest: earth Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=As you explore EarthWorld, you will traverse 12 rooms, each named after a sign of the zodiac. You will encounter danger such as the horns of a charging Taurus bull, and you will be called upon to demonstrate your skill and ingenuity. A variety of magical objects will assist you in the challenging journey ahead. By leaving the right combination of objects in the right zodiac chamber, you'll discover illuminating clues. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Use the joystick to move your explorer through the maze of rooms. To pick up treasure, position your cursor over an object and press the controller button. The object will appear on the bottom of the screen and will move with you through the maze until you deliberately leave it somewhere. Once you have 6 items in your inventory, you must drop one to pick up an additional item. To leave an object in a room, go to the bottom of the screen, position your cursor over the object, and press the controller button. The object will stay in the room until you retrieve it. You must be in a room that has the sign of the zodiac on its wall in order to leave or retrieve a magical object. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. You will be instantly transported from the first display into a doorway. Press the controller button again and you'll be in a zodiac chamber. \ To move out of the zodiac rooms, position your cursor on the door located next to the zodiac sign and press the controller button. You will then be in the doorway of the zodiac room; note that it is the same color as the zodiac chamber. \ To move out of the doorway and into another zodiac room, walk through any of the four exits. You will be sent down a corridor into another doorway. Press the controller button and you'll be in a zodiac room or a skill and action test which you must pass in order to get to a zodiac room. \ You will need to carry a magic object to move out of the right and left exits of the doorways. [SwordQuest: Fireworld] File=/rom/SwordQuestFireworld.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Swordquest: fire Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=In this second game in the SwordQuest series, you enter FireWorld as a mighty warrior. Your skill and courage will be tested with dangerous trials and obstacles. The object of the game is to solve the puzzle. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Use the joystick to move your explorer. To pick up an object, position your cursor over an object and press the controller button. The object will appear on the bottom of the screen and will move with you until you deliberately leave it somewhere. Once you have 6 items in your inventory, you must drop one to pick up an additional item. To leave an object in a room, go to the bottom of the screen, position your cursor over the object, and press the controller button. The object will stay in the room until you retrieve it. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. \ The FireWorld puzzle is based on the Tree of Life, with 10 rooms linked together by 10 rooms with doorways. FireWorld has ten treasure chest rooms, some containing different magical objects. These objects will help you on your journey through FireWorld. Carrying particular objects will help you find clues. Before you can explore these rooms, you'll be called on to demonstrate certain skills. \ There are 16 objects randomly located throughout the 10 rooms, but you can only take 6 objects at a time. As you leave the right objects(s) in the correct room(s), you will reveal clues that will help you solve the puzzle. \ Some doors are locked, which means they are invisible. However, certain objects will allow you to unlock these doors. \ If you press the controller button while in a room with doorways, you will move into a skill and action sequence. After you have completed the skill, the program automatically moves you into another room with doorways or into a treasure chest room with objects. If you find yourself in a treasure chest room, you may pick up or drop off any object. To leave a treasure chest room, move the cursor to the small open door in the lower left corner of the room, and press the controller button. [SwordQuest: Waterworld] File=/rom/SwordQuestWaterworld.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Swordquest: water Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=In this third game in the SwordQuest series, there are seven puzzle-based rooms. Scattered throughout these rooms are 16 magical objects that are related to each other and the seven rooms. Isolating the rooms from each other are three skill-and-action tests that you'll need to master in order to successfully enter a room and correctly manipulate all of its objects. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Use your joystick to travel from room to room and to transfer objects from the room to your pouch and back. To transfer an object, move your playing figure directly over the object and press the controller button. \ To transfer objects back into the room you must first enter the carrying pouch. To do this, move your playing figure over the carrying pouch symbol at the top of the screen and press the controller button. To emerge from the pouch, simply move your joystick up toward the room. \ Pressing the controller button while a hint is being displayed at the bottom of the screen will immediately return you to gameplay. Doing this will eliminate the time it usually takes to cycle through each hint display. \ Pressing the controller button while you are in the midst of a skill-and-action test is a sign of surrender. You will be transported directly into the desired room, but without the power to see or successfully manipulate all the objects in that room. \ In the ice floes skill-and-action test: Push the joystick up to jump to the next floe. Pull the Joystick down to jump back. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. \ Scattered throughout seven rooms are 16 magical objects that are related to each other and the rooms. Isolating the rooms from each other are three skill-and-action tests that you'll need to master in order to successfully enter a room and manipulate all the objects in that room. \ Your task is to travel successfully from room to room; discover the relationships of the objects to each other and to the rooms; and then place a correct combination of objects in the appropriate room to get a numerical clue. \ Each room needs a unique set of seven objects to trigger a clue. If you correctly place at least four of the seven objects designated for a specific room, a numerical clue will momentarily be revealed to you at the bottom of the screen. \ You can carry a total of six objects in your carrying pouch. You gain information about the objects and their interrelationships by transferring the objects back and forth from the room to the carrying pouch in each of the seven rooms. Interrelationships between the objects and the rooms will be displayed as "hints" at the bottom of the screen. [Tempest] File=/rom/Tempest.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Tempest 0 Year=1984 Genre=atari Description=Clear the screen of enemies on closed tubes or open playfields. Move freely along the edges of the playfield to target and shoot each enemy. If you're in a tight spot, use your Superzapper to clear the screen! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ Push the joystick left or right to move. Press the controller button to fire. Push the joystick up and press the controller button to use your Superzapper to clear the screen of enemies. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Video Checkers] File=/rom/VideoCheckers.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Video Checkers Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=Compete against another player or the computer in regular, or give away, checkers. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 19. Game 1 - 9 follow the standard rules of checkers for one player. Game 10 is for two players. Games 11 - 19 are one player giveaway checkers, where the object is to be the first player to be unable to move by losing all of your pieces or by being blocked. The higher the game number, the more time the computer takes to think about its next move. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the cursor and/or checkers around the board with the joystick. Use the controller button to confirm actions. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ For the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch, use the B position for normal play. Use the A position to set up the board. In this setup mode, use the P1, or left, joystick to place a piece on the board wherever you want. Press the controller button and the pieces of each color will flash in that square. When the piece you want is flashing in the square, release the controller button. To continue gameplay, return the switch to the B position. \ For the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch, in the B position, the left player in the two-player game, or a single player in a one-player game is black and starts the game. In the A position, the right player in a two-player game or the computer player in a one-player game is black and starts. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ To move one of your checkers, push the controller button when the cursor is in the same square as the piece you wish to move. This "picks up" the piece. Then, move the checker to the square you wish to occupy. To complete the move, push the controller button again. This "drops" the piece. Before you have dropped the piece, the computer will allow you to return it to the square it came from and move a different piece. After you have made your move, the computer will make its move. You can use the setup mode to take back moves or rearrange the board while it is your move. \ To make a jump, pick up the piece to be moved, as described. Then, move the piece over the piece being jumped to the next empty square and push the controller button. For a multiple jump, continue jumping by moving to the appropriate square and pushing the button again. \ The computer will not allow you to pick up a piece which cannot make a legal move or to move a piece to the wrong square. Instead, it will make a buzzing or "razzing" sound. If you must jump, the letters "JP" for JUMP will flash at the top of the screen. [Video Chess] File=/rom/VideoChess.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Video Chess Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Compete against the computer in this classic game of chess. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. The higher the game number, up to 7, the more time the computer will take to think about its next move. Game number 8 is for beginners, with the computer only taking 10 seconds to think between moves. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move around the board with the joystick. Use the controller button to confirm actions. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ For the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch, in the A position, it allows you to set up the board any way you want for a particular problem or situation. Move the cursor to the square where you wish to place a particular piece. Each time you press the controller button, the computer puts a different piece on that square, starting with the computer's king and cycling through the player's pawn. When you have placed the piece you want on the board, move the cursor to the next position and repeat the process. \ To remove a piece from the board, place the cursor over that piece and cycle through past the player's pawn. An X will appear and that piece will be removed from the board. When you have the board set up the way you want it, set the switch in the B position and begin play. At this point you must move first, whether or not the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch is in the A or B position. \ For the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch, in the A position, the computer plays the white pieces, and moves first. In the B position you play the white pieces and move first. The color of the number at the top of the playfield (also denoting skill level) will tell you which color you're playing. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ There are two "double moves" allowed in the game of chess. One is known as "castling," the other is known as "en passant." The computer may use either or both during the course of a game, and you can also. [Video Pinball] File=/rom/VideoPinball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Video Pinball Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=Hit bumpers, spinners, targets, and rollovers to rack up points! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. Games 1 and 3 are for one player, and games 2 and 4 are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Push your joystick left or right to move each flipper, or up to move both flippers at the same time. Once the ball is in play, you can "nudge" or "body English" the table by moving the joystick. \ To launch the ball, press the controller button to release the spring. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The A position is for expert players, and the B position is for novices. Difficulty levels may be changed at any time during gameplay. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each player starts with three balls. Every time you hit the ATARI rollover four times, you get an extra ball. The extra ball is indicated by a large X at the bottom of the screen. \ Playing pinball requires skillful control of the flippers, which are located at the bottom, center of the screen. When the ball drops to the bottom of the screen, you send it back into the playfield by using the flippers. The flippers are controlled with your joystick. It's your job to guide the ball within the playfield hitting bumpers, spinners, targets, and rollovers to score points. \ Use your joystick controller to "nudge" the ball, but don't "nudge" too much, or you'll cause a "tilt". If you "tilt" the game, your ball scores no more points and any extra balls are lost. [Wizard] File=/rom/Wizard.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Wizard Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=Control a wizard as you attempt to destroy an enemy imp. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1, for a one player game, and 2, for a two player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. The second player takes control of the enemy imp. \ Move with the joystick. Fire with the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the difficulty switch in the A position, then the wizard must also defend a flame from the enemy imp. In the B position, the flame has no effect on the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Both you as the wizard and the enemy imp have "damage points" that keep track of how good your health is, denoted by the counters at the far right and far left of the screen, respectively. Get hit by an imp's magical bolt or touched by an imp and your damage goes up by 2 points. Hit an imp with your own magical bolt and their damage goes up by 2. If your counter goes up to 100, it's game over! If the imp's counter goes up to 100, its curtains for them. \ If a second player is controlling the imp, they must move the imp within range of the wizard before the imp will automatically attack. [Warlords] File=/rom/Warlords.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Warlords Year=1981 Genre=atari, paddle Description=Destroy the other three warlords before your warlord is destroyed by moving your catapult around your castle and catching or blocking the boulder to return fire. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 23. Warlords has three main variations. The first, is the number of players, between one, two, three, four, or doubles. In doubles games, two players control two shields each, with the computer operating any unused shields. The second is ball speed, which is either slow (fireball) or fast (lightning ball). The third is shields, either ricochet or catch, with the ricochet selection disabling the use of the catch feature. \ Games 4, 9, 14, and 19 are for one player. Games 3, 8, 13, 18, and 23 are for two players. Games 2, 7, 12, 17, and 22 are for three players. Games 1, 6, 11, 16, and 21 are for four players. Games 5, 10, 15, and 20 are doubles games. \ Games 21 - 23 are special easier versions for young children. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Three and four player games are not supported with joysticks. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port for one or two player games. For three and four player games, plug a second set of paddle controllers into the right joystick port. \ Use the controller to move your shield and block the ball. To use the catch feature, press and hold the controller button before the ball makes contact with your shield. Release the button to send the ball back toward your opponents at high speed. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The object of the battle is to destroy the other three warlords before your warlord is destroyed. [Yars' Return] File=/rom/YarsReturn.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Yars 3 Year=2004 Genre=atari Description=Once again take to your Yar fly simulator to break a path through the shield and destroy the Qotile with a blast from the Zorlon Cannon! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 0 - 7. One player games are the even numbers, and two player games are the odd numbers. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. To fire, press the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The B position is for normal gameplay, and the A position is more difficult. In the A position, the Swirl will be propelled faster and if the Zorlon Cannon and the Destroyer Missile touch, they will destroy each other. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. To start the game over again, either press START button or the controller button. \ The primary objective of the game is to break a path through the shield, and destroy the Qotile with a blast from the Zorlon Cannon. The secondary objective is to score as many points as possible. \ The shield is the red area in front of the Qotile base. The shield is made up of cells. The Yar scout can destroy these cells by firing at them with energy missiles, from any location on the playfield, or by devouring them on direct contact. The Zorlon Cannon can also be used to destroy the cells, but this is a waste of a powerful weapon. \ Once a path has been cleared through the shield, the Zorlon Cannon must be used to destroy the Qotile. To call up the cannon, the Yar can either eat a cell, or run over the Qotile. The Zorlon Cannon appears on the left side of the playfield, and moves in a direct line with the Yar. This means the Yar is in its line of fire. It is important therefore, to aim the cannon at the Qotile, fire it, and fly out of the way fast! \ When you destroy the Qotile, or a Swirl, there will be an explosion, during which the Yar stays on the screen. Use this opportunity to make up your own victory dance. And watch out for the Ghost of Yars! You'll see his mean streak, so stay off it! [Yars' Revenge] File=/rom/YarsRevenge.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Yars 2 Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Use your Yar fly simulator to break a path through the shield and destroy the Qotile with a blast from the Zorlon Cannon! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 0 - 7. One player games are the even numbers, and two player games are the odd numbers. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. To fire, press the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The B position is for normal gameplay, and the A position is more difficult. In the A position, the Swirl will be propelled faster and if the Zorlon Cannon and the Destroyer Missile touch, they will destroy each other. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. To start the game over again, either press START button or the controller button. \ The primary objective of the game is to break a path through the shield, and destroy the Qotile with a blast from the Zorlon Cannon. The secondary objective is to score as many points as possible. \ The shield is the red area in front of the Qotile base. The shield is made up of cells. The Yar scout can destroy these cells by firing at them with energy missiles, from any location on the playfield, or by devouring them on direct contact. The Zorlon Cannon can also be used to destroy the cells, but this is a waste of a powerful weapon. \ Once a path has been cleared through the shield, the Zorlon Cannon must be used to destroy the Qotile. To call up the cannon, the Yar can either eat a cell, or run over the Qotile. The Zorlon Cannon appears on the left side of the playfield, and moves in a direct line with the Yar. This means the Yar is in its line of fire. It is important therefore, to aim the cannon at the Qotile, fire it, and fly out of the way fast! \ When you destroy the Qotile, or a Swirl, there will be an explosion, during which the Yar stays on the screen. Use this opportunity to make up your own victory dance. And watch out for the Ghost of Yars! You'll see his mean streak, so stay off it! [Yar] File=/rom/Yar2011.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Yars 1 Year=2004 Genre=atari Description=Once again take to your Yar fly simulator to break a path through the shield and destroy the Qotile with a blast from the Zorlon Cannon! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 0 - 7. One player games are the even numbers, and two player games are the odd numbers. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. To fire, press the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The B position is for normal gameplay, and the A position is more difficult. In the A position, the Swirl will be propelled faster and if the Zorlon Cannon and the Destroyer Missile touch, they will destroy each other. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. To start the game over again, either press START button or the controller button. \ The primary objective of the game is to break a path through the shield, and destroy the Qotile with a blast from the Zorlon Cannon. The secondary objective is to score as many points as possible. \ The shield is the red area in front of the Qotile base. The shield is made up of cells. The Yar scout can destroy these cells by firing at them with energy missiles, from any location on the playfield, or by devouring them on direct contact. The Zorlon Cannon can also be used to destroy the cells, but this is a waste of a powerful weapon. \ Once a path has been cleared through the shield, the Zorlon Cannon must be used to destroy the Qotile. To call up the cannon, the Yar can either eat a cell, or run over the Qotile. The Zorlon Cannon appears on the left side of the playfield, and moves in a direct line with the Yar. This means the Yar is in its line of fire. It is important therefore, to aim the cannon at the Qotile, fire it, and fly out of the way fast! \ When you destroy the Qotile, or a Swirl, there will be an explosion, during which the Yar stays on the screen. Use this opportunity to make up your own victory dance. And watch out for the Ghost of Yars! You'll see his mean streak, so stay off it! [Frogger Arcade] File=/rom/Frogger.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Frogger 3 Year=2016 Genre=Arcade Description=Guide Frogger safely on his journey to a home bay. First, there's a dangerous highway to hop across, full of fast-moving cars and trucks. Then there's a swirling river to leap, full of frog-eating creatures. Try not to run out of time as you attempt to get Frogger into all five home bays. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the direction you want Frogger to jump. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press up or down on the joystick to choose between stages 1 - 16, with 1 being the easiest and 16 being the hardest. \ Press the controller button to begin play. \ Try to get Frogger through the lanes of traffic without being hit by a vehicle. Once at the riverbank, hop onto logs, turtles, and the backs of alligators to reach an open home bay. Try to catch lady frogs and flies, and avoid everything else, including snakes and falling into the water or crashing into the side of the screen. \ \ Note: This game does not support "Save, Load and Rewind" functionality. [Pooyan] File=/rom/Pooyan.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Pooyan Year=1983 Genre=Arcade Description=One day, in the middle of a forest, a group of fierce Wolves attacked the House where a Mother Pig (Mama) and her little Piglets (Pooyans) were living together peacefully. To protect her Pooyans, Mama fought back using arrows and bait, but despite all her efforts, some of the Pooyans were kidnapped. Full of hate for the Wolves, Mama bravely seeks out the Wolves' Lair to rescue her Pooyans. Will she succeed in overcoming the Wolves and bringing her Pooyans back home? Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 – 8. Games 1, 3, 5, and 7 are one player games. Games 2, 4, 6, and 8 are two player games. Games 1 – 4 are Slow games and 5 - 8 are Fast games. The trajectory of the wolves' stones is horizontal or parabolic in games 1, 2, 5, and 6, and parabolic in games 3, 4, 7, and 8. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left joystick, for one player games, and the player two, or right joystick, for the second player in two player games. \ \ Move the joystick up and down to move the Mother Pig. Press the joystick button to shoot arrows and bait. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET or the joystick button to begin play. \ \ There are two scenes (1 and 2) in this game, and they follow on from each other alternatively as one scene has been completed. The scene number is displayed in the center of the upper part of the screen while the START melody is being played. \ \ SCENE 1 (THE PIGS' HOUSE) \ \ Moving the Mother Pig (Mama) up and down using the control lever, try to burst the workers' balloons with arrows as they come floating down into the valley. You can also make the wolves fall by throwing the bait that appears at the top right-hand side of the valley. When the wolves try to grab the bait, they let go of their balloons and fall down into the valley. At the same time, the wolves defend themselves with shields and attack by throwing stones. If you allow the wolves to float safely down to the bottom of the valley, they will climb up the steps and attack the Mother Pig from behind. \ \ SCENE 2 (WOLF VALLEY) \ \ In this scene, the wolves float up from the bottom of the valley (Wolf Valley) with their balloons, and the Mother Pig tries to stop them using arrows and bait as in the previous scene. When six wolves have safely reached the top, they can start dropping large rocks down on the Mother Pig. To prevent them from doing this, you must get rid of the flashing 'boss wolf'. The 'boss wolf' will appear when there are only 5 wolves left. If you fail to get the boss wolf, five more wolves will float up. \ \ 1) At the start 30 wolves will appear in scene 1, after which it will automatically change to scene 2 regardless of the score. \ 2) Following this, the number of wolves appearing in each scene will increase 1 each time the scene changes. \ 3) In both scene 1 and scene 2, the color of the valley floor will change from yellow to green when there are only five workers left. \ 4) To take the bait that appears at the top-right hand side of the valley, first move the Mother Pig up to the level of the bait, release the lever and then push it upwards once more. When she has got the bait, the Mother Pig turns red. \ \ MISTAKES \ \ The following are mistakes, and you lose one Mother Pig. \ * If the Mother Pig is hit by one of the wolves' stones. \ * If the Mother Pig is eaten from behind by a wolf. \ * If the Mother Pig has a rock dropped on her from above. [Amidar] File=/rom/Amidar.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Amidar 0 Year=1982 Genre=Arcade Description=First you're a gorilla in a maze pursued by wild warriors! The gorilla wants to color in the maze and the warriors want to do in the gorilla. It's up to you to keep the gorilla ahead of the patrolling pack while you guide him on his coloring spree every which way throughout the maze. If you're successful, suddenly you're a paint roller pursued by patrolling pigs. And it's another fast and furious chase all over again! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick, for this one player game. \ \ Move with the joystick. If the warriors should close in on you, press the joystick button and release it. The warriors will turn into little shadows you can pass right through. Get by them quickly, because in a moment or two, they'll become wild warriors again! You can make the warriors disappear four times for every gorilla. NOTE: Holding down the joystick button will cause the warriors to disappear and appear alternately up to four times, depending on the number of chances you have left to do so. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to position A to start at level 1; five warriors patrol the maze at the slowest speed. Position B starts the game at level 3; six warriors patrol the maze at a faster speed. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin play. \ \ The object of the game is to "color in" as many mazes as you can while avoiding the patrolling warriors or pigs- and to collect the most points along the way. \ \ The first round in AMIDAR is the warriors and gorilla game. In this round, you'll have three gorillas with which to color in the entire maze. As soon as you hit the RESET switch, you'll see the first gorilla at the right-hand side of the maze. There will be a short pause, and the action will begin. Throughout the round, the number of gorillas available to you will be monitored in the lower right-hand corner of the screen. \ \ As soon as the warriors begin their patrol, start your gorilla coloring his way throughout the maze. To color, you must move the gorilla along the lines that form the various "boxes" inside the maze. Trace one side of a box, and the side turns blue. Trace all four sides of a box, and the box turns blue. Try to color in the entire maze in this way. You don't have to trace all four sides of one box before you trace another. You may move any which way throughout the maze that you wish. Just don't run into a warrior or he'll squash your gorilla. [Tutankham] File=/rom/Tutankham.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Tutankham Year=1983 Genre=Arcade Description=Inside King Tut's tomb are treasures beyond your wildest dreams. They can be yours...if you dare to take them. Supernatural creatures roam the mazes of the tomb guarding the treasures at all costs. Your only defenses against them are your laser gun...and your wits. Blast away, snatch the loot, escape through the secret passageway before it's too late! And when you see a key, take that, too. It will unlock the door to the next chamber and the next adventure. Enter King Tut's tomb and see what awaits you...if you dare. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 – 8, in order of increasing difficulty from easiest to toughest. Games 1 - 4 are for one player. Games 5 - 8 are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick, for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick, for the second player in two player games. \ \ Move with the joystick. Press the joystick button at the same time you move the joystick either left or right to fire your laser gun that direction. To create a laser flash, hold down the joystick button, and, at the same time, move the joystick up. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin play. Score as many points as you can by recovering treasures and defeating the guardians of the tomb. \ \ Find the Key. Inside each chamber is a key. As soon as you see it, go after it. You'll need it in order to enter the next chamber at the end of the maze. Once you have the key you'll see it in the archeologist's hand. \ \ Watch out for Creature Nests. Throughout the maze are creatures' nests. Creatures of varying speeds and species can spring from them at any time. Just before they do, however, you'll hear a "slurp-like" sound. When you hear it, get ready to fire at the approaching creature! \ \ If you're in a tight spot and can't seem to fire your way out, you can activate the laser flash. The laser flash will cause all the creatures on the screen to disappear... just long enough for you to escape. You'll start with three flashes, so use them wisely! \ \ Pick up Treasure. Various kinds of exotic and priceless treasures are located throughout the maze. You'll find them tucked away in alcoves. Just remember that you don't have to go after each one--especially if it's too risky. As the astute archeologist knows, some treasures are more valuable than others. It's up to you to decide which ones you most desire. Good luck. \ \ Find the Secret Passageways. Secret passageways let you zip from one side of the chamber to the other. They can let you escape dangerous situations. Oftentimes it's the only way to continue through the maze. Because a secret is a secret, it's up to you to find out where each one is located. \ \ Watch the Time Band. The time band monitors the amount of ammunition in your laser gun. The longer you remain in the maze, the faster the ammo is used up. So try to complete the maze as quickly as you can. Your ammo supply replenishes with each new chamber. \ \ Open the Door. At the end of each maze, you'll find a door. As long as the archaeologist has the key in hand, he'll unlock that door when he reaches it. Behind it lies another fabulous treasure and the entrance to the next chamber! If the archaeologist has no key when he reaches the door, he must go back and get it. [Gyruss] File=/rom/Gyruss.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Gyruss Year=1984 Genre=Arcade Description=Three billion miles is a long way from home. But there's no shorter route from outer Neptune to Earth. As if that weren't enough... it's got to be a shoot-out all the way. You alone in your rapid-firing spaceship, swirling in a circular flight pattern... orbiting to the right... arcing to the left... trying to mow down wave after wave of enemy plane formations, rocketing meteors and runaway satellites. Stops at Uranus, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars will mark your progression towards Earth. Each one's a short visit, though. Then it's off again to the next planet - and the next wave of enemies. Reach Earth in one piece and maybe you'll think twice about leaving home. Then again... maybe not! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to choose a difficulty level from 1 (easiest) to 4 (hardest). \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick, for this one player game. Move with the joystick and fire with the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the joystick button to begin play. The objective is to make the journey from beyond Neptune to the sanctuary of Earth, defeating enemy planes, avoiding meteors and satellites, and reaching interim planets along the way. [Asteroids Deluxe] File=/rom/AsteroidsDeluxe.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Asteroids 3 Year=2005 Genre=Arcade Description=You're on patrol with the Cosmic Space Patrol again, in the midst of a war against the deadly Zylors. Strange alien robotic life forms, these cybernetic creatures are out to destroy human kind. Now promoted to commander of the squadron, your crew has been scrambled to a nearby asteroid belt where Zylor ships have been spotted. Suddenly, you find yourselves surrounded by thousands of the deadly asteroids. Something's not right, there's a lot more than there should be. \ \ Luckily, each of your ships is of course equipped with your trusty photon torpedoes, hyperspace, shields, and flip control. \ \ But wait - what's that over there coming out from behind that large asteroid over there? It's the Zylor saucer you were sent in after. Dodging and weaving, you suddenly realize they've gotten a lot smarter. And what's that strange looking asteroid that seems to be following you? Wait a minute, that's no asteroid! It's a giant ship! This is an ambush! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose a one or two player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ Push the joystick up for thrust, left to turn counterclockwise, right to turn clockwise, and down to use shields. Press the joystick button to fire photon torpedoes at the enemy objects. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, difficulty is increased. With switches in the B position, or normal difficulty, there are no UFOs or satellites. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin play. \ \ Points are determined by the size of the asteroid boulders between large, medium, and small. The smaller boulders are the hardest to hit and therefore worth the most points. Scoring for shooting UFO's and satellites also varies by size and difficulty. [Beamrider] File=/rom/Beamrider.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Beamrider Year=1984 Genre=atvi Description=The Restrictor Shield, 99 sectors deep, now surrounds the Earth. You are the Beamrider, on a mission to clear the Shield. There you must demolish an onslaught of aliens as you dodge from beam-to-beam. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move left and right with the joystick. Use the controller button to fire laser lariats. Push the joystick up to fire torpedoes.\ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, play an advanced game. In the B position, play the basic game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button and move the joystick to begin. \ Points are scored each time an enemy saucer, chirper ship or Sector Sentinel is destroyed. Point values increase as you progress to higher sectors. [Chopper Command] File=/rom/ChopperCommand.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Chopper Command Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Control a powerful helicopter as you defend caravans of trucks from the enemy's aircraft. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. Games 1 and 2 are Cadet level, with the former for one player and the latter for two players. Games 3 and 4 are the more difficult Commander level, with the former for one player and the latter for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. Press the controller button to fire the cannons. Holding the controller button down will activate continuous fire mode. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the B position, the chopper will have fast continuous fire. In the A position, it will have slower continuous fire. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Action begins as soon as you move the joystick or press the controller button. \ The Long Range Scanner at the bottom of the screen will enable you to detect both approaching truck convoys (friendly) and enemy aircraft well ahead of time. The truck convoys appear as white "blips" on the very bottom of the scanner while enemy aircraft appear as white "blips" above the convoy. Your helicopter gunship is the black dot. You can calculate that the area represented on the Long Range Scanner is roughly 5 miles, while the area portrayed on the large screen is about 1 mile. \ Each time you shoot down an enemy helicopter, you earn 100 points. For every enemy jet you shoot down, you will be credited with 200 points. Should you wipe out an entire wave of hostile aircraft, you will receive a bonus calculated by multiplying the number of trucks remaining in the convoy times the wave number achieved (one through 10) times 100. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Cosmic Commuter] File=/rom/CosmicCommuter.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Cosmic Commuter Year=1984 Genre=atvi Description=Skillfully pilot your Astrobus as you pick up passengers, dodge or shoot obstacles, and try to avoid running out of fuel. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 (easy) and 2 (challenging). \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move with the joystick. To blast meteors and space mines, press the controller button. To pick up a commuter, fly over his head and quickly push the joystick down. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Land your Rocket Module. The Astrobus will instantly separate and begin the commute route. Pick up commuters when they appear at surface bus stops. Stay on schedule. When route is completed, return to the Rocket Module and reconnect. Lift-off and deliver commuters to Grand Central Space Station. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Crackpots] File=/rom/Crackpots.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Crackpots Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=As a gardener named Potsy, drop flower pots on the creepy crawly creatures emerging from the sewer who are trying to invade your apartment building through open windows. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 (one player) and 2 (two players). \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move left and right with the joystick. To push a pot over the ledge, press the controller button when Potsy is standing behind it. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Bugs come in waves. The first wave is black, then colors progress to blue, red and green. There are twelve bugs in each wave. When you make it through the green wave, the cycle will repeat. However, you'll then be at the next level and all the bugs will move faster. \ Six Bonus Bugs are displayed below the sewer at the beginning of each wave. Whenever a bug slithers into a window, a Bonus Bug will disappear from this display. When six bugs have crawled into the windows, all six Bonus Bugs will be gone and your controller button won't release any more flowerpots. Then, one of the crawlers will chew up a layer of your building, and you'll repeat the wave at a slower level. \ The game ends when the creepy crawlers have gobbled up six layers of the building. [Decathlon] File=/rom/Decathlon.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Decathlon Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Requiring discipline and sweat, stamina and speed, with muscles opposing muscles, compete in the most celebrated game of the Olympics: the ten events of the decathlon. Earn points for each event. Highest final score wins! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose the number of players, between 1 - 4. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick, with players taking turns using the same controller, in Long Jump, High Jump, Pole Vault, and Javelin. For 100m Dash, Shot Put, 400m Dash, 110m Hurdles, Discus, and 1500m, the P2, or right, joystick, may also be used. \ Continually move the joystick left and right to run or approach the scratch line. Press the controller button to jump, throw, hurdle, put the shot, or vault. \ Total scores may be reviewed by pressing the controller button before any event. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The 10 decathlon events are: 100-Meter Dash, Long Jump, Shot Put, High Jump, 400-Meter Race, 110-Meter Hurdles, Discus Throw, Pole Vault, Javelin Throw, and 1500-Meter Race. \ Contestants compete separately in each event. Some events allow more than one attempt per contestant. When all contestants have completed an event, the next event automatically appears. \ All decathletes can practice any event before the Games. Hold the SELECT button down and the name of each event will appear on the screen one at a time. When the event you want to practice appears, release the SELECT button and press START button. [Dragster] File=/rom/Dragster.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Dragster Year=1980 Genre=atvi Description=Race across the finish line before your opponent. Be careful, because if you rev your engine too much, it will blow! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 2. Game 1 is straight-ahead dragster for one or two players. Game 2 is steerable dragster for one or two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. There is no computer opponent, so one player always competes against the clock. \ The joystick is both the clutch and gear shifter. The controller button is the gas pedal. To shift gears, clutch by pushing the joystick to the left and shift by letting the joystick spring back to the center. Give your dragster gas by pressing the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of Dragster is to beat your opponent across the screen, or to race against the clock for best time. \ Press START button or push the joystick right to begin play. The race starts with a new countdown and both cars in neutral. \ When the countdown reaches 0, you can start. If you drop into gear too soon, before the end of the countdown, EARLY will appear on the screen and you have to wait for the next race. You can clutch during the countdown, but cannot drop into 1st until 0. \ In game option 2, not only do you have to clutch and shift your racer quickly through four gears and give it the gas without blowing your engine, you also have to steer your dragster between the grandstands and the center divider. [Enduro] File=/rom/Enduro.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Enduro Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Welcome to The National Enduro race! Drive through sun, snow, fog, and ice, sunrise to sunset, as fast as you can. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move the joystick left or right to steer. Press the controller button to accelerate. The longer you keep the controller button pressed, the faster your car will go until it reaches top speed. To coast at a constant speed, press the controller button until the desired speed is reached, then release. To slow down, release the red button and apply the brakes by pushing the joystick down. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The number of cars you must pass is posted at the beginning of each day in the lower right corner of your instrument panel (200 on the first day, 300 on subsequent days). Each time you pass a car, this meter counts off by one. When you pass the required number of cars, green flags appear. But keep going. All additional kilometers are added to your total. You'll move on to the next day when the present day ends. If you don't pass the required number of cars by daybreak, the game ends. \ From dawn till the black of night, you'll be on the road. Pay attention to the lighting and scenery. It represents the time of day, letting you know how much time is remaining. And, use caution at night. You can only see the tail lights of the other cars. \ Weather conditions keep changing, so brace yourself. Can you hang in through ice and fog? A white, icy road means your car will be less responsive to your steering. A thick, fog-shrouded screen gives you less time to react, since it will take you longer to see the cars up ahead. [Fishing Derby] File=/rom/FishingDerby.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Fishing Derby Year=1980 Genre=atvi Description=Catch more sunfish than your opponent, but watch out for the shark! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 (one player) and 2 (two players). \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick left to right to move your pole out and back. To lower and raise your line, move the joystick up and down. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches in the A position mean the fish won't bite unless you get the end of your line under the fish's nose. With the switches in the B position, the fish will bite if you get the end of the line near its mouth. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Drop the very end of your line (that's where the bait is) down to the level you want to fish. Then move the bait to touch the mouth of the fish you want to catch. \ If you don't do anything after hooking a fish, he will swim slowly up toward the surface (and the shark might gobble him up). If you want to reel him in fast, push the controller button. Be quick, though. When both players have hooked a fish, only one can reel up at a time (the first one hooked). The other fish will swim across until the first fish has either been caught or eaten by the shark. \ First player to land 99 lbs. of fish wins. [Frostbite] File=/rom/Frostbite.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Frostbite Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Help Frostbite Bailey build igloos by jumping on floating blocks of ice. Be careful to avoid these deadly hazards: clams, snow geese, Alaskan king crab, grizzly polar bears, and the rapidly dropping temperature! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. Games 1 (one player) and 2 (two players) are regular (games start at level 1). Games 3 (one player) and 4 (two players) are advanced (games start at level 5). \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move Frostbite Bailey with the joystick. To reverse direction of the ice floe you are standing on, press the controller button. Each time you do, your igloo will lose a block, unless it's completely built. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each time Frostbite Bailey jumps onto a white ice floe, a "block" is added to the igloo. Once jumped upon, the white ice turns blue. It can still be jumped on, but it won't add points to your score or blocks to your igloo. When all four rows are blue, they turn white again. The igloo is complete when the door appears. Frostbite Bailey may then jump into it. \ Avoid contact with Alaskan King Crabs, snow geese, and killer clams, as they will push Frostbite Bailey into the fatal Arctic Sea. The Polar Grizzlies come out of hibernation at level 4 and, upon contact, will chase Frostbite Bailey off-screen. \ Fresh Fish swim by regularly. They are Frostbite Bailey's only food, and, as such, are also additives to your score. Catch 'em if you can. \ Frostbite Bailey works the day shift and the night shift. He must build four igloos per shift. \ A Magic Fish will appear near your score when you've racked up a certain high number of points. Watch for it! \ Frostbite Bailey gets lost each time he falls into the Arctic Sea, gets chased away by a Polar Grizzly, or gets caught outside when the temperature drops to zero. \ Score 5,000 points to earn an extra life. [Keystone Kapers] File=/rom/KeystoneKapers.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Keystone Kapers 1 Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Control Officer Keystone Kelly in hot pursuit of Harry Hooligan in this madcap dash through a department store. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move Keystone Kelley with the joystick. Press the controller button to jump. For a long, running jump, press the controller button while pushing the joystick left or right. Push the joystick down to duck. Push the joystick up to step into an open elevator and down to step out. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Points are earned each time a Krook (Harry Hooligan) is apprehended. The sooner you catch him, the more points you'll get. Krooks 1 through 8 are worth 100 times the amount left on Bonus Timer. Krooks 9 through 16 are worth 200 times the amount left on Bonus Timer. After your 16th arrest, each Krook will be worth 300 times the amount left on Bonus Timer. Also, every recovered moneybag and suitcase is worth 50 points. \ You must jump to avoid a rapid onslaught of shopping carts, beach balls, and cathedral radios. If you collide, a valuable 9 seconds will be deducted from your time. As your score rises, toy biplanes whizz by. Duck to avoid them. \ You'll lose a Keystone Kelley if you collide with a biplane, run out of time, or allow Harry Hooligan to escape off the roof. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Megamania] File=/rom/Megamania.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Megamania Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Control a fleet of mobile blasters at the bottom of the screen, under constant attack by wave-after-wave of outrageous objects. Your goal is to accumulate points by knocking out as many enemy objects as possible before your fleet is destroyed. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. Games 1 (one player) and 2 (two players taking turns) let you use guided missiles and continuous fire. Games 3 (one player) and 4 (two players taking turns) only allow for straight missiles and single shots. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move left and right with the joystick. Fire missiles with the controller button. In games 1 and 2, you can also control the direction of your missile after it’s fired by steering with the joystick. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In the B position, missiles travel at high speed. In the A position, missiles travel at slow speed. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Your goal is to accumulate points by knocking out as many enemy objects as possible, before your fleet is destroyed. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Oink!] File=/rom/Oink.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Oink Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Three little pigs. Three little houses. Each Pig defends its own house. Your goal is to fix the holes caused by the Big Bad Wolf who is trying to huff and puff your house down. The first house is made of straw, so it's yellow. The second is made of sticks, so it's brown. The third house is made of bricks, so it's red. Each time you lose a Pig, you move to the next house and the next Pig. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 3. Game 1 is one player controlling the Pig versus the computer Wolf. Game 2 is two players taking turns controlling the Pig versus the computer Wolf. Game 3 is two players taking turns controlling the Pig and Wolf. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Use the joystick to move the Pig. Press the controller button to grab an object and release the controller button to drop the object in place as a patch. \ When playing as the Wolf, use the joystick to move. Press the controller button to huff and puff and destroy objects. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the difficulty switches in the A position, your Pig must walk down to the wall to drop an object in place. In the B position, the Pig can drop objects in place from any point on the screen. When playing game 3, the Wolf will huff and puff a little slower with the difficulty switch in the A position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Wait for the Pig to walk to the center of its house, then move the joystick to bring out the Wolf and start the action. \ Whether your house is made of straw or sticks or bricks, the Wolf will try to blow it down to get the Pig. He'll blow a little hole here, then a little hole there. And, if you don't keep up with the Wolf, he'll turn little holes into big holes. Then he'll chase after your Pig. \ If your Pig is struck by the Wolf's breath, he will fall down to the bottom of the wall, losing precious time. And, if the hole is wide enough for the Pig to fit through, the Wolf's breath will take him right out onto the lawn. And then you've lost a Pig. \ Every time a row of objects is used up, a new row appears. With each new row, point values increase. But as they do, the Wolf gets tougher and tougher. \ You and a friend can take turns helping the Wolf in his homewrecking crusade. In game number 3, each player will alternately have 3 turns helping the Wolf and 3 turns helping the Pigs. Points are scored only while you're helping the Pigs. At the end of the game, total scores are shown for both players. [Seaquest] File=/rom/Seaquest.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Seaquest Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Retrieve as many treasure divers as you can, while dodging and blasting enemy subs and killer sharks, all before your oxygen runs out! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 for one player, and 2 for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. Press the controller button to fire torpedoes. Hold the controller button down for continuous fire. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches in the B position will cause fast continuous fire from your submarine. Switches in the A position will cause slower continuous fire. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. This will position your sub on the waves, place three reserve subs on the horizon and fill your oxygen tank. The action begins as soon as you submerge. \ Rescue divers by cruising into them with your sub. As soon as you have retrieved your sixth diver, you'll hear a quick beep. Now surface and listen to six gold ingots, worth valuable points, plunk onto your deck. \ When the game begins, every killer shark and enemy sub is worth 20 points. Every time you surface with six divers, the value of enemy subs and killer sharks increases by 10, up to a maximum of 90 points each. Rescued divers start at 50 points each. Then, their point value increases by 50, every time you surface, up to a maximum of 1000 points each. Also, you'll be further rewarded with bonus points for all the oxygen you have remaining the moment you surface. The more oxygen you have left, the more bonus points you're given. [Stampede] File=/rom/Stampede.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Stampede Year=1981 Genre=atvi Description=Play as a cowboy who must rope as many dogie calves as he can. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. The higher the game number, the more difficult the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, it shortens the rope. In the B position, it lengthens the rope. The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch has no effect. \ Move with the joystick. Use the controller button to throw your rope. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Score as many points as possible by roping as many dogie calves as you can before too many stray behind you. \ To rope, position your horse directly behind the dogie you wish to lasso. The rope will always be thrown directly in front of your horse, and the loop must touch a dogie in order to rope him. If you attempt to rope a steer which is too far away or too close, you'll come up empty. When you get more at home on the range, you'll know the right time to throw your rope. It's impossible to score well if you can't keep the game going long enough to rope a passel of dogies. The only way to do that successfully is to keep the cattle in a herd in front of you. Herding is as important as roping in helping you run up your score. \ When you ride just behind one of the dogies, you'll notice he'll speed up and run further out in front of your horse. Since all dogies do not run at the same speed, you will have your work cut out for you to keep them all together and ahead of you. \ Score 1,000 points to earn an extra life. [Starmaster] File=/rom/Starmaster.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Starmaster Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Your mission is simply to defend all of the starbases in the area by destroying the attacking enemy ships. Repair your ship's damage and refuel your ship by docking with a local starbase. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games E (Ensign, easy), L (Leader), W (Wing Commander), and S (StarMaster, hardest). \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move with the joystick. Fire and select by pressing the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Press difficulty switches to bring up the Galactic Chart. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Your ship will be cruising through an empty sector of the galaxy. Now, you must seek out the enemy and race at warp speed to meet and destroy them. \ During the course of your mission, you will make use of four distinct modes of operation: Galactic Chart/Sector Analysis, Warp Travel, Engaging the Enemy, and Docking with a Starbase. \ In Galactic Chart/Sector Analysis your object is to locate enemy starfighters--or your starbases. After consulting Mission/Attack Control Computer (MACC), select a sector of the galaxy to which to warp, to either engage the enemy or dock with a starbase for refueling and repairs. \ Select a sector of the galaxy by moving joystick, which controls a cross on the Galactic Chart display. Place the + in the sector of the galaxy to which you wish to travel. Press the controller button on the joystick to begin Warp travel to the sector selected. \ In Warp Travel segment of your mission, you will be traveling at warp speed from one sector of the galaxy to another. Be alert to meteors which enter your path. Use your joystick to steer around them or destroy them with your laser cannons. Each meteor that hits your ship drains 100-500 units of energy from your shields, and could result in even greater damage to your ship. During warp travel, MACC will provide only Energy and Damage Control Status. \ When Engaging the Enemy, your ship's laser gunsight will begin to flash, indicating the presence of enemy starfighters. Your objective is to destroy all enemy starfighters in the sector, in the fastest time, using the least amount of energy and avoiding damage to your ship. \ When all the enemy ships in a sector have been destroyed, your control console will turn from red to green. You should then refer to your Galactic Chart to seek out more enemies or locate your starbases. \ When Docking with a Starbase, use the joystick to pilot your ship until your ship's sights connect with the orbiting space station at its closest approach. Once Docked, your ship's energy will be completely replenished and all damage will be repaired. You will then be prepared to continue your mission to destroy the enemy. \ Enemy starfighters are constantly trying to surround and destroy your starbases. Only you can prevent this from occurring. When the enemy succeeds in destroying a starbase, an explosion is heard (no matter where your ship happens to be at the time), and the starbase disappears from the Galactic Chart. \ When all enemy ships are destroyed or your ship is destroyed or your ship runs out of energy, your mission is over. Call up the Galactic Chart and review your Mission Evaluation (score). \ While engaging the enemy in battle, MACC will display only Energy and Damage Control Status. Monitor Damage Control to determine when damage occurs, as follows: \ Damage Control Status (D: LSWR) \ L: Laser cannons destroyed. You cannot fire at the enemy or meteors. \ S: Shields destroyed. You ship is defenseless. One more hit from enemy fire or collision with a meteor during warp travel will destroy your ship and end the game. \ W: Warp engines are damaged. You ship will use twice as much energy during warp travel. Watch energy reserves. \ R: Radar destroyed. You can no longer spot enemy fighters on the Galactic Chart. Your starbases will continue to appear. \ \ Whenever damage occurs, you will hear an explosion, whether you are monitoring your Galactic Chart or viewing the space around you. \ \ Energy Reserves \ MACC will activate the energy reserve alarm (a yellow hazard light on the control panel) when energy drops below 1000 units. If your ship runs out of fuel, your mission cannot be continued, and the game is over. To repair damage and/or refuel, you must reach one of your starbases and dock. \ To reach a starbase for docking, call up your Galactic Chart, select a sector of the galaxy in which a starbase is located, and press the red button on your Joystick to warp to the starbase sector. \ To dock, use the joystick to pilot your ship until your ship's sights connect with the orbiting starbase at its closest approach. \ Once Docked, your ship's energy will be completely replenished and all damage will be repaired. You will then be prepared to continue your mission to destroy the enemy. [Super Cobra] File=/rom/SuperCobra.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Supercobra Year=1983 Genre=Arcade Description=Brush off your ace piloting skills because you're about to take off on a hair-raising adventure: air surveillance of unfriendly territory. This means a 10,000-mile obstacle course through ever-changing terrain...over craggy mountain tops, around tall city buildings, through long jagged tunnels. And that isn't all! The course is just rigged with chopper-stopping weapons like igniting rockets, heavy ground artillery, flying fireballs, and falling mines. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select a game speed: slow, medium, or fast. These are the speeds at which the chopper flies. If you skip this step, you will automatically get the medium speed.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the Joystick to maneuver your chopper up, down, and to the right. When you move left, the chopper hovers. Each press of the controller button releases one missile, then drops one bomb. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You'll start the game with four choppers. The first appears in action while the remaining three wait "on deck" at the bottom of the scree. \ As soon as you press RESET, start to fly your chopper down screen to the right. The object is to avoid the obstacles that border around the chopper's air route in order to gain points for mileage. Hit an obstacle, and the chopper goes down. When a chopper goes down, the next one comes up and begins at the start of the same level where the last one crashed. \ In addition to gaining mileage, try to shoot down for points the weapons scattered throughout the course. You'll find four different types of weapons: ground artillery, rockets, fireballs, and mines. The type of weapon you'll find and whether it's activated or not will differ, depending on the level at which you're playing. Just remember: dodge its fire, don't run your chopper into it, and try to shoot it down for points. \ Notice the band at the top of the screen. Each block in the band represents 1,000 miles of the obstacle course - or one game level. There are 11 levels in all. Every time your chopper enters a new level, its corresponding block turns yellow. \ Survive one level (with at least one remaining chopper) and you'll hear a brief musical tune. In a moment, you'll cruise into the next level and a different section of the obstacle course. \ Each level not only shows a different air route, but also displays different combinations of active and inactive weapons. [Space Raid] File=/rom/SpaceRaid.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Raid Year=2013 Genre=Action Description=This 3-D space game takes you across an alien asteroid fortresses on a special mission. The evil Robot and its fierce armies have conquered an asteroid belt. You must stop them before they enslave the entire galaxy! Fly through space and destroy the enemy spaceships. Pass the barrier on the first asteroid, then dive to the enemy surface. Evade fire from gun turrets and robots as you search for the Robot Warrior. Once you successfully cross the asteroid fortress, you must fly through deep space again. Avoid the enemy squadron combing the galaxy in search of your fighter! Can you defeat the evil Robot? Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for this one player game. Move with the joystick. Push the joystick away from you to make your fighter move down. Push the joystick toward you to make your fighter move up. \ \ Press the joystick button to make your fighter fire an energy blast. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to position A for an easy game or position B for a hard game. In the easy game you'll get a crosshair to point to enemies. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to start the game. Your fuel level is shown with a double red bar in the bottom part of the screen; destroy fuel depots to restore it. In space, fuel is not used, but inside fortresses it will be consumed, and then consumed faster in advanced levels. [BurgerTime] File=/rom/Burgertime.a26 Platform=Dataeast Sort=Burger Time Year=1982 Genre=Arcade Description=Build beautiful burgers by dropping buns and patties onto a plate. Dodge horrible hot dogs. Defy brawling bread sticks. Pepper enormous eggs and charging cheese. Score points by squashing those nasties with a falling bun. Build all the burgers and you move on to the next maze. Get too close to a nasty, though, and it's back to Burger School for you in short order. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick, for this one or two player game. Move with the joystick. Press the joystick button to throw pepper. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch determines the number of players. Switch position A is for two players. Switch position B is for one player. \ \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch can pause the action. Switch position A pauses and switch position B unpauses. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin play. \ \ You move your chef around the maze in a frantic attempt to build hamburgers before the nasties converge on you. Move across the top of the burger ingredients and they will drop a level. Work all the ingredients to the bottom and you'll move on to the next maze. Score points by dropping an ingredient, squashing nasties, or giving them a ride down on a falling ingredient. Dust a nasty with some pepper (you have a limited number) and he'll stop in his tracks. If a nasty touches him, your chef is cooked. So watch out! Play alone or challenge a friend. Highest score wins. [Burnin' Rubber] File=/rom/BumpNJump.a26 Platform=Dataeast Sort=Burnin Rubber Year=1983 Genre=Arcade Description=You're on the road, surrounded by a pack of cars. Anything goes! Bump 'em...bash 'em...crash 'em off the road...before they bump you into the weeds! Jump over waterways and jump on cars to smash 'em! Watch out for obstacles in your way. Keep driving! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use either joystick controller for this one player game. Move with the joystick. Use the joystick as the gas pedal; push up to accelerate, push down to decelerate. Push the joystick button to jump when you're going at least 100 mph. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin play. \ \ YOUR CAR \ When the game begins, you have 5 red cars. You're driving the one on the road, and there are 4 others ready to roll. You lose a car each time you crash! You get another car each time you rack up 40,000 points. \ \ BUMPING \ \ Try to bump other cars and send them crashing off the road. Bump with the front of your car and you lose speed on impact. Get bumped from behind and you speed up. Your car ricochets any time you make contact with another car. Quickly regain your course. \ \ JUMPING \ \ Make sure you're going at least 100 mph, then press the joystick button. Your car gets bigger as it jumps in the air, then gets smaller as it lands again. The faster you're going, the farther you will jump. \ Use the joystick when you're in midair to control your landing point. You slow down on landing. \ \ Jump on top of a car to crash it. Jump to clear water and to get out of tight situations. Try some hot shot driving by jumping to an island in the water, then jumping to land! (The "OK" on the screen means you're going over 100 mph, so you can jump!) \ \ ROADWAYS \ \ There are lots of different roadways. Your challenge is to keep driving as long as you can! Don't crash into the railings or water...drive around center islands and road debris. \ \ As you approach water, you'll hear a beep and see (!) on the screen. Get ready to make a split second decision. Speed down the causeway that runs alongside the water (if there is one),…or jump to clear the water! \ \ Each time you make it to the end of a roadway you see the number of cars that crashed, bonus points, the roadway number you're about to begin, and the season you will drive through next. (The scenery along the roadways is a different color for Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter.) Then you're automatically on the next roadway. [Lock 'n Chase] File=/rom/LockNChase.a26 Platform=Dataeast Sort=Lock n chase Year=1982 Genre=Arcade Description=The object of the game is to keep your thief one jump ahead of the police... and pick up as many gold bars as you can!!! The police are trailing close behind. You'll need fancy footwork to dodge 'em. Don't get cornered. Slam a door to block their way. Keep running! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Before the game begins, press down on SELECT. If you do not see any thieves at the bottom of the screen, it's a one player game. But if you see two thieves at the bottom, you have selected a two player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick, to control the red thieves in a one or two player game. Use the player two, or right, joystick, to control the green thieves in a two player game. \ \ Move with the joystick. You can slam a door behind a thief and slow the cops' pursuit. To do this, press the joystick button. Doors only slam horizontally at the black lines in the corridors, Only two doors can be slammed at a time. After a few seconds, the door opens again. Watch out...the thief cannot run through a door either! \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch for a one player game and the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch for the second player in a two player game. Position A gives you a fast game and position B starts a slow game and then gets faster. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin play. \ \ It's a cops and robbers chase at your local bank. You have five thieves. They enter the vault one at a time. Four police officers are hot on the thief's trail. Direct the thief down the corridors. Keep him away from the law! The thief is "caught" when he collides with a policeman. The action stops. \ \ Your thief picks up gold bars as he runs. When all the gold bars are gone from the vault, the red door opens and you can escape at the top of the screen. Push the joystick button and you have a whole new set of gold bars to pick up. Points are mounting! \ \ Get extra points for picking up the "treasures". They randomly appear in the center of the screen. You have to be fast! They only appear for a short time. \ \ The game ends when all your thieves are "caught". The final score flashes. Reset the game and start again. [Space Invaders Arcade] File=/rom/SpaceInvaders.a26 Platform=Taito Sort=Space Invaders 1 Year=2015 Genre=Arcade Description=You are at war with invaders from space who are threatening the earth! Your objective is to destroy these invaders by firing your laser cannon. You must wipe out the invaders either before they reach the bottom of the screen or before they hit you three times with their laser bombs. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick left and right to move your laser cannon in that direction. Press the joystick button to fire at the invaders. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ \ Note: This game does not support "Save, Load and Rewind" functionality. [Polaris] File=/rom/Polaris.a26 Platform=Taito Sort=Polaris Year=1983 Genre=Arcade Description=You're the commander of a Polaris class nuclear submarine and your mission is to defend your country from enemy attack. In your battle, you will be required to defend against wave-after-wave of enemy planes and dive bombers. To make matters worse, the enemy has sent their own subs and destroyers. In the course of your battles, you will need to maneuver through dangerous channels full of mines! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between 1 and 2 players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the Polaris sub with the joystick. The controller button fires the Polaris missile in the first screen and torpedoes in the second screen. In the first screen, a missile can only be fired after the previous missile has left the screen or hit an object. In the second screen pressing the red button will cancel the bullet in progress and fire again. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Your submarine will be placed in the left side of the ocean, and the enemy planes and subs will attack. Move fast to avoid the subs and bombs. [Front Line] File=/rom/FrontLine.a26 Platform=Taito Sort=Front Line Year=1984 Genre=Arcade Description=Single-handedly take on the bad guys and knock out their fortress with your soldier. Start out on foot, but find the tanks and create even more mayhem. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ When the game starts, you'll notice a number in the upper portion of your screen, indicating skill level (1 = Skill 1, 2 = Skill 2, and so on.). It is followed by a small tank, indicating number of players (One tank = one player and two tanks = two players.). Press the SELECT button until you reach the Skill Level and number of players you desire. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. Push the joystick in the direction you want to move. \ Press the controller button to fire your weapon while aiming with the joystick. By momentarily tapping the joystick while the soldier is standing still, you can also change the direction of his fire (aim) without moving him. \ To jump into a tank, press controller button while you are touching the tank and the joystick is in its neutral position. Jump out by pressing and holding in the controller button until your soldier leaves the tank. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Your goal is to invade the enemy's territory and destroy their fort. [Jungle Hunt] File=/rom/JungleHunt.a26 Platform=Taito Sort=Jungle Hunt Year=1983 Genre=Arcade Description=Help Sir Dudley Dashly swing on vines, swim through crocodile-infested waters, jump and duck through a landslide of boulders, and jump over cannibals to save his wife, Lady Penelope Dashly. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose skill level 1 (easy) or skill level 2 (hard). \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for this one player game. \ Move the joystick to maneuver Dudley through the jungle. Press the controller button to jump. In the Reptile River level, press the controller button to stab the crocodiles. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ To rescue Lady Penelope, you'll have to make your way past four sets of obstacles: the vines of the Forest, the crocodiles of Reptile River, a landslide of bouncing boulders, and the spears of the two masked cannibals. You'll score points for each obstacle Dudley successfully overcomes; you'll also score bonus points for rescuing Lady Penelope. \ Since jungle hunting is a dangerous business, you are given five lives at the start of the game. The number of lives remaining is shown on the upper left of your screen. At 10,000 points you are given one extra life - if you survive that long! \ When you begin the game you are given 500 seconds to reach Lady Penelope. A timer counts down the seconds until you reach her. You'll score more bonus points for rescuing her quickly, so don't dawdle while you're jumping vines or avoiding crocodiles! [Pitfall II: Lost Caverns] File=/rom/Pitfall2.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Pitfall 2 Year=1984 Genre=atvi Description=Perhaps I've gone too far. I'm in an underground cavern beneath Peru. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ It seems to be a complex maze, perhaps eight chambers wide and over three times as deep. Niece Rhonda has disappeared, along with Quickclaw, our cowardly cat. I am beset by all manner of subterranean creatures in this vast, ancient labyrinth. And all because of a rock--the Raj diamond. It was stolen a century ago, and hidden here. \ Old friends, if ever you see this diary, I hope you'll read it and come to my aid. Help me find Rhonda, Quickclaw, and the diamond. On the way, let's also look for a stone-aged rat. A large university wants it for research. \ Finally, lots of stolen U.S. gold bars were ditched here. The more bars we recover, the more "brownie" points we'll get at journey's end. For the record, if I want a perfect evaluation (199,000 points), I must find Rhonda, Quickclaw, the diamond, all 28 gold bars, and the rat. And never fall victim to a single danger. Again though, my contract only requires the recovery of Rhonda, Quickclaw, and the diamond. Everything else is gravy. \ But oh...danger prevails. Poisonous frogs, bats, condors, electric eels, albino scorpions. And leaps over dark voids that dare me to fall to their fathomless depths. All of these pitfalls must be avoided. I'm not really sure what'll happen, should I succumb, but it can't be good. I'll check it out tomorrow. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick left or right to run in that direction. Press the joystick button while running to the left or right to jump over obstacles. To climb up ladders, push up on the joystick, and, to climb down, push down. When Pitfall Harry travels by balloon, the balloon will follow the left and right movements of the joystick. To speed up the balloon, push the joystick forward; to slow it down, pull the joystick back. To collect a treasure, run over it. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin play. To start the action, move the joystick. \ \ There is no time limit. You and Pitfall Harry can explore the lost caverns as long as you wish. The journey ends the moment Rhonda, the Raj diamond, and Quickclaw have all been found. [Freeway] File=/rom/Freeway.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Freeway Year=1981 Genre=atvi Description=Guide a chicken across 10 lanes of the most perilous freeway traffic imaginable! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 – 8. Game 1 is the easiest and game 8 is the hardest. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. Player one is the chicken on the left and player two is the chicken on the right. \ \ Push the joystick up to move up and push the joystick down to move down. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the difficulty switch in the B position, your chicken is knocked back one lane when struck by a vehicle. With the switch in the A position, your chicken will return to the curb after being struck by a vehicle. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to being play. One or two players may play any game.\ \ Each time you guide your chicken successfully across the freeway, you are awarded one point. The score for each player is indicated at the top of the screen, directly above each player's chicken. There are two minutes and sixteen seconds in each game. \ \ When the score begins to flash, eight seconds of playing time remain. At the end of each game, the traffic comes to a stop and the final score is shown. Whoever scores the most points is a winner. [Acid Drop] File=/rom/AcidDrop.a26 Platform=Salu Sort=Acid Drop Year=1992 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Adventures of Tron] File=/rom/AdventuresTron.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Adventures Of Tron Year=1983 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to keep your man, TRON, alive and scoring points. Keep him moving from side-to-side and floor-to-floor. Send him up the elevators. Jump him down a floor. Or slide him down the center INPUT/ OUTPUT beam. Wave after wave of Master Control Program attackers must be avoided - deadly Recognizers and Grid Bugs, even cannon-firing tanks. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Only the LEFT Difficulty Switch makes any difference in game play. \ In "B" position, all the various levels of play go SLOWER. (Game gets harder - cannon-firing tanks appear as more points are scored.) \ In "A" Difficulty position everything speeds up dramatically. (Tanks appear at once and everything comes in from different sides.) \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Depress console RESET button. \ TITLE will appear on TV Screen. \ Push either JOYSTICK and PLAY BEGINS! Use RED button to make man jump. Use JOYSTICK to maneuver. \ MORE ABOUT GAME PLAY \ When game starts, you have FOUR lives to lose. One man on your screen at a time. The grid has FOUR floors. \ All it takes is ONE enemy contact and your man is eliminated. (Until ALL four lives are lost, man is automatically replaced.) \ You must avoid 3 KINDS of MCP attackers: RECOGNIZERS, GRID BUGS and CANNON-FIRING TANKS (in the more difficult levels.) \ MCP attackers appear on the TOP FLOOR first. They move across the screen horizontally until they reach an edge. They then DROP down one FLOOR and move horizontally in the OPPOSITE direction. Attackers snake their way downward until they exit on the GROUND FLOOR. (In harder game levels, attackers alternate the side they enter by.) \ ELEVATORS UP or the I/O (INPUT/OUTPUT) BEAM DOWN are good ways to dodge enemy action. Elevators go up one floor only. And you must CROSS the center I/O BEAM before they work. You CAN CONTROL how fast your man moves up or down the elevator or I/O Beam by using the Joystick. Sliding down the I/O Beam also activates the elevators for a trip back up. \ You can jump your man down any number of floors, depending on HOW LONG you pull joystick BACK and hold it. (See previous page.) \ Don't forget the Solar Sailer! It's another way out of danger. Make TRON jump up and hitch a ride. \ Points are won by maneuvering TRON into position to intercept (capture) floating "BITS". EXTRA points for upper floor captures. (See "SCORING," below.) \ When you have captured ALL 7 floating "BITS", SCREEN WILL TURN BLUE. Survivor will then get a free trip up the Input/Output Beam, right off the screen. (I/O Beam may be entered from ANY floor.) Now you are into a NEW SCREEN. PLAY BEGINS AGAIN at a faster, more difficult level. Score 2,000 BONUS POINTS for each new screen. \ If MCP attackers take all four lives, the GAME IS OVER! DEPRESS RESET SWITCH & START A NEW GAME. [Air Raiders] File=/rom/AirRaiders.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Air Raid 2 Year=1983 Genre=console Description=It's a dogfight! Get an ememy plane in your sight and fire! Try to shoot down as many as you can! If ground fire explodes in your sight, you're hit and you quickly lose altitude. Climb back up! Stay clear of the flak! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set your LEFT difficulty switch to "A" or "B" It's much harder to get away from enemy shelling in the "A" position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ When you start a game and after your refuel, press the RED BUTTON. When you gain speed on the runway (about 4 seconds), pull back on the JOYSTICK for takeoff. If you try to take off before gaining enough speed, you will crash. \ Fly the plane by pushing on the JOYSTICK. Your point of view is through the cockpit window. As you "turn" the plane, your view changes. To fire, get the enemy in your sighth, then press the RED BUTTON. Keep an eye on your gauages. \ You can fly to a maximum 40 altitude. Be careful when you dive, you lose altitude fast. When you get low on fuel, it's time to land and refuel. Be careful or you might run out of fuel and crash! [Alien] File=/rom/Alien.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Alien 1 Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Armor Ambush] File=/rom/ArmorAmbush.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Armor Ambush Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to knock out enemy tanks, while avoiding hits on your tanks. You ambush the enemy, swing into position and FIRE! At the start both players have 25 tanks. Game's up when either player loses all 25! Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Only the LEFT Difficulty Switch makes any difference in game play. In "B" position your shots DO NOT bounce off buildings, trees, etc. In "B" position, a miss is just a miss. \ In "A" position, shots DO bounce off. They might even boomerang right back and KNOCK OUT YOUR OWN TANK! \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Depress RESET button. \ To bring up NEW MAP, after one player has lost both tanks, push RED BUTTON down. New map and 4 new tanks will appear. Begin next round. Swing your tank around until your gun barrel points directly at the enemy tank. Move within RANGE. (Very long shots will NOT reach.) Every time you fire, your own tank will recoil, knocking your aim off target. Maneuver for the next shot. Line up your gun barrel AGAIN! [Artillery Duel] File=/rom/ArtilleryDuel.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Artillery Duel Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Asterix] File=/rom/Asterix.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Asterix Year=1984 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Astroblast] File=/rom/Astroblast.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Astroblast Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description=Hit as many falling, fast-moving targets as you can. Move your laser base to avoid being hit yourself. Keep shooting as long as your bases last, and try for a great Peak Score! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function. Start the game by pressing the reset switch, then press the red button on the controller. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ RIGHT SWITCH: Set at "B" to play game at regular skill level. Set at "A" to play at accelerated speed (same pace and targets as if score were over 50,000). \ LEFT SWITCH: Set at "B" for manual firing mode. Set at "A" for automatic firing. NOTE: Switches can be changed during the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You start with 10 laser defense bases. Several things fall from the sky: rocks, spinning white bombs, "smart" guided missiles and - when your score goes over 20,000 - UFO bombs. If your active laser is hit OR a spinner lands, you lose that base. You get another base whenever your peak score goes up 1,000 points. As the score goes higher more targets appear - falling faster. \ Move your active laser base to get directly under a target, then fire your laser. Avoid being hit by any falling object. \ The number at lower right shows how many laser bases you have. You get a new base whenever your peak score increases 1,000 points. \ \ NOTE: If your score goes down, then rises, you don't get an extra base when you pass your old peak level. You must advance another 1,000 points to win a bonus base. \ WHEN ALL BASES ARE LOST, THE GAME ENDS AND YOUR PEAK SCORE APPEARS. [Atari Video Cube] File=/rom/Atarivideocube.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Atari Video Cube Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Help Hubie the Cube Master solve the magical Atari Video Cube. He picks up and drops colors at your command--and you have billions of possible combinations! For one player. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 18. Games 1-10 play at normal speed, and Games 11-18 play at a faster speed. In Games 3, 4, 7, 8, 13, 14, 17, and 18, the cube is blacked out unless rotating to a different side. Games 5-8, and Games 15-18 are self-playing, in which Hubie shows you how to solve the cube in the least amount of moves or time. In these variations, all you need to do is press GAME RESET. The computer will take control and start the game. In Games 9 and 10, Hubie's movements are restricted and he can only move in two directions: up, or to the right. \ Odd-numbered games (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, and 17) are scored by the number of moves and the number of colors that are swapped. Even-numbered games (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18) are scored by the time it takes to solve the cube. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left joystick, for this one player game. Move Hubie with the joystick. Hubie cannot move onto a square of the same color. Press the controller button make Hubie pick up and drop colors. Hubie can pick up, drop, and carry colors to any square on the cube. \ \ Push the joystick up to move up and push the joystick down to move down. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the Left Difficulty switch in the A position, a buzzer will sound each time Hubie tries to run to a square of the same color as he. In the B position, the buzzer sound changes to a "beep." \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to get the lowest score possible. If you are playing an odd-numbered game, your score is displayed as a single number on the bottom of the screen. Each time Hubie crosses a new square, picks up a color, or attempts to cross a square of his own color, you score one point. Your score is displayed on the lower center portion of the screen, beneath the cube. \ \ To start or restart a game, press GAME RESET. You'll enter the CUBE SELECT mode, and can select one of 50 different cubes. The colors on each cube are scrambled differently. Use your controller to select a cube number. Push up or left to increase the cube number by tens; push down or right to increase the cube number by ones. The number you select appears on the bottom of the screen, beneath the magical cube. After you select a cube, start the game by pressing the controller button. [Atlantis] File=/rom/Atlantis.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Atlantis 1 Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description=Atlantis, fabled city of antiquity, lies in peaceful waters. The major districts of the city - the Aqua Plain, the Domed Palace and the Bridged Bazaar - murmur with activity while vital generators whirl. Three defense posts guard the skies over the metropolis. The Gorgon Fleet, fierce warriors intent on demolishing Atlantis, attack in force. How long can the city withstand the assault? Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to cycle between the game variations. \ 1-Player Games: Game 1: The real challenge: wave after wave of Gorgons attack. You survive one wave only to face faster foes in the next. The two sentry posts and the Acropolis Command Post respond to your joystick orders. \ \ Game 2: Identical to game 1, but the Acropolis Command Post has been disabled and cannot fire. Place your shots well! \ \ Game 4: The prefect game for learning to play Atlantis. Game 4 does not increase in speed as rapidly as the other versions, while still remaining a challenge. Later waves are a test for any player. \ \ 2-Player Games: Game 3: Special Team Version where the left joystick fires the left sentry post, the right joystick fires the right sentry post, and the Acropolis Command Post does not fire. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Defend Atlantis! Blast Gorgon vessels before they come close enough to demolish Atlantis with the deathray. Score big and you can replace parts of the city the Gorgons have hit. Game ends when all seven of Atlantis' installations have been levelled and none is left in reserve. \ \ To fire left sentry post, lean joystick left and press red button. To fire right sentry post, lean joystick right and press red button. To fire the Acropolis Command Post, just press red button with the joystick centred. [Atlantis II] File=/rom/AtlantisII.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Atlantis 2 Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to cycle between the game variations. \ 1-Player Games: Game 1: The real challenge: wave after wave of Gorgons attack. You survive one wave only to face faster foes in the next. The two sentry posts and the Acropolis Command Post respond to your joystick orders. \ \ Game 2: Identical to game 1, but the Acropolis Command Post has been disabled and cannot fire. Place your shots well! \ \ Game 4: The prefect game for learning to play Atlantis. Game 4 does not increase in speed as rapidly as the other versions, while still remaining a challenge. Later waves are a test for any player. \ \ 2-Player Games: Game 3: Special Team Version where the left joystick fires the left sentry post, the right joystick fires the right sentry post, and the Acropolis Command Post does not fire. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Defend Atlantis! Blast Gorgon vessels before they come close enough to demolish Atlantis with the deathray. Score big and you can replace parts of the city the Gorgons have hit. Game ends when all seven of Atlantis' installations have been levelled and none is left in reserve. \ \ To fire left sentry post, lean joystick left and press red button. To fire right sentry post, lean joystick right and press red button. To fire the Acropolis Command Post, just press red button with the joystick centred. [Backgammon] File=/rom/Backgammon.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Backgammon Year=1979 Genre=paddle Description=Backgammon has four skill levels and follows the full rules of the game. There are also four variations of the game acey-deucey. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 and 3 are one player backgammon games, and games 5 and 7 are one player acey-deucey games. Games 2 and 4 are two player backgammon games, and games 6 and 8 are two player acey-deucey games. Games 1, 2, 5, and 6 feature a doubling cube. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, the computer will roll the dice for you. When the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch is in the B position, you can use your own dice and then dial in the numbers to the computer. Move the joystick or paddle and the number on the left die will change. When you see the number you want to enter, push the controller button. You can then dial in the second number on the right die and push the controller button. The computer will accept the roll and your moves will be made accordingly. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player games, the computer plays red. \ When it is your turn to move your game pieces, a yellow cursor will appear. Move the joystick or paddle until the cursor is on the point from which you wish to move your piece. Press the controller button to pick up the piece. You can then move the piece around the board by using the joystick or paddle. To deposit the piece, press the controller button again. The computer will not allow you to place a piece on a point that does not correspond to the number shown on the dice. \ If, after your dice have been rolled, you find that there are no moves open to you, press the red controller button. The dice will appear again for your opponent. [Bank Heist] File=/rom/BankHeist.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Bank Heist Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Barnstroming] File=/rom/Barnstorming.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Barnstorming Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Pull on your goggles and check out your controls. You're about to embark on a daredevil flight through the wild blue yonder. But before you take off, take a minute to read over these instructions. You'll be glad you did. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Select game with game select switch: \ Game 1: Hedge hopper (fly through 10 barns, fixed course) \ Game 2: Crop Duster (Fly through 15 barns, fixed course) \ Game 3: Stunt Pilot (Fly through 15 barns, fixed cures, different than game2) \ Game 4: Flying Ace (Fly through 25 barns, a new course each time you select Game4) \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set both difficulty swithces to B to begin. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Fly through a set number of barns in the shortest possible time (elapsed time indicated at top of screen). Each time you make it through a barn, your barn count number (upper left corner of screen) will decrease by one If you miss a barn, your barn count will remain the same and you will have to fly further to reach an additional barn When your barn count reaches zero, the game is ended. \ \ To take off, simply press the red button on your Joystick, and push the Joystick up to climb. Once airborne, the red botton acts as your throttle: press it for greater speed, release it to slow down. To increase your altitude, push the Joystick up, and, to descend, pull the joystick down. [Battlezone] File=/rom/Battlezone.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Battlezone 1 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=The year is 1999, and the nations of the Earth have declared world-wide peace. But a council of military commanders has unleashed battalions of aerial fighters, flying saucers, tanks, and supertanks to turn the world into a lifeless landscape unless you can stop them! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT switch to choose one of three game levels. The game level is indicated by the number of tanks displayed at the bottom of the screen. \ Game 1: Novice \ Game 2: Intermediate \ Game 3: Advanced \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You have five tanks to complete your mission. Your tank will be destroyed each time it is hit by enemy fire. The enemies you'll encounter are: \ TANKS: They move a bit slower than your tank, and can be identified by their blue turrets. \ SUPERTANKS: These look like regular tanks, but have yellow turrets and can move faster than your tank. \ FIGHTERS: Fighters always appear directly in front of you then zigzag toward your tank. When a fighter reaches point-blank range, it will veer to the side and fire an anti-tank shell directly at you. You can identify a fighter by the "buzz" sound it makes as it flies. \ FLYING SAUCERS Flying saucers do not fire at you, but are hard to hit and can distract you when a tank, a fighter, or a supertank is firing at you. \ \ Your radar is located at the top center of the screen. Enemy automatons appear on the screen as white "blips" of light, your tank is located in the middle of the radar circle. The two lines at the top of the radar screen indicate your field of view. When you move your tank so an enemy "blip" is between the lines, you should be able to see the enemy on the main screen. Be careful, though! An enemy can shoot and destroy your tank -- even if you can't see it on the main screen. A black sighting mark is located at the top of the main screen to help you aim at the target. When the enemy is directly in your line of fire, the sighting mark will change from black to white. [Battlezone Tron] File=/rom/BattlezoneTron.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Battlezone 2 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=The year is 1999, and the nations of the Earth have declared world-wide peace. But a council of military commanders has unleashed battalions of aerial fighters, flying saucers, tanks, and supertanks to turn the world into a lifeless landscape unless you can stop them! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT switch to choose one of three game levels. The game level is indicated by the number of tanks displayed at the bottom of the screen. \ Game 1: Novice \ Game 2: Intermediate \ Game 3: Advanced \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You have five tanks to complete your mission. Your tank will be destroyed each time it is hit by enemy fire. The enemies you'll encounter are: \ TANKS: They move a bit slower than your tank, and can be identified by their blue turrets. \ SUPERTANKS: These look like regular tanks, but have yellow turrets and can move faster than your tank. \ FIGHTERS: Fighters always appear directly in front of you then zigzag toward your tank. When a fighter reaches point-blank range, it will veer to the side and fire an anti-tank shell directly at you. You can identify a fighter by the "buzz" sound it makes as it flies. \ FLYING SAUCERS Flying saucers do not fire at you, but are hard to hit and can distract you when a tank, a fighter, or a supertank is firing at you. \ \ Your radar is located at the top center of the screen. Enemy automatons appear on the screen as white "blips" of light, your tank is located in the middle of the radar circle. The two lines at the top of the radar screen indicate your field of view. When you move your tank so an enemy "blip" is between the lines, you should be able to see the enemy on the main screen. Be careful, though! An enemy can shoot and destroy your tank -- even if you can't see it on the main screen. A black sighting mark is located at the top of the main screen to help you aim at the target. When the enemy is directly in your line of fire, the sighting mark will change from black to white. [Beany Bopper] File=/rom/BeanyBopper.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Beany Bopper Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Bermuda Triangle] File=/rom/BermudaTriangle.a26 Platform=Data Age Sort=Bermuda Triangle Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Berzerk] File=/rom/Berzerk.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Berzerk 1 Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Astro Date 3200: you are trapped in a maze-like world called Mazeon, where even the walls are death to touch. Grim robot thugs known as "Automazeons" stalk you relentlessly and you must systematically pulverize them with your laser gun before they eliminate you with theirs. Be beware of the Evil Otto! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ To select a BERZERK game, press down the GAME SELECT switch. If you press and hold down this switch, the game numbers automatically change at the bottom center of the screen. \ GAME 1: You receive an extra life every 1,000 points, there is no Evil Otto to pursue you, but watch out for the robots - they'll be shooting at you! \ GAME 2: You get a bonus life every time you make 1,000 points, the robots fire at you and Evil Otto rebounds when you shoot him. \ GAME 3: You win a new life every 1,000 points. You'll need all the lives you can get because in this game Evil Otto is invincible and the robots stalk you with their lasers. \ GAME 4: You have the opportunity to gain a new life every 2,000 points, there is no Evil Otto, but the robots are militant and you must dodge their deadly laser beams. \ GAME 5: With a rebound Evil Otto and mean robots on the prowl, Game 5 is like Game 2 - except a bonus life is won at 2,000 points rather than 1,000. \ GAME 6: Win another life every 2,000 points, but watch out for invicible Evil Otto and combatant robot goons. \ GAME 7: There are no bonus lives and no Evil Otto. You have only the laser-firing robots to contend with. \ GAME 8: There is a rebound Evil Otto. Otherwise it is exactly like Game 7. \ GAME 9: Here, Evil Otto is invincible, the robot gangs are armed and dangerous, and you have no bonus lives to prolong game play. \ GAME 10: You have the opportunity to win a new life every 1,000 points, the robots don't shoot, but watch out for Evil Otto - he's invincible! \ GAME 11: The robots don't shoot, Evil Otto rebounds and you get a new life every 1,000 points. \ GAME 12: This is the easiest of all BERSERK variations. There is no Evil Otto, the robots don't shoot at you, and you win a bonus life every 1,000 points. It's a good game for beginners or young children. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ After you have selected the game number you wish to play, press down the GAME RESET switch to start the action. Your score is determined by the number of robots that are destroyed. You will earn bonus points when all the robots in a single maze are annihilated. Occasionally, you will meet a super strong robot who is merely stunned by your first shot. Be brave, it will take a second hit to destroy this tough enemy. \ \ Your score will appear at the bottom of the screen, off-centered to the right. When all robots in a maze are destroyed, your score disappears and your bonus points flash on the screen, off-centered on the left. The computer automatically combines all points and your total score is displayed in the next maze. You can score a maximum of 999,999 points before the score rolls back to zero. [Blue Print] File=/rom/Blueprint.a26 Platform=CBSElectronics Sort=Blueprint Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Bobby Is Going Home] File=/rom/BobbyIsGoingHome.a26 Platform=Bit Corporation Sort=Bobby Is Going Home Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Boxing] File=/rom/Boxing.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Boxing Year=1980 Genre=atvi Description=Put your gloves on! You're about to mix it up in the most pulse-pounding fight of your life! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Select game with game select switch: \ Game 1: You against the computer (he's in black). \ Game 2: You against another player. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Each player can control their own difficulty. Difficulty switch "A" is for Expert. Difficulty switch "B" is for Novice. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick to control the direction of the boxer. Push the red button to punch. Hold down for combination punching. When you get near enough to your opponent to throw a punch, press the red button. Each punch moves your opponent slightly back and away from the punch. If you move him to the ropes, he can't easily duck the next punch, and you can set up a real scoring barrage. But don't get caught on the ropes yourself! Watch your distance. If you move in too close, the opponent can get tough; but if you're too far away, you can't land scoring punches. [Bridge] File=/rom/Bridge.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Bridge Year=1980 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Buck Rogers: Planet of Zoom] File=/rom/BuckRogers.a26 Platform=SEGA Sort=Buck Rogers Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Bugs] File=/rom/Bugs.a26 Platform=DataAge Sort=Bugs Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Bumper Bash] File=/rom/BumperBash.a26 Platform=Spectravideo Sort=Bumper Bash Year=1983 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Cakewalk] File=/rom/Cakewalk.a26 Platform=CommaVid Sort=Cakewalk Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [California Games] File=/rom/CaliforniaGames.a26 Platform=Epyx Sort=California Games Year=1988 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Carnival] File=/rom/Carnival.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Carnival Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Casino] File=/rom/Casino.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Casino Year=1979 Genre=paddle Description=Casino consists of Blackjack 1 or 2 players, Blackjack 1-4, Stud Poker, and Poker Solitaire Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4.\ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot paddle for the second player in two player games. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ They do different things depending on the game selected. Consult instructions. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Cat Trax] File=/rom/CatTrax.a26 Platform=UA Limited Sort=Cat Trax Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Chase It!] File=/rom/ChaseIt.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Chase it Year=2010 Genre=Action Description=It's blue against black as you chase the red squares that appear randomly on the screen. Try to reach the squares before your opponent. First to 99 squares wins! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 20. Games 1 - 9 are two player games. Games 10 - 15 are one player games. Games 16 - 20 are two player games where the black square moves slower than the blue square. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. Capture 99 squares before your opponent. [Chuck Wagon: Chase the Chuck Wagon] File=/rom/ChasetheChuckwagon.a26 Platform=Spectravideo Sort=Chuck Wagon Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Checkers] File=/rom/Checkers.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Checkers Year=1980 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Chuck Norris: Superkicks] File=/rom/ChuckNorrisSuperkicks.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Chuck Norris Superkicks Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Coconuts] File=/rom/Coconuts.a26 Platform=Telesys Sort=Coconuts Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Commando] File=/rom/Commando.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Commando 1 Year=1988 Genre=atvi Description=Your assignment? Simple. Annihilate the enemy. Diminish their manpower. Destroy their vehicles. And detonate their mega-fortress. Sounds tough? Well, just wait. It gets worse. Because you have to carry out the entire mission SINGLE-HANDED! Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Commando Raid] File=/rom/CommandoRaid.a26 Platform=US Games Sort=Commando 2 Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Communist Mutants from Space] File=/rom/CommunistMutants.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=Communist Mutants from Space Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Congo Bongo] File=/rom/CongoBongo.a26 Platform=SEGA Sort=Congo Bongo Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Cosmic Ark] File=/rom/CosmicArk.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Cosmic Ark Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description=The Cosmic Ark races to save creatures from doomed planets in that solar system. Meteor showers bombard the Ark, threatening its Atlantean crew and planetary defense systems make this mission of mercy doubly treacherous! Time and energy slip away - work fast or these defenceless little beasties will disappear for all time. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose one of the six Cosmic Ark games. \ 1-Player Games \ Game 1: Regular Cosmic Ark Mission \ Game 2: Meteor Shower \ Game 4: Advanced Cosmic Ark Mission \ Game 5: Advanced Meteor Shower \ \ 2-Player Games \ In 2-player games, one player battles meteor showers while the other controls the shuttleship. \ Game 3: Regular Ark Mission \ Game 6: Advanced Ark Mission \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The Right Difficulty Lever controls joystick options: \ Position A: Right joystick battles meteor shower. Left joystick controls shuttleship. \ Position B: Left joystick: shuttleship. Right joystick: meteor shower. \ \ The Left Difficulty Lever controls the width of the Ark: \ Position A: The Cosmic Ark is wider, and so, more difficult to defend. \ Position B: The Cosmic Ark is narrower and more \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Pilot the Cosmic Ark through dangerous territory. Destroy meteors that come too close. You score each time you eliminate a meteor. If you survive the meteor shower, launch a shuttleship to the surface of each planet. Try to capture 2 skittish beasties in your tractor beam in order to gain fuel and points. Be quick about it! Return to the Ark before it undergoes another meteor barrage. But be careful - automatic planetary defense systems attempt to disable the shuttleship, releasing your precious cargo before you can safely transport them to the Ark. Reach as many planets as your fuel reserves allow. Game ends when you've exhausted your store of fuel. [Crash Dive] File=/rom/CrashDive.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Crash Dive Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Crazy Climber] File=/rom/CrazyClimber.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Crazy Climber Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Win at CRAZY CLIMBER by climbing to the tops of four skyscrapers, while avoiding enemies and objects that can knock you off the side of the building. You can climb up, right, or left, but not down on the rows of windows. The faster and farther you climb, the more points you score. \ But watch out! If a window closes on your hands, or if a falling object hits you while climbing, you'll fall back to the street below. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Instructions\ You'll start the game with five climbers; each time one falls, another appears at the spot where the last climber fell. The last three climbers are shown at the top center of your screen. \ Each skyscraper is progressively more difficult to climb. Windows open and close faster, more obstacles are placed in your path, and your enemies are more unrelenting in their attacks. \ You'll need sharp eyes and quick reflexes to make it past all the obstacles placed in your path. The obstacles you'll encounter are: \ Windows: These are an ever-present danger to you. You can climb past a window if it is even slightly open, but if it closes shut on both your hands, you'll fall. If a window closes on only one of your hands, \ you're safe - but only if you stay still. If you try to climb up or sideways, you'll lose your grip and fall. \ Mad Doctor: An arch fiend with a weird sense of humor, the Mad Doctor smiles down at you while throwing a bizarre assortment of missiles. He has three to choose from - a flowerpot, a basket of fruit, and a bucket of water. If any of these hit you while you're climbing \ from one window to another, you'll fall. If you have both hands firmly planted on a ledge, however, you'll be safe. \ Condor: This snow-white condor will divebomb you with gigantic eggs. If your arms are straight and firmly planted on a ledge, the egg will simply break and splatter into the air. If you are climbing to another window, however, it will knock you off the ledge. \ Girders: A shower of steel girders greets you as you climb some of the buildings . Nothing can stop a girder from sweeping you off the side of a building - avoid them at all costs. If a girder touches you, you'll not only fall, but you'll also lose 100 bonus points. \ Electric Sign: An electric sign sometimes appears where a building narrows down to two rows of windows. A flopping live wire hangs off the side of the sign. As you climb past, the wire will shock you. For each electric shock you receive, you lose 100 bonus points; 11 shocks and you'll fall off the building. Try to climb past the sign as fast as you can. \ Each time you reach the top of a building, a helicopter appears and will take you to a new building. Hurry! You only have 30 seconds to grab the runner of the helicopter. Your bonus points tick off while the helicopter is searching for you, so the faster you grab the runner, the more bonus points you'll keep. After you've reached the top of Building 4, you'll be transported back to Building 1. Keep climbing! You'll continue to score points until you use all your climbers. \ \ 2. SELECT button. \ CRAZY CLIMBER contains ten different game variations. Five of the variations are one-player games, the other five are two player games. \ You have the option of starting a game on one of four different buildings. Games 1-4 are for one player and start on Buildings 1-4. Game 5 is for novice where climber doesn't get hit with falling objects. \ Games 6-9 are for 2 players and start on Buildings 1-4. Game 10 is for novice like Game 5. \ \ 3. Use joystick controllers. \ You can start the game two different ways. Press the GAME RESET switch on you console, or press the red button on your left controller. The Crazy Climber theme will then play; when it's over, you'll be ready to go! \ Climbing up a building requires a two-part movement: First push the Joystick forward to move the climber's arms up; then pull the Joystick back to move the climber up to a new ledge. To climb quickly, move the Joystick back and forth, using a rocking motion. \ To move your climber sideways, push the Joystick either left or right. Your climber will scurry across the building in the same direction you move your Joystick. However, you can only move your climber sideways when his arms are straight. If your climber is in a crouched position, you must straighten his arms out before he can move right or left. \ \ 4. Difficulty switches. \ If you set your DIFFICULTY SWITCH to the A position, your climber moves slowly and will have a hard time grasping ledges. If you set your difficulty switch to the B position, your climber moves faster. The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch affects the climber controlled by the left Joystick; the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch affects the climber controlled by the right Joystick. \ \ 5. Hints. \ Climb as fast as possible to score maximum bonus points.\ Climb past closing windows quickly. Rmember that you can safely climb past any window as longs as it doesn't close completely on your hands. Don't wait for a window to close - clmb past it. \ Foil the Mad Doctor by clibing between two rows of windows. His missiles will whiz harmlessly past your head. \ Try to predict where the helicopter will dip down to pick you up. Then move to the best place - fast! [Crossbow] File=/rom/Crossbow.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Crossbow Year=1987 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Crypts of Chaos] File=/rom/CryptsChaos.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Crypts of Chaos Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Dark Cavern] File=/rom/DarkCavern.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Dark Cavern Year=1982 Genre=console Description=It's a battle for survival in an underground cavern! You have five men. They enter the cavern one at a time through the center trap door. Once inside, blobs, spiders and robots begin to enter the left and right doors. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Only the LEFT DIFFICULTY swtich is used. "A" position: four two-headed robots and when a robot is destroyed, a new one take its place faster. "B" position: one-headed robots. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to avoid the blobs, spiders and robots... and destroy as many of them as you can!!! Your man is trapped in the cavern, there's nowhere to hide. Escape the creatures' bites and keep away from robot fire. Shoot to destroy. Start with 5 men and 20 bullets. Get more as you play. When you run out of bullets, a new gun will flash within the maze for you to retrieve. Spiders and Blobs will stun you motionless momentarily. Lose your man when he runs into a robot or gets hit by robot fire. [Dark Chambers] File=/rom/DarkChambers.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dark Chambers Year=1988 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Deadly Duck] File=/rom/DeadlyDuck.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Deadly Duck Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Defender] File=/rom/Defender.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Defender 0 Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=As Commander of Universal Space Ship Defender, you have been assigned by Earth Security to rid Planet Earth of the Aliens and rescue Humanoids from the Landers. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT switch until the number appears in the game window at the bottom. The number on the left is the game number; the number on the right indicates the number of players. Games 1-10 are one player, Games 11-20 are 2 players. Games 10 & 20 are Children's versions. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The position of your DIFFICULTY switch determines Defender's vertical speed: \ Set to "B": Defender rises and descends rapidly. \ Set to "A": Defender rises and descends slowly, making it harder to chase Aliens and rescue Humanoids. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Defender moves in the direction you move the Joystick Controller. You begin a game with three Defender lives and three smart bombs. The number of lives remaining in a game is displayed at the bottom left of the television screen, and the number of smart bombs remaining is shown at the bottom right. \ \ To deploy missiles, point Defender at the target and press the red controller button. To detonate a smart bomb to destroy all enemy craft on the screen, move Defender down behind the city and press the red button. To enter Hyperspace, push the Joystick Controller fully forward (away from you) and hold it in that position until Defender has moved to the top of the television screen and disappeared behind the Scanner. Then press the red controller button on your Joystick. As Defender warps through time and space, Aliens disappear. When Defender reappears, the Aliens also reappear. \ \ The Scanner is similar to a radar screen. Every "blip" on it reflects an object in the game. The four small stationary blips at the bottom of the Scanner are Humanoids. To save a Humanoid from being abducted, you can either destroy the Lander cand let the Humanoid free-fall safely to earth, or destroy the Lander, catch the Humanoid, and carry him back to earth. [Defender Vector] File=/rom/DefenderVector.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Defender 2 Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=As Commander of Universal Space Ship Defender, you have been assigned by Earth Security to rid Planet Earth of the Aliens and rescue Humanoids from the Landers. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT switch until the number appears in the game window at the bottom. The number on the left is the game number; the number on the right indicates the number of players. Games 1-10 are one player, Games 11-20 are 2 players. Games 10 & 20 are Children's versions. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The position of your DIFFICULTY switch determines Defender's vertical speed: \ Set to "B": Defender rises and descends rapidly. \ Set to "A": Defender rises and descends slowly, making it harder to chase Aliens and rescue Humanoids. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Defender moves in the direction you move the Joystick Controller. You begin a game with three Defender lives and three smart bombs. The number of lives remaining in a game is displayed at the bottom left of the television screen, and the number of smart bombs remaining is shown at the bottom right. \ \ To deploy missiles, point Defender at the target and press the red controller button. To detonate a smart bomb to destroy all enemy craft on the screen, move Defender down behind the city and press the red button. To enter Hyperspace, push the Joystick Controller fully forward (away from you) and hold it in that position until Defender has moved to the top of the television screen and disappeared behind the Scanner. Then press the red controller button on your Joystick. As Defender warps through time and space, Aliens disappear. When Defender reappears, the Aliens also reappear. \ \ The Scanner is similar to a radar screen. Every "blip" on it reflects an object in the game. The four small stationary blips at the bottom of the Scanner are Humanoids. To save a Humanoid from being abducted, you can either destroy the Lander cand let the Humanoid free-fall safely to earth, or destroy the Lander, catch the Humanoid, and carry him back to earth. [Defender II] File=/rom/Defender2.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Defender 3 Year=1984 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Demon Attack] File=/rom/DemonAttack.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Demon Attack 1 Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description=Destroy demons and accumulate points before you and your LASER CANNON meet with oblivion. Keep RESERVE BUNKERS intact and increase their number by avoiding your foes' fire. When the last bunker disintegrates, the next enemy hit will pulverize you! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Select game with game select switch: \ 1-PLAYER GAMES 1,3,5 AND 7 pit you against progressively more difficult waves of alien adversaries. Pick up the pace: the higher the game number, the greater the challenge! GAMES 3 AND 7 feature special TRACER SHOTS. Your Laser Cannon powers fire all over the screen. \ 2-PLAYER GAMES 2,4,6 AND 8 match your wits against more than waves of winged warriors! \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ RIGHT and LEFT DIFFICULTY switches determine how aggresively the demons attack: \ "A" - Aggressive Action \ "B" - Basic Bombardment \ \ 1 PLAYER: set only LEFT DIFFICULTY LEVER \ 2 PLAYERS: set both LEFT AND RIGHT DIFFICULTY LEVERS \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your LASER CANNON has unlimited firing power. Dodge left or right to avoid enemy fire while pursuing aliens. Accumulate RESERVE BUNKERS (bottom left of screen). You begin with 3 bunkes. Each attack wave you survive completely unscathed earns you an additional bunker, to a maximum of 6. Every hit you absorb destroys an additional bunker. When all bunkers disappear, another alien barrage will vaporize you. [Demon Attack (Fast Shot)] File=/rom/DemonAttackFS.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Demon Attack 2 Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description=Destroy demons and accumulate points before you and your LASER CANNON meet with oblivion. Keep RESERVE BUNKERS intact and increase their number by avoiding your foes' fire. When the last bunker disintegrates, the next enemy hit will pulverize you! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Select game with game select switch: \ 1-PLAYER GAMES 1,3,5 AND 7 pit you against progressively more difficult waves of alien adversaries. Pick up the pace: the higher the game number, the greater the challenge! GAMES 3 AND 7 feature special TRACER SHOTS. Your Laser Cannon powers fire all over the screen. \ 2-PLAYER GAMES 2,4,6 AND 8 match your wits against more than waves of winged warriors! \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ RIGHT and LEFT DIFFICULTY switches determine how aggresively the demons attack: \ "A" - Aggressive Action \ "B" - Basic Bombardment \ \ 1 PLAYER: set only LEFT DIFFICULTY LEVER \ 2 PLAYERS: set both LEFT AND RIGHT DIFFICULTY LEVERS \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your LASER CANNON has unlimited firing power. Dodge left or right to avoid enemy fire while pursuing aliens. Accumulate RESERVE BUNKERS (bottom left of screen). You begin with 3 bunkes. Each attack wave you survive completely unscathed earns you an additional bunker, to a maximum of 6. Every hit you absorb destroys an additional bunker. When all bunkers disappear, another alien barrage will vaporize you. [Dig Dug] File=/rom/DigDug.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dig Dug 0 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=You are Dig Dug, the underground miner. With your jet-powered shovel, yocreate intricate, subterranean mazes. Ever on the watch for vegetable prizes, you must also look out for the fierce Fygar(tm) and mean Pooka(tm) that lurk underground. Their touch kills| Worse, these two meanies can transform into spooky ghosts that will appear out of nowhere and haunt you to death. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Use the SELECT switch to choose a NORMAL or EASY game variation. The EASY game variation is indicated by a teddy bear head in the center of the title screen. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You can move Dig Dug up, down, right, or left on the screen. Just move your Joystick in the diretion you want him to go. \ Press the red fire button to start the game. To restart the game at the same round you last played, press the fire button while the DIG DUG title screen is displayed. You will have approximately ten seconds after losing your last Dig Dug life to do this. \ During game play, press the red fire button once or twice to stun the meanies. Then hold the button down or use a multiple pumping action to pump up meanies until they explode. [Dig Dug: 35th Anniversary] File=/rom/DigDug35.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dig Dug 1 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=You are Dig Dug, the underground miner. With your jet-powered shovel, yocreate intricate, subterranean mazes. Ever on the watch for vegetable prizes, you must also look out for the fierce Fygar(tm) and mean Pooka(tm) that lurk underground. Their touch kills| Worse, these two meanies can transform into spooky ghosts that will appear out of nowhere and haunt you to death. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Use the SELECT switch to choose a NORMAL or EASY game variation. The EASY game variation is indicated by a teddy bear head in the center of the title screen. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You can move Dig Dug up, down, right, or left on the screen. Just move your Joystick in the diretion you want him to go. \ Press the red fire button to start the game. To restart the game at the same round you last played, press the fire button while the DIG DUG title screen is displayed. You will have approximately ten seconds after losing your last Dig Dug life to do this. \ During game play, press the red fire button once or twice to stun the meanies. Then hold the button down or use a multiple pumping action to pump up meanies until they explode. [Dolphin] File=/rom/Dolphin.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Dolphin Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Listen! An endangered dolphin is calling you! Only by learning the dolphin's sonic language can you guide her through schools of seahorses, battling a monstrous squid, to gain magic powers from and elusive seagull. Hurry! Lend an ear... Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Use the SELECT switch to choose a game variation. Games 1, 3, 5, and 7 are for one player. Games 2, 4, 6, and 8 are for two players. Level of difficulty rises accordingly, with games 1 and 2 being the easiest. At higher levels, the squid will be smarter and quicker. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set both difficulty switches to "B" to begin. With the switches in this position, your dolphin will have 4 seconds to touch the squid after intercepting a seagull. In position "A", she'll have only 2 seconds to do so. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Guide your dolphin through openings in the seahorse schools by listening to sonic tones and catching waves. Pay attention to the following: \ \ The Seagull: Periodically, a seagull will fly overhead. You'll know he's coming when the squid changes color. Have your dolphin leap up, touch the seagull and then quickly turn and chase the squid. This is the best way to gain points. \ \ The Slip: Outsmart the squid is by giving him "the slip". If the squid is right on your tail, wait until he catches a good wave. Then, reverse your dolphin's direction and swim under him immediately. \ \ Points are earned in a variety of ways. Every time your dolphin touches a seagull, or a squid, you score points. The number of points depends on the color of the squid. Scoring peaks at 800 per seagull and 8000 per squid. Also, you'll score 100 points each time your dolphin catches a good wave or each time you run the squid into a bad wave. And, when your dolphin swims through the seahorses, you'll score 0 to 50 points, depending on your degree of accuracy in getting her through the opening. [Donkey Kong] File=/rom/DonkeyKong.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Donkey Kong 0 Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=Donkey Kong the ape has kidnapped Mario's girlfriend! Move Mario through incredible dangers to save her. Your speed and skill will determine your score. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function. Start the game by pressing the red button on the Joystick. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick to control the Mario up the ladders and ramps toward Donkey Kong to save his girlfriend. Mario can't climb on broken ladders. Press the red button to have Mario jump over rolling barrels and menacing fireballs. Jump up and grab a hammer to destroy an oncoming barrel or fireball to score extra points. Hammers disappear after a few seconds. The Score/Bonus indicator counts down throughout each level. If it reaches zero before Mario gets to the top, he is elminiated! [Donkey Kong Junior] File=/rom/DKJr.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Donkey Kong 2 Year=1987 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Double Dragon] File=/rom/DoubleDragon.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Double Dragon 1 Year=1989 Genre=atvi Description=The Black Warriors have kidnapped your best girl. That was their first mistake. Challenging you and your twin brother in martial arts combat will be their second. But these thugs don't play by the rules. Knives, whips, bats, boulders, and dynamite are standard issue with these masters of pain. And their uzi-toting boss doesn't believe in happy endings. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Game 1 - One player against the Black Warriors. \ Game 2 - Two players against the Black Warriors. \ Game 3 - Player against player in a one-on-one battle \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ Punch: Move the joystick to the right or left (depending on which direction you're facing) and press the button. \ Elbow Punch: Move the joystick diagonally up and to the RIGHT and press the button to throw a LEFT elbow punch, and diagonally up and to the LEFT and press the button to throw a RIGHT elbow punch. You'll throw the elbow punch in the opposite direction from the one you're facing. \ Kick: Move the joystick diagonally down and to the right or left, depending on which way you want to kick and press the button. \ Jump Kick: Move the joystick up and press the button. You'll leap forward and kick in the direction you're facing. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Twin brothers Billy and Jimmy Lee learned to fight the hard way for survival in the unforgiving city streets. Their brand of combat - classic martial arts manoeuvres mixed with anything-goes street brawling - has turned them into walking lethal weapons. \ Now, the Lees must summon all their fighting abilities and cunning into meeting the greatest challenge of their lives - rescuing Billy's girlfriend, Marion. \ She's been kidnapped by the Black Warriors the savage street gang lead by the mysterious Shadow Boss. The twins pursue the Black Warriors through the city streets and it's outskirts. \ Finally they fight their way into the Secret Enemy Base. There, Billy and Jimmy meet the Shadow Boss. It's a battle to the finish, with Marion as the prize. [Dragonfire] File=/rom/Dragonfire.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Dragonfire Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description=Help the Prince get as many treasures as possible, before he's hit by fireballs or Dragonfire seven times! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose 1 or 2 player game and game variation (1-4 easy to hard). Press START to begin the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Each level of Dragonfire consists of two stages. The first stage is a side view of the character trying to cross a drawbridge to reach a castle. To traverse the bridge, the player must duck under high fireballs and jump over low fireballs (or perform the improbable-looking kneeling jump). \ Upon success, the second stage begins, which has a more top-down point of view and wherein the player must guide the character around the room collecting treasure and dodging more fireballs spewed by a dragon that patrols the bottom of the screen. Every piece of treasure in the room must be collected in order for a door to appear, which takes the player to the next level. \ A single hit from a fireball in either stage will deplete one of the player's seven initial lives. Gameplay in each level is identical, except that the character and fireballs get progressively faster. \ \ ON THE BRIDGE OUTSIDE THE CASTLE \ To JUMP: press the red "FIRE" button. \ To DUCK: pull the joystick toward you. \ Use joystick to move left or right. \ \ INSIDE THE CASTLE ROOMS \ Use the joystick to move in all directions. \ \ The dragon is the monster at the bottom of the screen. The hiding place (entrance) is at the bottom right corner of the screen. The exit location (when room is cleared) is at the upper left corner of the screen. \ \ The game is over when the Prince has been hit seven times by fireballs on the bridge or by Dragonfire in the treasure room. [The Earth Dies Screaming] File=/rom/EarthDiesScreaming.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Earth Dies Screaming Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Eggomania] File=/rom/Eggomania.a26 Platform=USGames Sort=Eggomania Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Encounter at L-5] File=/rom/EncounteratL5.a26 Platform=DataAge Sort=Encounter at L5 Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Escape It!] File=/rom/EscapeIt.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Escape it Year=2011 Genre=Action Description=Escape from an ever changing maze! In a one player game, compete against the clock to exit through the escape hatch as quickly as possible. In a two player game, be the first to make it to the escape hatch to win. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. Players start at the lower left corner of the screen and must make their way to the upper right corner of the screen to where the escape hatch is. [Espial] File=/rom/Espial.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=Espial Year=1984 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Extra Terrestrial] File=/rom/ExtraTerrestrial.a26 Platform=Skill Screen Games Sort=Extra Terrestrial Year=1984 Genre=console Description=Extra Terrestrials have landed on our planet! The player who uses the Left Controller wil control the first alien who is looking for his friend, \ who cannot be seen to the naked eye. You may choose from up to four different aliens by pressing Select button to choode from the following, then press Reset to start game. Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial] File=/rom/ET.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=E T 1 Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=We came here to conduct a simple study of primitive planets, and look what happened! These...things...came and scared away my friends. Before I knew it, all my friends boarded our lightship and flew home. The only one I can trust is that nice little alien, Ellleeott. He gives me those tasty energy pills (Reese's Pieces) But these other aliens! Every time I get ready to assemble my transgalactic communicatior, they come and take me away. I just want to go home! I hope Elllleeott and I can assemble all the pieces of my communicator before my energy runs out. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT switch to select a game variation. Press START to begin game. \ Game 1 - All humans present in game. \ Game 2 - Elliott and FBI agent present, no scientist. \ Game 3 - Only Elliott present in game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch controls the speed of the humans. In the "A" position, the humans move faster than in the B position. The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch determines the landing conditions for the rescue ship. If the switch is in position "A", Elliott cannot be present on the landing field when the rescue ship arrives. If the switch is in the "B" position, Elliott can be present when E.T. calls the ship and when it lands. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your mission is to help E.T. find the three pieces of his interplanetary telephone, call his ship, and guide him to the landing pad in time to be rescued. Do this before E.T.'s energy runs out, and you'll win the round and score points! E.T. transverses six sites on Planet Earth. Four of these are full of pitfalls - they are dotted with deep wells into which E.T. can fall. A fifth site shows Elliott's house, the Institute of Science, and the FBI building. \ Here, E.T. is taken by the scientist to be studied. The sixth site is a forest setting where E.T. first lands and where the ship will land to pick him up. \ \ A round ends when E.T. boards the spaceship. At the end of each round, all your bonus points are displayed. If you want to play another round, simply press the controller button. E.T.'s telephone pieces and the Candy will be redistributed for him to find again. You can play as many rounds as you like, since your bonus points will accumulate. \ \ On each site E.T. moves through various power zones. While in a power zone, E.T. can execute only one of his extraordinary powers. For example, if E.T. is ready to call his spaceship, he must be in a "call ship" zone. As E.T. stands in a power zone, the symbol for that zone appears at the top center of the screen. At the beginning of each new round, the power zones are redistributed on each site. \ \ Pressing the red FIRE button allows E.T. to use his speical powers when in a power zone (like call ship, call Elliot, or teleport to another site.) He also can elivatate out of a pit when pressing the FIRE button - his head will elivate when using a power. Additionally, E.T. also has "super speed" when moving the joystick in the desired direction, while simultaneously holding down the FIRE button. Energy point are expelled at a greater rate when using any of E.T.'s special powers. \ \ A game ends when E.T. runs out of energy or when you decide to quit playing. [Fantastic Voyage] File=/rom/FantasticVoyage.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Fantastic Voyage Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Fast Eddie] File=/rom/FastEddie.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Fast Eddie Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Fast Food] File=/rom/FastFood.a26 Platform=Telesys Sort=Fast Food Year=1982 Genre=console Description=Burgers, fries, shakes, pizzas... Flying by at sub-gastronomical speeds. You and Mr. Mouth have to catch 'em if you can. The higher the calorie count, the better your score. The more calories you consume the faster the food flies. But beware the purple pickles! Catch too many and your binge is over. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 Player \ GAME 2: 2 Player \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Push the red button and your feast begins! Use the joystick controller to move Mr. Mouth up and down, forward and back. When Mr. Mouth comes in contact with any food item on the screen he eats it. It's your job to keep him away from the purple pickles (Green ones are fine). \ \ You and Mr. Mouth will need a breather once in a while. The food stops coming and you get fatter. When you're done chewing push the red button. The barrage begins again and FAST FOOD gets faster. Eat anything you can catch, but don't get purple pickles. They'll hang around at the top of the screen, giving you a bad case of heartburn. \ \ Collect six purple pickles and you'll have to (burp!) call it quits. The game's over. [Fathom] File=/rom/Fathom.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Fathom Year=1983 Genre=Imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Fighter Pilot] File=/rom/FighterPilot.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Fighter Pilot Year=1988 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Fire Fighter] File=/rom/FireFighter.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Fire Fighter Year=1982 Genre=Imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Fireball] File=/rom/Fireball.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=Fireball Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Flash Gordon] File=/rom/FlashGordon.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Flash Gordon Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Frankenstein's Monster] File=/rom/FrankensteinsMonster.a26 Platform=DataAge Sort=Frankenstein's Monster Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Frogger] File=/rom/Frogger2600.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Frogger 2 Year=1982 Genre=console Description=Hop as many frogs to safety as you can - and to score the most points along the way! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button for game variation. Press the START switch to begin. \ GAME 1: 1 Player - EASY \ GAME 2: 2 Player - EASY \ GAME 3: 1 Player - MORE DIFFICULT \ GAME 4: 2 Player - MORE DIFFICULT \ GAME 5: 1 Player - "SPEEDY" FROGGER \ GAME 6: 2 Player - "SPEEDY" FORGGER \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Position "A": You'll lose Frogger if he's carried off-screen on a floating object. \ Position "B": Frogger can be carried safely off-screen on a floating object. He'll then reappear on the other side of the screen so you can continue play. However, Frogger can't hop off-screen. \ \ In a one-player game, use the left DIFFICULTY switch. In a two-player game, the 1st player uses the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch and the 2nd player uses the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Try to get Frogger through the lanes of traffic without being hit by a vehicle. Once at the riverbank, hop onto logs, turtles, and the backs of alligators to reach an open home bay. Try to catch lady frogs and flies, and avoid everything else, including snakes and falling into the water or crashing into the side of the screen. \ \ You have only 30 seconds to move Frogger from the sidewalk and into a home bay, one of the blue, open-ended squares squares at the top of the screen. [Frogger II: Threeedeep!] File=/rom/Frogger2.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Frogger 4 Year=1984 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Frog Pond] File=/rom/FrogPond.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Frog Pond Year=1982 Genre=Action Description=Leap and catch as many insects as you can with your hungry frog's tongue. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4. Games 1 and 3 are for one player, while games 2 and 4 are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Press the controller button to make your frog jump and shoot out its tongue. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ When placed in the A position, your frog's tongue is shorter than in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ If your tongue hits an insect, you score points. Flies are worth the least points (1), while dragonflies are worth the most (32). \ If you miss too many insects, the sun sets and the game ends. [Frogs and Flies] File=/rom/FrogsAndFlies.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Frogs and Flies Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to make frogs catch flies. Points are won by manipulating a frog so that he jumps off a lily pad and scoops up flying insects with a flashing tongue. Jump him too late and you'll miss. Jump him too far and he'll land in the pond. Catch more flies than an opponent, or beat your own top score! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. Press RESET to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Push DIFFICULTY SWITCH to position B for the EASY GAME... \ Moving the joystick will cause the frog to jump in a fixed arc every time from one lily pad to the other. Frog will not fall in the water in the EASY game. \ In the easy game frog's tongue can be automatic. As soon as frog gets close enough tongue will flash out by itself and catch the fly. (However, you can ALSO make the tongue flash with the RED BUTTON.) \ \ Push DIFFICULTY SWITCH to position A for HARDER GAME... \ Joystick will control how frog jumps - high or low, left or right. No fixed arc. \ Red button must be pushed to make the frog's tongue flash. Just getting close to the fly won't do it. You must use the red button. \ \ Both players DO NOT have to play at the same difficulty level. Adults can give little kids a break by selecting the HARDER level. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the red button on either joystick to begin. As the action starts, different color frogs sit on side-by-side lily pads. Use the joystick to make your frog jump up and catch flies by touching them with his flashing tongue. Two points for each catch! Scores in contrasting colors at the top of your screen. As the game continues, Day will gradually turn into NIGHT. Game time lasts about three minutes. At the finish, frogs leap off the screen and a title "THE END" will crawl across the sky. [Fun with Numbers] File=/rom/FunWithNumbers.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Fun with Numbers Year=1977 Genre=Education Description=Complete the equation by selecting the correct number. Pick between addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 - 4 let you select the top number you want to work with, while games 5 - 8 are random problems to solve. Games 1 and 5 are Addition, games 2 and 6 are Subtraction, games 3 and 7 are Multiplication, and games 4 and 8 are Division. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move the joystick up to cycle through numbers from 0-9. Push it back to make the numbers appear in decreasing order from 9-0. Move the joystick to the right and left to move the Answer Line to the right or left. \ Press the controller button after you have selected answers to the math problem and after you choose problem numbers. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Use the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch to determine if each round will be timed. In the A position, the player has a time limit. In the B position, there is no time limit. \ Use the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to determine the time limit for each round. The A position provides half the time limit that the B position does. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Musical tunes announce whether your answer is right or wrong. \ Correct answers receive a beep, then a melodic tune. The Computer Teacher automatically presents the next problem. \ Wrong answers also receive a beep and a melodic tune, but the wrong answer disappears as the right answer flashes on the Blackboard Screen. The Computer Teacher automatically presents the next problem. \ The game is completed after 10 problems. At the conclusion of the last problem, the total number of problems, 10, and the number of correct answers, flashes on the Blackboard Screen. \ Some division problems will have a Remainder. To show the Remainder, move the Answer Line two digits to the right of the Quotient. Select the Remainder number with the joystick. Now, record your entire answer by pressing the controller button. [Galaxian] File=/rom/Galaxian.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Galaxian 1 Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Welcome aboard the missile laser base. These laser bases are used to protect our Universe from alien attack. Each laser base carries missiles which you'll launch from your control panel. You'll be battling an age-old threat, the Galaxian fleet, which has thrived on war and terrorism for centuries. Destroy these warmongers to maintain peace and tranquility over the Universe. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1 thru 9: Slow/Easy to Fast/Difficult \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use your Joystick to slide your laser base right and left across the bottom of the screen. Press the red fire button to launch laser missiles at the Galaxian fleet. \ \ Destroy the Galaxian fleet before they blast your laser base to stardust. The fleet lines up in ranking order before plunging down to bombard your laser base. If a Galaxian survives a bombing run, he returns to his original position. \ You begin the game with three laser bases, and score points for each Galaxian destroyed with your laser missiles. You earn extra points for destroying a Galaxian in flight, and at 7000 points, you receive a bonus laser base. The Galaxian fleet attacks in waves. Each time you manage to destroy an entire wave, another fiercer wave is launched. [Gauntlet] File=/rom/Gauntlet.a26 Platform=Answer Sort=Gauntlet 1 Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Ghostbusters] File=/rom/Ghostbusters.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Ghostbusters 1 Year=1985 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Ghostbusters II] File=/rom/Ghostbusters2.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Ghostbusters 2 Year=1992 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Gorf] File=/rom/Gorf.a26 Platform=CBS Electronics Sort=Gorf 1 Year=1981 Genre=console Description=The object of GORF is to accumulate points by destroying the various types of enemy spacecraft you will encounter as you attempt to complete a variety of space missions. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You begin each game with a fleet of five Fighters. Only one Fighter may fire upon the enemy at a time. The number at the bottom of your screen below the score indicates how many of your Fighters are left. Use your Joystick Controller to maneuver your Fighter back and forth along the screen. To fire the laser, press down on the red firing button. You have an unlimited supply of ammunition. \ Note: Firing a shot causes a previously discharged bullet to disintegrate if it hasn't yet made contact. \ \ MISSION 1 - ASTRO BATTLES: Before taking off into space, you must first defend the Earth from the horde of advancing Gorfs and Droids. \ MISSION 2 - LASER ATTACK: This orbital zone is the Gorfian Empire's first line of defense against your counterattack. You must destroy the anti-particle Laser Ship while avoiding its deadly beam. The Laser Ship is protected by three Kamikaze Invaders and a Flying Gorf. \ MISSION 3 - SPACE WARP: You are getting closer to the enemy Flag Ship! Sensing your presence, it generates an eerie space web which releases Gorfian Attackers firing subquark torpedoes. Attackers are released one at a time and fly in a spiral pattern. \ MISSION 4 - FLAG SHIP: To destroy the Gorfian Ship and earn the right to work toward your next promotion, you must score a direct hit in the Flag Ship's internal power reactor vent. In order to get a clear shot at this difficult target, you must also avoid the heat-seeking tracking missiles being launched in your direction. \ \ END OF THE GAME: The game ends when all of your Interstellar Space Fighters have been destroyed by the robot warriors of the Gorfian Empire. There are nine levels of mission sequences, each one more difficult than the last. [Grand Prix] File=/rom/GrandPrix.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Grand Prix Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=You're about to enter the race of your life. Nothing stands between you and victory except the clock, the road and the other drivers out to beat you to the finish line. So take a little time with these instructions, and you may emerge as the Grand Prix world record holder! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: Watkins Glen \ GAME 2: Brands Hatch (1 Bridge) \ GAME 3: Le Mans (2 Bridges) \ Game 4: Monaco (3 Bridges) \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Object of the game is to complete a race circut in the shortest possible time. \ \ The red button on your Joystick is your accelerator. Press it down to accelerate your racer. Shifting is automatic. The longer you keep the buttton depressed, the faster your racer will go until it reaches top speed. \ Releasing the red button on your Joystick will slow down your racer. \ To apply the brakes, move your Joystick to the left. \ Pushing your Joystick moves your racer toward the top of the track' pulling it back moves it towards the bottom. \ \ SPECIAL FEATURES: \ OILSLICKS: Just a little extra test of your reflexes. They won't slow you down, but they may send you sliding off into another car. \ CRASHES: They will happen, but should be avoided if at all possible. Crashes with other cars reduce you to a speed slower than that of the car you hit. To really cut your speed and avoid a crash, release the red button while moving your Joystick to the left to apply your brakes. \ STEERING: As in a real racing car, your steering becomes more responsive the faster you go; expept your car to react faster when you push the Joystick at high speeds. Your speed is slightly reduced every time you steer; to achieve the fastest time, keep steering adjustments to a minimum. \ BRIDGES: On the Brands hatch, Le Mans and Monacco courses, after each mile of the race, you'll cross a bridge over blue water. As your car enters the bridge, your elapsed time to the bridge is displayed and help. Normal time display is resumed as your race car leaves the bridge. If you scrape the side of the bridge, you'll hear it, and your car will slow down. If you crash into a bridge, your car will stop altogether, and you'll have to steer around to cross it, while the clock continues to run. [Gremlins] File=/rom/Gremlins.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Gremlins Year=1984 Genre=atari Description= Help! It's Raining Mogwai and Gremlins! Note= \ Player Mode:Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press GAME SELECT to choose a one- or two-player game and levels One through Eight. At higher levels Mogwai come at you faster and Gremlins double and triple. \ To view a demonstration of the game, press GAME SELECT until it says DEMO. \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ MOGWAI PHASE \ It's after midnight; if Mogwai eat now, terrible consequences follow! Billy must prevent the Mogwai from reaching the hamburgers at the bottom of the screen by catching them. When the Mogwai reach the food, they eat it and turn into pupas. \ If eight Mogwai turn into pupas, the Mogwai Phase ends and players automatically start the Gremlin Phase. Alternatively, after four waves of eight Mogwai, you receive 200 bonus points for each hamburger that is not eaten. Then the Gremlin Phase starts. \ \ GREMLIN PHASE \ Too Late! Eight pupas have formed. The Gremlins are coming! In the Gremlin Phase the incubating pupas hatch into Gremlins and attack. As they charge down the screen toward Billy, he must shoot up at them to stop them. \ If a Gremlin arrives at the bottom of the screen, it knocks Billy off, and the player loses a life and returns to the Mogwai Phase. In higher levels of Phase Two, the Gremlins travel through water, which causes them to multiply! When Billy shoots all the Gremlins in a wave, he advances to the next level of the Mogwai Phase. \ \ FLASHCUBES \ Use your flashcubes when things get too grim! You get two flashcubes each Gremlin Phase. They appear as white squares in the lower left corner of the screen. When you activate a flashcube (by pulling back on your joystick), any Gremlins at the bottom of the screen run away and Gremlins coming down the screen stop for a few seconds. [Guardian] File=/rom/Guardian.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Guardian Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [G.I. Joe: Cobra Strike] File=/rom/GIJoe.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=GI Joe Year=1983 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Halloween] File=/rom/Halloween.a26 Platform=Wizard Video Games Sort=Halloween Year=1983 Genre=console Description=A homicidal maniac has escaped from a mental institution. On Halloween night, the killer returns to his home town to wreak havoc! You are babysitting for a family in a large, two story house. Somehow the vengeful \ murderer has gotten inside! Can you protect the children and yourself from the fury of his knife? Note= \ Player Mode:Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button has no function in the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ OBJECT OF THE GAME \ Try to lead as many children as possible to the protection of the "safe rooms" before you lose your three lives. \ \ HOW TO PLAY THE HALLOWEEN VIDEO GAME: \ You control the babysitter character, and, at certain times, the child characters. As you move through the sixteen rooms of the two story house, avoid the killer when he appears. \ He will attempt to stab you and the children, so look for the knife with which to defend yourself. At the top of the screen are jack-o-lanterns indicating how many of your three lives remain. \ At the bottom of your screen is the score. \ \ SAVING THE CHILDREN:\ Using your joystick, move the babysitter through the house, dodging the killer as you search for the terrified children. When you spot a fleeing child, position the babysitter directly over the child and press the joystick button. \ This will "lock in" the child, and he will thereafter follow the babysitter as you race for one of the four safe rooms. \ \ SAFE ROOMS: \ Safe rooms are located at either end of the house, two on each floor. After you have successfully delivered a child to a safe room, press the joystick button. The child will be released, and the appropriate points will be added to your score. \ The child will disappear after points are added and the babysitter leaves the safe room. \ \ THE KNIFE: \ Somewhere in the house is a knife, which the babysitter may use to stab the killer. To pick up the knife, position the babysitter over the knife and press the joystick button. If you are armed when the killer attacks, press the joystick button to thrust the knife. \ CAUTION: Your thrust will be successful only if the killer's knife is in the "up" position. The killer will flee the room if stabbed. The knife will vanish from the babysitter's hand and reappear in another room of the house. \ NOTE: The babysitter may not "lock in" a child while she is carrying the knife! She must first attempt to stab the killer. \ \ DOORWAYS: \ 1. In the safe rooms at either end of the house, stairways lead to the upper or lower floors. \ 2. Two other rooms on each level contain hallways. Entering one of these hallways will skip the babysitter two rooms to the other hall door on the same level. \ \ BLACKOUTS: \ Beware of electrical blackouts on the upper level, for the house is old and the wiring is faulty. At any moment, you may find yourself plunged into darkness with the killer in pursuit! [Ice Hockey] File=/rom/IceHockey.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Ice Hockey Year=1981 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Ikari Warriors] File=/rom/IkariWarriors.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Ikari Warriors Year=1987 Genre=atari Description=You are a member of those elite combat specialists, the Ikari Warriors. Your buddy and you are on a special mission behind enemy lines, and you've been sleeping, eating, and breathing jungle combat for the last two weeks. \ Your tired, but that never affect your razor-sharp judgement and your will to survive. \ Your main weapons are machine guns, grenades, and your own cunning in the face of danger. Sometimes you'll have a tank at your disposal, which comes in handy when enemy fire is particularly brutal. \ You move swiftly through the jungle, wading through rivers and resting from time to time with the ruins of bombed-out buildings. You're tunning out of ammunition and grenades but you know the battle can't last forever. \ Sooner or later, one side is going to emerge victorious. Let's just hope it's yours! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [International Soccer] File=/rom/IntlSoccer.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=International Soccer Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to score more goals than your opponent in two simulated 45-minute periods. A goal is scored by kicking the ball into your opponent's net. Each player has a 4-man team. You control one man on your team, the Computer controls the other 3 and moves them to simulate a full 11-man team. You see 1/3 of the soccer field at any given time during game play. Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ There are 2 teams - YELLOW and BLUE. For the first half, Yellow defends the TOP goal, Blue defends the bottom goal. Teams switch ends for the second half. \ A KICK-OFF begins each half of the game and starts play after a goal is scored. Yellow team kicks off the first half. Blue team kicks off the Second half. Team scored AGAINST klcks off after a goal. \ To kick off, move the man in the kick-off circle. Until this happens, player on defense has no control over his team. Once the man in the kick-off circle is moved, both teams may try for possession of the ball. \ To get possession, move your man so he touches the ball. \ \ WHEN YOU HAVE THE BALL, move it toward your opponent's goal by dribbling or passing. Shoot into the net. \ When a goal is scored, the CLOCK STOPS and the ball returns to the kick-off circle. Teams take up kick-off positions CLOCK STARTS again at kick-off. \ WHEN PLAYING DEFENSE, try to steal or intercept he ball. Your man can outrun the ball carrier. If your opponent gets close to your goal, move your controlled man to protect it. Computer controlled men might not stop the ball. \ \ Use the LEFT joystlck controller for the YELLOW team. Use the RIGHT Joystick controller for the BLUE team. \ You control ONE man on your team. When you have the ball your controlled man is the ball carrier. When playing defense, your controlled man does not change. \ All members of a team are the same color but the controlled man has a different shape when not moving, so you can tell hlm apart. \ TO MOVE YOUR CONTROLLED MAN, push the joystick in any of 8 directions. If your man has the ball, moving him will DRIBBLE THE BALL. (Remember that dribbling slows your man down.) \ TO PASS OR KICK THE BALL, press the RED BUTTON. The ball travel in the last direction in which the Joystick as pushed. [James Bond 007] File=/rom/JamesBond.a26 Platform=Parker Bros Sort=James Bond 007 Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Jawbreaker] File=/rom/Jawbreaker.a26 Platform=TigerVision Sort=Jawbreaker Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Journey: Escape] File=/rom/JourneyEscape.a26 Platform=DataAge Sort=Journey Escape Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Joust] File=/rom/Joust.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Joust 0 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=KNIGHTS ON BIRDBACK! How on earth did you fall into this bizarre world? Look around you - the sky is filled with knights astride enormous armored buzzards. These characters look mean, and the buzzards they ride don't look very friendly either. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 Player - Skilled \ GAME 2: 1 Player - Easy \ GAME 3: 2 Player - Skilled \ GAME 4: 2 Player - Easy \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The objective of JOUST is to defend yourself and score points by unseating opponents in a joust. The winner of a joust is the rider whose mount is highest at the moment of contact. If the mounts are of equal height, the joust is a draw. \ Your opponents are the Buzzard Riders. There are three types, each more dangerous than the last: the Bounders (wearing red), the Hunters (wearing gray), and the Shadow Lords (wearing blue). \ When you unseat a Buzzard Rider in a joust, he and his mount turn into an egg and float ominously around the jousting arena. If you grab the egg, it will disappear and you'll score bonus points. If you don't grab the egg it will eventually hatch into an even more dangerous opponent. \ When you lose a joust, you'll materialize again on the bottom ledge - if you have any lives remaining. Until you fully materialize, you're protected from attack. Once your bird is moved, however, you become fair game for a joust. \ \ Fire pits are positioned on both sides of the lower ledge. After the second wave of game play the pits are uncovered, and any jouster who ventures too close may fall into the deadly lava. \ At certain times during the game, another menace - the pterodactyl - appears. The pterodactyl will try to eat you, but if you hit it directly on its beak you'll destroy it and earn bonus points. \ \ When all Buzzard Riders have been unseated, a new wave of game play begins. The wave number is shown between rounds at the bottom of the screen. In some waves you can earn bonus points. These waves are: \ Survival Wave (one-player) or Team Wave (two-player) - In the one-player version, you are awarded 3000 points if your player stays alive through the entire wave. In the two-player version, both players are awarded 3000 points if neither player unseats the other. \ Gladiator Wave (two-player) -- The first player to unseat the other player is awarded 3000 points. \ Egg Wave - All the Buzzard Riders begin this wave as eggs. Collect the eggs quickly before they hatch. \ Pterodactyl Wave -- The pterodactyl appears immediately on the screen in this wave. \ \ The upcoming wave is shown by a letter that appears at the lower right side of the screen: (S) Survival/Team Wave,(G) Gladiator Wave,(E) Egg Wave,and (P) Pterodactyl Wave. \ Each player's current score and number of lives left is shown at the bottom of the screen. You start the game with five lives and earn an additional life with every 20,000 points earned. [Joust Neo] File=/rom/JoustNeo.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Joust 1 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=KNIGHTS ON BIRDBACK! How on earth did you fall into this bizarre world? Look around you - the sky is filled with knights astride enormous armored buzzards. These characters look mean, and the buzzards they ride don't look very friendly either. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 Player - Skilled \ GAME 2: 1 Player - Easy \ GAME 3: 2 Player - Skilled \ GAME 4: 2 Player - Easy \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The objective of JOUST is to defend yourself and score points by unseating opponents in a joust. The winner of a joust is the rider whose mount is highest at the moment of contact. If the mounts are of equal height, the joust is a draw. \ Your opponents are the Buzzard Riders. There are three types, each more dangerous than the last: the Bounders (wearing red), the Hunters (wearing gray), and the Shadow Lords (wearing blue). \ When you unseat a Buzzard Rider in a joust, he and his mount turn into an egg and float ominously around the jousting arena. If you grab the egg, it will disappear and you'll score bonus points. If you don't grab the egg it will eventually hatch into an even more dangerous opponent. \ When you lose a joust, you'll materialize again on the bottom ledge - if you have any lives remaining. Until you fully materialize, you're protected from attack. Once your bird is moved, however, you become fair game for a joust. \ \ Fire pits are positioned on both sides of the lower ledge. After the second wave of game play the pits are uncovered, and any jouster who ventures too close may fall into the deadly lava. \ At certain times during the game, another menace - the pterodactyl - appears. The pterodactyl will try to eat you, but if you hit it directly on its beak you'll destroy it and earn bonus points. \ \ When all Buzzard Riders have been unseated, a new wave of game play begins. The wave number is shown between rounds at the bottom of the screen. In some waves you can earn bonus points. These waves are: \ Survival Wave (one-player) or Team Wave (two-player) - In the one-player version, you are awarded 3000 points if your player stays alive through the entire wave. In the two-player version, both players are awarded 3000 points if neither player unseats the other. \ Gladiator Wave (two-player) -- The first player to unseat the other player is awarded 3000 points. \ Egg Wave - All the Buzzard Riders begin this wave as eggs. Collect the eggs quickly before they hatch. \ Pterodactyl Wave -- The pterodactyl appears immediately on the screen in this wave. \ \ The upcoming wave is shown by a letter that appears at the lower right side of the screen: (S) Survival/Team Wave,(G) Gladiator Wave,(E) Egg Wave,and (P) Pterodactyl Wave. \ Each player's current score and number of lives left is shown at the bottom of the screen. You start the game with five lives and earn an additional life with every 20,000 points earned. [Joust Vector] File=/rom/JoustVector.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Joust 3 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=KNIGHTS ON BIRDBACK! How on earth did you fall into this bizarre world? Look around you - the sky is filled with knights astride enormous armored buzzards. These characters look mean, and the buzzards they ride don't look very friendly either. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 Player - Skilled \ GAME 2: 1 Player - Easy \ GAME 3: 2 Player - Skilled \ GAME 4: 2 Player - Easy \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The objective of JOUST is to defend yourself and score points by unseating opponents in a joust. The winner of a joust is the rider whose mount is highest at the moment of contact. If the mounts are of equal height, the joust is a draw. \ Your opponents are the Buzzard Riders. There are three types, each more dangerous than the last: the Bounders (wearing red), the Hunters (wearing gray), and the Shadow Lords (wearing blue). \ When you unseat a Buzzard Rider in a joust, he and his mount turn into an egg and float ominously around the jousting arena. If you grab the egg, it will disappear and you'll score bonus points. If you don't grab the egg it will eventually hatch into an even more dangerous opponent. \ When you lose a joust, you'll materialize again on the bottom ledge - if you have any lives remaining. Until you fully materialize, you're protected from attack. Once your bird is moved, however, you become fair game for a joust. \ \ Fire pits are positioned on both sides of the lower ledge. After the second wave of game play the pits are uncovered, and any jouster who ventures too close may fall into the deadly lava. \ At certain times during the game, another menace - the pterodactyl - appears. The pterodactyl will try to eat you, but if you hit it directly on its beak you'll destroy it and earn bonus points. \ \ When all Buzzard Riders have been unseated, a new wave of game play begins. The wave number is shown between rounds at the bottom of the screen. In some waves you can earn bonus points. These waves are: \ Survival Wave (one-player) or Team Wave (two-player) - In the one-player version, you are awarded 3000 points if your player stays alive through the entire wave. In the two-player version, both players are awarded 3000 points if neither player unseats the other. \ Gladiator Wave (two-player) -- The first player to unseat the other player is awarded 3000 points. \ Egg Wave - All the Buzzard Riders begin this wave as eggs. Collect the eggs quickly before they hatch. \ Pterodactyl Wave -- The pterodactyl appears immediately on the screen in this wave. \ \ The upcoming wave is shown by a letter that appears at the lower right side of the screen: (S) Survival/Team Wave,(G) Gladiator Wave,(E) Egg Wave,and (P) Pterodactyl Wave. \ Each player's current score and number of lives left is shown at the bottom of the screen. You start the game with five lives and earn an additional life with every 20,000 points earned. [Jr. Pac-Man] File=/rom/JrPacMan.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Jr Pac-Man Year=1984 Genre=atari Description=Kidding Around with Junior! I may be young, but I'm no baby! I'm a star just like my folks, Pac-Man and Ms. Pac-Man. And I've got twice their energy! Come play with me! We'll race around giant playgrounds. We'll chase down magic candy and run from ghostly bullies who'll tickle me to death if they catch me. My playgrounds are full of challenging mazes with corners and alleys to hide in. I run faster than a speeding roller skate, ducking behind barriers, dodging those mean bullies. I can even race from one side of a playground to the other. That's a lot of ground to cover! But I've got to play a lot harder than my folks to live up to the Pac-Man family name. That's why this is a whole new game! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to choose one of four skill levels: one teddy bear; two teddy bears; three teddy bears; or toy candy. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ On the playground maze, Jr. Pac-Man runs like mad, eating every dot in sight while trying to avoid up to four ghost bullies -- Inky, Blinky, Pinky, and Tim. You start the game with three turns, and lose a turn every time a bully catches Junior. \ \ Have Junior eat a power pill when the ghost bullies start closing in. Suddenly, he's stronger than the bullies -- they're running from him! Be aggressive and get them! \ \ Watch for a toy-shaped candy that tromps across the playground. It turns every dot it touches into a bigger dot worth more points. But have Junior eat it before it goes too far -- it can destroy the power pills! [Kangaroo] File=/rom/Kangaroo.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Kangaroo Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=The object of the game is to score as many points as you can while helping Mother Kangaroo rescue her precious baby. Use your joystick controller to guide Mother Kangaroo. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to choose the game variation you want to play. Press START to start a game. You can also press the red "FIRE" button to start or restart a new game upon completion of the previous game. \ GAME VARIATIONS: \ GAME 1 One Baby Kangaroo - One-Player Novice \ GAME 2 One Baby Kangaroo and One Monkey - One-Player Advanced \ GAME 3 Two Baby Kangaroos - Two-Player Novice \ GAME 4 Two Baby Kangaroos and Two Monkeys - Two-Player Advanced \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ During this rescue mission, Mother Kangaroo encounters many obstacles. Push your joystick up to help her climb ladders, hop over logs, and jump over apples; pull the joystick down to help her duck under apples. Help her pick bonus fruit and ring the bell at the top of the screen by making her hop up to touch the fruit and bell. Push the joystick diagonally right and left to help Mother Kangaroo take Super Leaps across broken logs. Press the red fire button to make Mother Kangaroo throw punches at monkeys and apples. \ \ Hop - Move the joystick right or left to make Mother Kangaroo hop right or left. \ Jump - Push the Joystick up away from you to make Mother Kangaroo jump. \ Duck - Pull the joystick down toward to you to make Mother Kangaroo duck. \ Super Leap - Push the Joystick up diagonally to the right to Super Leap right; push it up diagonally to the left to Super Leap left. Continue to hold the joystick in the diagonal position for a higher leap. \ Punch - Press the red fire button and Mother Kangaroo throws a punch. \ \ GAME PLAY \ Screen 1 - This is the easiest screen. To capture her baby, Mother Kangaroo must hop along tree branches and climb up ladders while avoiding monkeys and apples. \ Screen 2 - This is the most difficult screen because Mother Kangaroo must take Super Leaps across several broken logs to reach her baby. \ Screen 3 - The third screen is similar to both screen one and screen two. Mother Kangaroo encounters more logs and branches and ladders for an increased challenge during her rescue mission. \ \ To score points, Mother Kangaroo picks fruit, punches monkeys and apples, and rescues Baby Kangaroo. \ Mother Kangaroo earns extra points for picking even more fruit. She can ring the bell (up to three times in one screen) to replenish the fruit. Then she can climb up and down the screen to pick all the fruit. [King Kong] File=/rom/KingKong.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=King Kong Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Klax] File=/rom/Klax.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Klax Year=1990 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Kool-Aid Man] File=/rom/KoolAidMan.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Kool Aid Man Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Help Kool-Aid Man in a battle with the Thirsties! Those insatiable Thirsties are stealing the water out of your swimming pool. You want to catch tem when they stop to dip their straws in the pool. Also, help Kool-Aid Man gobble up Kool-Aid ingredients in order to keep the Thirsties from bouncing Kool-Aid Man around the backyard. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Krull] File=/rom/Krull.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Krull Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Your mission is to find and enter the Beast's Black Fortress, rescue Princess Lyssa, and destroy the Beast. The task is not an easy one, for the location of the Black Fortress changes with each sunrise on Krull. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Background: And the Beast sailed his Black Fortress through the darkness of space, past a thousand planets, until he landed on the planet of Krull. \ And from the depths of the Fortress came an army of inhuman soldiers - called Slayers, who ravaged the planet in the name of their hideous master. And Krull was plunged into darkness. \ But the Prophecy foretold the arrival of the Beast, and predicted one slim ray of hope for the people of Krull: "...Then shall a girl of ancient name become queen, and the king she chooses shall rule the planet. \ And their son shall rule the galaxy." \ The future queen of whom the Prophecy spoke is Princess Lyssa, and the young king she choose is Prince Colwyn. Together they can destroy the Beast and save Krull. \ But will they be able to make an alliance and save the planet? \ A hasty marriage ceremony was arranged for Lyssa and Colwyn. The Beast was alerted by his spies, however, and the ceremony interrupted at the last minute by Slayers, who stormed the castle walls and carried Lyssa off to the Black Fortress. \ The future of Krull lies in Colwyn's ability to find his bride, and in their ability together to conquer the Beast. The road to the Black Fortress is a dangerous one - the Slayers, the Beast, and a deadly Crystal Spider all lie in wait. \ You are Colwyn's only guide through the journey ahead; you'll need both strength and wisdom to destroy the Beast. But remember - the Prophecy is on your side. Good luck and safe journey! \ \ 2. Instructions. \ You begin the game with the marriage of Colwyn and Lyssa, travel through the Iron Desert to the Widow's Cavern, and end of the game in the Black Fortress. \ Colwyn's Marriage to Lyssa: Slayers interrupt the marriage of Colwyn and Lyssa by storming over the castle walls. To protect Lyssa, you must use your sword to eliminate Slayers. The faster the Slayers march, the mire points \ you'll earn by stabbing them. But watch out for their neon spears - one touch means death! \ The Iron Desert - Riding the Fire Mares: in the Iron Desert you must pick up Glaives to fight the Beast, as well as extra lives. You'll cross the Iron Desert on the back of a Fire Mare. To pick up Glaives and extra lives, press \ your red controller button as the object passes beneath your lead Mare. When your lead Mare is directly over the object to be picked up, the object will flash momentarily. \ Widow of the Web: Jump over strands of the Widow's web to reach the cocoon, located at the top of your screen. The strands of the web are sticky; you can't jump if you are touching one of the strands. Most of all, watch out for the Crystal Spider - its bite is deadly. \ You have a limited amount of time to reach the cocoon; the hourglass at the top right of the screen counts down the time. If it runs out before you reach the cocoon, the spider will rush toward you and will take one of your lives. \ When you reach the cocoon a flashing white light indicates the correct passageway to the Black Fortress. This passageway leads to the Black Fortress but only until the next sunrise. You must reach the Black Fortress before \ the sun rises, or you will have to return to the web to find its new location. \ If you travel down a pathway and the Black Fortress doesn't appear, your Fire Mares will automatically turn around and take you back to the Widow of the Web. Each time this happens, however, you'll lose an extra life, or if no lives remain, you'll lose a Glaive. \ The Black Fortress: Lyssa is locked away in a prison behind the pacing Beast. Throw your Glaive to break away chucks of the prison. To activate the Glaive, \ press the fire button; to throw the Glaive, simply release the button. Make sure to catch the Glaive when it rebounds from Lyssa's prison. You can steer the Glaive with your joystick during its flight towards the prison, but the Glaive will rebound straight down after it hits the prison wall. \ You can lose Glaives two ways; when your Glaive hits the Beast, or when you fail to catch a Glaive after it rebounds from the prison wall. If you have no \ Glaives left, you can leave the Black Fortress through exits at the lower right and left of your screen. You may not leave the Black Fortress while you have any Glaives remaining. \ When you've broken a hole into Lyssa's prison that is large enough to admit a Glaive into the prison. Lyssa will travel down to Colwyn, giving him a fireball with which to kill the Beast. Throw the fireball directly at the Beast and he will be destroyed. \ \ 3. Use joystick controller. \ Use your joystick to move Colwyn around the screen - he moves up, down, right, left and diagonally in the direction you move the joystick. Use the red fire button to stab Slayers, to pick up extra lives and Glaives, to jump \ over strands of web, and to throw Glaives and fireballs inside the Black Fortress. \ \ 4. Select Button. \ There are four game variations: Regular, Beginner, Intermediate, and Advanced. They coorespond to Games 1-4. \ \ 5. Hints. \ Start playing on Game level 2 - the Beginner version - to become familiar with game play. Then move on to harder levels. \ Make sure you have at least one Glaive before entering the Black Fortress, since you'll need a weapon to rescue Princess Lyssa and fight the Beast. \ If you think you may not have enough time to reach the Black Fortress before sunrise, simply wait on the Widow's Cocoon until the next sunrise. Then go down the new path to the Black Fortress. \ Try to reach the Widow's Cocoon from the upper left side of the web. Maneuver yourself to the web center - the movement of the web will pull you up to the cocoon. [Kung-Fu Master] File=/rom/KungFuMaster.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Kung-Fu Master Year=1987 Genre=atvi Description=The lovely Princess Victoria is being held captive in the Evil Wizard's temple. As the Kung-Fu Master, you're the only one powerful enough to rescue her. \ You must traverse through five different levels - and each one is crawling with a tireless army of enemies. Using your superb martial arts skills, you'll have to oust henchmen, knife- throwers, dragons, and a slew of other not-very-nice types. \ Once you succeed in rescuing Princess Victoria, you'll be sent back down to the first floor for more kicking and punching and jumping. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button for game variation (1 or 2 player). Press START to begin the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ As an experienced Kung-Fu master, you have total control of your every move, every punch, every kick: \ To move right or left, move the joystick right or left. \ To jump, push the joystick forward. \ To squat, pull the joystick back. \ To kick high, move the joystick to the right or left and press the button. \ To kick low, pull the joystick back and press the button. \ To punch high, push the joystick diagonally forward to the right or left and press the button. \ To punch low, pull the joystick diagonally back to the right or left and press the button. \ To break a Henchman's hold, jiggle the joystick rapidly from side to side. \ \ Some of your enemies demonstrate their power in numbers. Others sport some nasty weapons. While still others- like the snakes-are completely indestructible: \ * Henchmen - They’re not that much of a threat for a Kung-Fu Master like you. One punch or kick should do it. Problem is, there's so many of them. And they come at you from both sides. Plus, they'll try to hold on to you and drain your energy. \ * Knife-throwers - Duck or jump to avoid the knives. And use two punches or kicks to knock these guys out of the game. \ * Midgets - These tumbling attackers approach you from either side. Sometimes it's best to get them with a low punch or kick. \ * Dragon balls - Inside each of these innocent-looking falling balls is a fire-breathing dragon, just waiting to singe your ghi off. Destroy the ball before it hits the ground using a single kick. Or duke it out with the dragon with punches or kicks. \ * Snake baskets - Like the dragons, these vile creatures fall from the sky disguised. Only these guys are hidden in baskets. Smash the baskets before they hit the ground or stay away from the scurrying snakes inside. Best to jump over them if you have to. \ * Killer moths - They'll fly around annoyingly, trying to sting you. Sting them first will a well-placed punch or kick. \ * The Five Biggies - At the end of each level there's one guy who's bigger and badder than all the others. He can't exactly kill you with one blow, but each of his hits will put a big dent in your energy level. So, if your energy is already low when you meet him, you could be in big trouble. \ \ Here's who's who on each level: \ Level 1 - The Fist Fighter \ Level 2 - The Boomerang Thrower \ Level 3 - The Giant Kicker \ Level 4 - The Lightning Magician \ Level 5 - The Gang Master [Laser Blast] File=/rom/LaserBlast.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Laser Blast Year=1981 Genre=atvi Description=As the intrepid Commander or a fleet of intergalatic spacecraft, you're engaged in a vicious battle with dreaded enemy forces! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, push your Joystick up. \ GAME 1: Cadet Level \ GAME 2: Lieutenant Level \ Game 3: Captain Level \ Game 4: Commander Level \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switch has no effect on this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your Joystick is used to pilot your spacecraft. You can only pilot one ship at a time. Pull the Joystick toward you to lower your ship and push it away to raise your ship. Move your Joystick left or right to move your ship left or right. When your Joystick is in the center, your ship will hover, spinning in a fixed position (not recommended!). \ The red button on your Joystick is used to fire the ship's laser blaster. Press this button to project the blaster from the bottom of your ship; release the button to fire. The laser blaser can be aimed by holding the button down and moving the Joystick left or right. But remember, the blaster will not fire until the button is released. \ \ Your score is kept in the upper left hand corner of the screen. You are awarded points for each attacker you destroy. As you progress through the game, attackers are worth more points, but they're also tougher to destroy. \ For each 1,000 points you gain, you're given a reinforcement ship. You can receive an unlimited number of reinforcements during the game. But, you can only have six reinforcement ships on the screen at one time No matter how many points you score, you must have less than six reinforcement ships before the computer will add to your fleet. [Laser Gates] File=/rom/LaserGates.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Laser Gates Year=1983 Genre=Imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Lunar Lander] File=/rom/LunarLander.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Lunar Lander Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Lunar Lander provides the thrills and realistic "feel" of controlled space flight! Players are challenged to control thrust and rotation of a lunar landing craft to counteract simulated gravitational pull, momentum and friction. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. Press the START (Reset) switch to begin. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY Swtiches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Various video-display phrases indicate score, time elapsed during the mission, fuel units consumed, altitude above the moon, and horizontal and vertical speed. The fuel consumption and both speed readings are important for the player to determine how to land the craft. \ Realistic engine rumble and crash sounds accompany game play. Careful not to use up your fuel, or you'll crash! A high beep warns of an almost- depleted fuel supply. Depending on the quality of the landing or the crash, various messages are displayed on the screen. \ \ Press the Joystick left or right to tilt the ship left or right respectively. Pushing forward on the Joystick ignites your engines. Hitting the fire button will cause your landing to abort if your spacecraft is hopelessly out of position or in danger of crashing. \ \ A crash awards 5 points, a "hard" landing 15. A "good" landing awards 50 points, plus 50 Fuel Units of game time! [Marauder] File=/rom/Marauder.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=Marauder Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Marine Wars] File=/rom/Marinewars.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Marine Wars Year=2010 Genre=Action Description=Suddenly the sea changed the color, and the sky burst up…a world war is spreading out over the seas! Take aim at the enemy’s battleships and fighters! Shoot your torpedos and sink the enemy ships. Try not to get hit by theirs. The ships move rapidly back and forth, and the ones in the distance are worth more points. When a refueling ship passes below, you can get fuel and repairs. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between a one or two player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. Press the controller button to fire. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ A world war is spreading out over the seas! Take aim at the enemy's battleships and fighters!! \ \ This game consists of four consecutive scenes: a battle between battleships by day; a battle between battleships by night; a battle between fighters and battleships by day; and a battle between fighters and battleships by night. Each scene leads into the next as the previous scene clears. \ \ Each scene is counted as one pattern, and the pattern number of the game is displayed alternately with the score at the top right of the screen. \ \ In the nighttime battle between battleships you cannot see the top row of enemy ships, but when a shell hits a ship and explodes, the screen will light up for four seconds and the ships will appear. \ \ The joystick is used to move your battleship to the left and right, and to fire shells at the enemy ships and planes. [Mario Bros.] File=/rom/MarioBros.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Mario Bros 1 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Mario the carpenter and his brother Luigi are hopping mad! The water pipes in their house are blocked with nests of crawling creatures. If the two brothers can't get rid of them they'll never take a bath again! Note= \ Player Mode:Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Game 1 - 1 player, Firballs, 5 lives \ Game 2 - 2 players, fireballs, 5 lives \ Game 3 - 1 player, no fireballs, 5 lives \ Game 4 - 2 players, no fireballs, 5 lives \ Game 5 - 1 player, fireballs, 3 lives \ Game 6 - 2 players, fireballs, 3 lives \ Game 7 - 1 player, no fireballs, 3 lives \ Game 8 - 2 players, no fireballs, 3 lives \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your task is to help Mario and Luigi knock the pipe pests off floors and into a puddle of water below. Each time a pest is knocked off, you earn points; when all the pests are knocked off, the next round begins. \ You start the game with five lives, and earn additional lives every 20,000 points. \ To jump from floor to floor, press the controller button while Mario or Luigi is running to the right or left. To jump straight up, press the button when Mario or Luigi is standing still. \ \ THE PESTS \ \ Knocking off a pest is a two-part maneuver: First punch the floor directly beneath a pest to flip it onto its back, then jump up to the floor and kick the pest off before it recovers. The pipe dwelling pests are: \ \ Shellcreepers: To eliminate a shellcreeper, hit it once from below, then kick it off the floor before it starts crawling again. \ \ Sidesteppers: Sidesteppers are harder to knock off. The first time you hit one, it becomes enrages and moves faster than before. Hit it again, and it will flip over \ \ Fighterflies: Fighterflies hop from one section of the floor to another; the only time you can flip one over is when its body is touching the floor. \ \ BONUS WAFERS AND COIN PHASE \ \ Earn 800 extra points for every bonus wafer you pick up. A wafer comes out of a water pipe each time a pest is kicked of a floor. \ \ At certain times during the game the pests disappear and a coin phase begins. During a coin phase the screen is filled with dangling coins; you are given 15 seconds to collect as many coins as possible. \ A timer at the bottom of the screen counts down the seconds. \ \ THE POW SWITCH \ \ The POW switch is located on your screen between the two lowest floors (see Figure 1, yeah right, there are no pictures here, so look at your computer screen. \ You see that thick block hanging in mid air near the bottom of the screen? The one you can not jump on. That's it. Now we are in business). \ If Mario or Luigi hits the POW switch, it delivers a punch to all the pests on the screen. You many use the POW switch three times before it disappears, and then receive a new POW switch every ten rounds. \ \ SLIPICE \ \ In higher levels of game play you'll encounter Slipice, an evil iceman who can freeze floors into slippery ice. Prevent him from freezing floors by punching him from below. \ You may also kick Slipice when he's melting into the floor. \ \ FIREBALLS \ \ During the game you'll encounter blazing-hot fireballs that can fry Mario or Luigi to a crisp. Avoid fireballs by jumping over them, or jumping to another level. \ \ TWO-PLAYER GAME \ \ In two-player games one player controls Mario while the other player controls Luigi. This opens up new worlds of game-playing strategy. \ For example, you can play as a team with one player punching the pipe-pests and the other player kicking pests off floors. Or you can compete with each other to see who can achieve the best score. \ Watch out for sneak attacks--your opponent may punch a pest back onto its feet just before you're about to kick it off a floor! [Masters of the Universe: The Power of He-Man] File=/rom/MOTU.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Masters of the Universe Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Guide HE-MAN through the dangers of ETERNIA, It's 28 long and torturous miles from the workshop of MAN-AT-ARMS' to CASTLE GRAYSKULL. The EVIL WARRIORS' are waiting for you along the way with ENERGY BOLTS and WARP TRAKKERS. \ If you make it to CASTLE GRAYSKULL, SKELETOR himself is ready to stop you with ROLLING WALLS and LASER BLASTS. Defeat them all BY THE POWER OF GRAYSKULL. Note= \ Player Mode:Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button has no function in the game. \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The A position starts the game at level 1 (for beginners). The B position starts the game at level 3. (Level 2 can be reached only by completing level 1 .)\ \ The right difficulty switch freezes the action. In position A, the game plays normally. In position B, the action freezes. Start the game in position A.\ \ 4. Instructions. \ The TV TYPE switch determines whether the ION CANNON will be single or rapid fire. For single fire, select B&W. For rapid fire, select COLOR. \ To start the game, turn the power on. The title screen shows PRINCE ADAM magically transforming into HE-MAN. The game begins with HE-MAN in his WIND RAIDER. To start the game sooner, press the fire button. To restart the game at the end of a game, press RESET. The game starts as soon as you move the WIND RAIDER. \ The object of the game is to score as many points as possible while guiding HE-MAN in battle against his evil foes. During the first half of the game, HE-MAN is at the controls of his trusty WIND RAIDER. \ He must fly the 30 miles from the workshop of MAN-AT-ARMS to CASTLE GRAYSKULL. Nearly every mile of this terrain could end the quest of HE-MAN. EVIL WARRIORS hurl deadly WARP TRAKKERS and ENERGY BOLTS at HE-MAN as he flies overhead. \ He defends himself with the ION CANNON, MUTRON BOMBS, and fearless flying maneuvers. With enough skill and luck, you can fly HE-MAN to CASTLE GRAYSKULL, but that's only half the battle. \ \ Once you land the WIND RAIDER on CASTLE GRAYSKULL, you are magically projected inside a dungeon room to battle SKELETOR. The room has two moving walls. Each wall has three gaps. \ The walls are always in motion and the gaps are never still. HE-MAN uses the gaps to reach SKELETOR. SKELETOR Is moving and firing LASER BLASTS at HE-MAN while he tries to pass through the gaps. \ HE-MAN defends himself from the LASER BLAST with his POWER SWORD. If HE-MAN touches SKELETOR, the victory screen plays and you can move on to the next level. \ \ Use your LEFT joystick controller to control the direction of your WIND RAIDER or HE-MAN. Be sure your controller cable is securely plugged into the back of your game console. \ Hold the controller so the red FIRE BUTTON is to your UPPER LEFT. \ \ - Push joystick LEFT to move WIND RAIDER or HE-MAN LEFT. \ - Push joystick RIGHT to move WIND RAIDER or HE-MAN RIGHT. \ - Push joystick FORWARD to move WIND RAIDER or HE-MAN UP. \ - Pull joystick BACK to move WIND RAIDER or HE-MAN DOWN. [Math Gran Prix] File=/rom/MathGranPrix.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Math Gran Prix Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=An educational game for children, ages 6 through 10. By solving arithmetic problems shown on the screen, players move their cars along the Gran Prix track. \ While the game is designed to exercise and strengthen basic arithmetic skills, it also offers children an element of chance and surprise that will capture their attention and enthusiasm. \ We suggest that you read through this manual once with your children; then put them behind the wheel. MATH GRAN PRIX will keep them playing and practicing long after they've set down their books and worksheets. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to cross the finish line before the other car. For each turn, the computer gives you an arithmetic problem. When you answer the problem correctly, \ your car zooms further ahead. If your answer is wrong, the computer gives you the correct answer and your car stays where it is. Players take turns with each other or, \ in a one-player game, with the computer. At the beginning of each turn, you will be given a choice of moving 2 OR 3 SPACES. \ If this message appears in red, the red car moves; if it is blue, the blue car moves. \ You may want to bump the other car off the track. When this happens, the bumped car breaks down on the side of the road. The computer will automatically give the driver a two-space problem. The correct answer will fix the car. \ The car is not actually back in the race until the next turn. \ \ Track Markers to head your car to: \ Person with no neck: Shoots you ahead 1-4 spaces. \ Checkered Flag: Extra turn \ House: Can't get bumbed off \ Steps: If your car lands here, the computer will give you only three-space problems until your car or the other car makes it across the finish line. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Move your Joystick to left for a two-space problem; move it to the right if you want to try for three spaces. Press the red fire button when you are ready for the problem. \ Your Joystick also lets you "write" your answer on the screen. Pushing the Joystick forward lets you count up from O to 9; pulling it toward you lets you count down from 9 to 0. \ The number you choose will appear above the "cursor," or little dash, in the answer space. f your answer is 10 or more, do this: Write a 1; move the Joystick to the right to move the cursor over; \ then write a 0. Press the fire button when you have chosen your answer. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ To play MATH GRAN PRIX with a time limit, set your DIFFICULTY switch to the A position. This will give you a one-minute time limit on all addition and subtraction problems, \ and a two-minute limit on multiplication and division problems. If you do not answer a problem in time, the computer writes in the correct answer and your car stays \ where it is. \ To play the game without a time limit, set your DIFFICULTY switch to the B position. \ \ 4. Game Select. \ Games 1, 2 and 3 contain only addition and subtraction problems; Games 4, 5 and 6 contain only multiplication and division problems. \ Games 7, 8 and 9 contain all four types of arithmetic problems. Each of these three game groups has an easy, medium and hard difficulty level. \ So, in the first group, Game 1 is the easiest and Game 3 the hardest. [Mega Force] File=/rom/MegaForce.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Mega Force Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Midnight Magic] File=/rom/MidnightMagic.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Midnight Magic Year=1984 Genre=atari Description=Go full tilt! The best of both worlds: Real pinball and video game action in one faboulous game. Pull the spring and keep your eye on the screen. Then work those flippers to keep the ball dancing as long as you can! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose 1 or 2 player game. Press START or the joystick "FIRE" button to begin the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Each player's DIFFICULTY switches: \ "A" position - center posts and kickers must be activiated by hitting the target with the arrow. \ "B" position - center post and kickers are always on. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Pull the joystick handle towards you and press the joystick button to launch balls. Move the handle left to activate the left flippers; back to activate both flippers at the same time. Score points by hitting the targets and bumpers. When the score multiplier is on, all scores are multiplied by the number shown. [Miner 2049er: Starring Bounty Bob] File=/rom/Miner2049er.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=Miner 2049er 1 Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Miner 2049er: Volume 2] File=/rom/Miner2049er2.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=Miner 2049er 2 Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Miss It!] File=/rom/MissIt.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=MIss it Year=2011 Genre=Action Description=In this one player game, keep your square away from all the other objects that are bouncing around the screen. How long can you last? Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for this one player game. \ Move with the joystick. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. Avoid the squares and rectangles. [Montezuma's Revenge: featuring Panama Joe] File=/rom/MontezumasRevenge.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Montezumas Revenge Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Moon Patrol] File=/rom/MoonPatrol.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Moon Patrol 1 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=As a Moon Buggy driver, your objective is to travel across the surface of the moon as quickly as you can. While you progress on your journey, you'll encounter huge craters, exploding land mines, and moon rocks on the lunar surface. To make your journey even more challenging, your Moon Buggy comes under missile fire from alien UFOs, some of which create even more craters. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 player EASY \ GAME 2: 2 player EASY \ GAME 3: 1 player MEDIUM \ GAME 4: 2 player MEDIUM \ GAME 5: 1 player HARD \ GAME 6: 2 player HARD \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch can be used to turn off the background MOON PATROL music when placed in the "A" position. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch can be used to select either two moving speeds or three moving speeds. Set the switch to "B" for three speeds, set it to "A" for two speeds. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use your Joystick to maneuver your Moon Buggy across the lunar surface. Push the Joystick right to accelerate forward; push it left to slow down, push it up to jump. Press the red fire button to shoot missiles; your shots will go up and directly out in front of your Moon Buggy at the same time. \ \ You start the game with four Moon Buggy lives. If one is destroyed, you restart at the course segment where your Moon Buggy was destroyed. The number of Moon Buggies remaining is shown at the bottom of the screen. When all your Moon Buggy lives are lost, the game ends. To restart the game at the beginning, press the red fire button. \ \ The gauge at the lower center of the screen indicates your location on the course. It is divided into five sections, 1-5, 6-10, 11-15, 16-20, and 21-26. The gauge fills with color as you travel along the course. When you complete course 1, your Moon Buggy moves on to course 2, which continues to progress in difficulty. \ \ A timer at the bottom of the screen clocks your journey. It starts ticking away the seconds as soon as you start. When the timer reaches 999 seconds, it stops counting. but you can continue driving. \ \ You score points for shooting UFOs and for destroying or jumping over rocks, enemy cars, craters, tanks. and land mines. You can also earn bonus points for completing the course in less than the average time. [Moonsweeper] File=/rom/Moonsweeper.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Moonsweeper Year=1983 Genre=imagic Description=Your mission: to reach and rescue miners stranded on hostile moons in Star Quadrant Jupiter. Proceed with extreme caution. Deadly photon torch and space bullet showers reported. Aurora flare activity in Quadrant at lethal levels. Take evasive action, then land on as many moons as you can. \ Avoid colliding with lunar landmarks. Unidentified alien ships patrol moons and launch armed surface destroyers. Survive at all costs or the miners won't make it! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to select one of 4 skill levels and number of players (1 - Easiest through 4 - Hardest). Press the red "FIRE" button to start game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or left slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches has no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ * Pilot the USS Moonsweeper around the sun of Star Quadrant Jupiter. Avoid or destroy aurora flares, photon torches and space bullets. Land on one of the moons as it passes. \ * Rescue 6 miners from the moon. Avoid towers and shots fired from alien surface destroyers. \ * While skimming the moon's surface, shoot towers, surface destroyers, Launcher Ships and Lunar Satellites. \ * When you've picked up 6 miners, fly through Accelerator Rings to blast off into outer space. \ * Then begin another rescue mission. \ \ GAME PLAY \ To control flight direction, push joystick left or right. Moonsweeper stays on the same horizontal level. Avoid collisions with space bullets, aurora flares and photon torches by moving evasively, shooting them or using your Forcefield Shield. \ * To fire: aim Moonsweeper, then press red "FIRE" button. If you are hit, activate a reserve Moonsweeper by pushing joystick left or right. \ \ FORCEFIELD SHIELD \ * To activate Forcefield Shield: Press red "FIRE" button while pulling joystick toward you. Using the Shield costs you score points (unless your score is zero.) You cannot land while using the Shield. \ \ MOON SELECTION \ Watch for moons that orbit into the vicinity of your spacecraft. Move Moonsweeper to the moon you want to reach. The automatic pilot takes over and flies your craft down to the Rescue Altitude. \ The moon color indicates rescue difficulty: \ * Blue moons: easy, many miners \ * Green moons: less easy, fewer miners and more surface destroyers \ * Yellow moons: more difficult, scattered miners and more aggressive surface destroyers \ * Red moons: most difficult, miners are far apart, and surface destroyers attack very aggressively \ \ THE RESCUE \ JOYSTICK controls speed and direction over moon surface. Pull back to fly slower, push forward to accelerate. Move stick left or right to head in those directions. \ Pick up MINERS by flying over them. \ TOWERS appear all over the moonscape. Avoid or destroy them! \ LAUNCHER SHIPS descend close to the moon and release surface destroyers that attack Moonsweeper and capture miners. To shoot at Launcher Ships, pull back on joystick and press red button. \ SURFACE DESTROYERS are the major menace to your successful rescue mission! Once they land, surface destroyers swing back and forth across your flight path, shooting at you and capturing miners. \ SATELLITES cross the screen from time to time, and do not attack you; however, shooting them gets you big scores! To shoot a satellite, pull back on the joystick while pressing the fire button. \ \ ACCELERATOR RINGS \ When 6 miners have been rescued, Moonsweeper is full and you can blast off. Fly through Accelerator Rings to get enough speed to break away from the moon's gravity. \ Accelerator Rings are placed in a series, if you don't get up enough speed in one series, watch for the next one. The number of rings you must fly through depends on your speed; generally, 2 or 3 rings gives you the necessary momentum for blast-off. \ Rings are lined up in a straight row only on Blue moons. Fly a zig-zag course to achieve blast off speed on Green, Yellow and Red moons. \ YOU ARE AWARDED AN EXTRA MOONSWEEPER, TO A MAXIMUM OF NINE, WHEN YOUR SCORE INCREASES 10,000 POINTS. [Mountain King] File=/rom/MountainKing.a26 Platform=CBSElectronics Sort=Mountain King Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Mouse Trap] File=/rom/MouseTrap.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Mouse Trap Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ Em 1987 a Coleco faliu e a Atari comprou os direitos e logo passou a vender Mouse Trap. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Mr. Chin] File=/rom/MrChin.a26 Platform=Polyvox Sort=Mr. Chin Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Mr. Do!] File=/rom/MrDo.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Mr Do 1 Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Guide Mr. Do as he tries to harvest his orchard before the evil Badguys can catch him. Quick! Mow a path to the cherries and start picking! But watch out - here comes a Badguy! Throw your Power Ball to squelch him. But another one is on the way, so run until your Power Ball comes back. \ You're not completely defenseless, though. You can push apples on top of the Badguys to quash their pursuit. Sometimes when you're not looking, a Badguy changes into an Alphamonster. Don't let it near Mr. Do! Eliminate all five Alphamonsters to spell E-X-T-R-A and win an extra Mr. Do! Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Mr. Do!'s Castle] File=/rom/MrDosCastle.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Mr Do 2 Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Mr. Postman] File=/rom/MrPostman.a26 Platform=Bit Corporation Sort=Mr. Postman Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Ms. Pac-Man] File=/rom/MsPac-Man.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Ms Pacman 1 Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Get ready to feast your eyes on the original video beauty queen. She's ready to bring you many delightful hours of fun and excitement. So, sit back, relax and have a good time playing MS. PAC-MAN. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1 - CHERRIES: An arcade version MS. PAC-MAN. Just like the original game, MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by four ghosts. \ GAME 2 - ONE BEAR: A good choice for beginners. MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by only one ghost. \ GAME 3 - TWO BEARS: A novice player's choice. MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by only two ghosts. \ GAME 4 - THREE BEARS: An intermediate player's choice. MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by only three ghosts. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to score as many points as you can while MS. PAC-MAN eats dots, fruit, pretzels, energy pills, and ghosts. Score 10,000 points and earn a bonus MS. PAC-MAN life. \ Use your Joystick controller to guide MS. PAC-MAN around the maze. When she passes over dots, she gobbles them up, and you score points. If she eats all the dots on the screen, the maze flashes momentarily, and you start playing on a new maze. \ \ As soon as she gulps down the energy pill, the ghosts turn blue with fright. You earn 200 points for the first ghost, 400 points for the second ghost, 800 for the third ghost, and a whopping 1600 points for the fourth ghost, all on the same energy pill. \ Unfortunately, the effects of the energy pills are short-lived, so you'll have to move fast. After the ghosts are gobbled up, their eyes head back to the chamber in the center of the screen for reincarnation. If you don't gobble up the ghosts, they start to blink just before they turn back to their original colors. [Muppets: Pigs in Space starring Miss Pigs] File=/rom/PigsinSpace.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Muppets 2 Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=PIGS IN SPACE is a tripigathlon of three thrilling outer space games: Chickenvaders, Pastaroids, and Escape from Planet of the Gonzoids. As the commander of the starship Swinetrek, your mission is to score the highest points possible, and complete as many rounds as you can. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Select \ To select a game, move the joystick right or left to one of the three MUPPET faces displayed on the game choice screen. Each face represents a different game (Link Hogthrob for Chickenvaders, First Mate Piggy for Pastaroids, and Dr. Strangepork for Escape from Planet of the Gonzoids). Press the red controller button when a face flashes to start the game. \ Each time you successfully complete a round, the game choice screen appears, and you can continue playing the same game or select a new one. If you continue playing the same game, the new round will be more difficult. \ \ 2. The Games \ CHICKENVADERS \ While on a routine exploration of the Planet Cluck, Captain Link Hogthrob is suddenly attacked by a squawking squadron of space chickens! Their devastating and incredibly messy weapon: eggs. \ Fearless Captain Link counterattacks by lobbing link sausages at the chickens before they drop eggs all over his nice clean uniform. Each hit scores points and sends the hens flying into the bird dimension! Use the joystick to move Captain Link left or right, press the red button to fire a link sausage. \ Link must quickly divert all the chickens before they force him down into the muck of Planet Cluck. At the same time, he must dodge their messy eggs. If an egg hits Link, he will be transformed into a chicken - a fate worse than bacon! Either of these tragedies ends the rounds. \ Link's other challenge is to hit Gonzo, who commands the chicken invasion from his swirling saucer at the top of the screen. A direct sausage strike on Gonzo's saucer sends him flying into deep space and earns you bonus points. \ \ PASTAROIDS \ Yikes! That pighead Link has accidentally ejected Miss Piggy into a raging pastaroid storm. Now the intrepid First Mate Piggy must fight her way through a treacherous torrent of Italian food to return to the good ship Swinetrek. If the Swinetrek leaves the screen before Miss Piggy boards it, one round is lost and the ship circles back around for another try. \ Use your joystick to guide Miss Piggy through the pastaroid storm; press the red button to karate-chop meatballs for bonus points. But watch out! If Miss Piggy collides with a meatball or a strand of spaghetti, she'll be knocked back to where she started. \ \ ESCAPE FROM PLANET OF THE GONZOIDS \ The Swinetrek is trapped in an abandoned pizza mine guarded by gonzoids, weird metallic robots created by the crazed Gonzo. The gonzoids stand on ledges and toss pizzas across the mine tunnels. These tunnels and pizzas can disable the Swinetrek on contact by gumming up its hyperspace drive. \ Here's the good news. To help you get through the mine, Dr. Strangepork has invented a quasi-wonderful weapon, the Boomeray. The Boomeray is an arching ray especially designed to disintegrate the hard-to-reach gonzoids. \ Move the Swinetrek left or right and press the fire button to shoot Boomerays in the same direction. Like a boomerang, the Boomeray shoots upward then curves back down. \ But now for the bad news: When incorrectly aimed, the Boomeray can boomerang back and disable the Swinetrek, ending a round. You'll also lose a round if the Swinetrek doesn't escape the pizza mine. \ Note: Pressing the fire button to start game play automatically fires your Boomeray, so be careful not to move the Swinetrek. You might destroy it before you destroy the gonzoids. [M*A*S*H*] File=/rom/Mash.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=MASH Year=1983 Genre=console Description=You are Hawkeye Pierce, Chief Medical Surgeon of the 4077th MASH. Your responsibilities include rescuing injured men from the battlefield, performing surgery in the operating room, or, in an alternative game, picking up Colonel Potter's skydiving medics. Note= \ Player Mode:Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button has no function in the game. \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT DIFFICULTY: Position A - Left joystick player begins game with 0 points. \ Position B - Left joystick player begins game with 99 points. In position B the computer (Frank Burns) will get dumber the farther he gets ahead. \ \ RIGHT DIFFICULTY: Position A - Right joystick player begins game with 0 points. \ Position B - Right joystick player begins game with 99 points. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ There are 8 play levels (or games) in MASH. Each game consists of several "rounds." A round ends when a certain number of men have been rescued. Between each round surgery is performed in the operating room. The exception is in games 7 and 8 which are devoted totally to the surgery game. \ The games are won by the first player to reach 999 points. \ \ GAME TITLE # PLAYERS \ ----------------------------------------------------------------- \ 1 Welcome to Korea 1 \ 2 Welcome to Korea 2 \ 3 Colonel Potter 1 \ 4 Colonel Potter 2 \ 5 Cease Fire 1 \ 6 Cease Fire 2 \ 7 O.R. (Operating Room) 1 \ 8 O.R. (Operating Room) 2 \ \ Tilt the joystick forward, backward, left and right to maneuver your chopper around the screen. Use the red trigger button to start games. Once in the operating room the joystick is used to maneuver your surgical instruments around the screen. [Octopus] File=/rom/NameGame.a26 Platform=US Games Sort=Octopus Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [No Escape!] File=/rom/NoEscape.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=No Escape Year=1983 Genre=Imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Obelix] File=/rom/Obelix.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Obelix Year=1983 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Omega Race] File=/rom/OmegaRace.a26 Platform=CBS Sort=Omega Race Year=1983 Genre=console Description=We, the leaders of the Omegan Star System, have spent countless eons perfecting our method of training our warriors to defend our star colonies. This method - you may call it OMEGA RACE - has proven so successful that evildoers tremble at the mere thought of interfering with us. As a result, our lives have become rather mundane and boring. So now we search the galaxies for other forms of intelligent life fast and tough enough to meet the challenge of our OMEGA RACE. Having failed to locate such life, we're settling for you. We await you in the arena! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose 1 player or 2 player game. Press START to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or left slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the "A" position allows each player to use his/her own controller in a 2-player game. \ RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the "B" position allows 2 players to use one controller in a 2-player game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of OMEGA RACE is to evade enemy fire and score points by destroying the various types of Omegan Warrior Ships and Photon Mines you'll encounter while speeding around a mysterious cosmic arena. \ \ You begin each game with a fleet of three Fighter Ships. Only one Fighter at a time may maneuver around the arena. The number of Fighters remaining in reserve is indicated by the number of squares appearing in the lower right corner of your screen. \ \ Your laser cannon will fire only in the direction in which your Fighter is pointed. While you have an unlimited supply of ammunition, you may fire off only two shots at a time. \ \ Each wave, or rack, you'll encounter will be made up of seven Omegan Warrior Ships, each one programmed to destroy your Fighter by either blasting it to bits or ramming right into it. As each wave is cleared, a new wave will take its place, made up of faster, nastier, and craftier Omegan Warrior Ships: \ DROID SHIPS: During the first attack wave (Rack 1) these ships remain motionless, representing more of an obstacle than a threat. In later waves, however, they begin to orbit the arena at an ever-increasing rate. \ COMMAND SHIPS: Every wave contains at least one Command Ship and it is this class of ship that should be your primary target. Command Ships fire directly upon you, forcing you to use evasive maneuvers in order to survive long enough to return their fire. If a Command Ship is destroyed, one of the remaining Droid Ships will immediately take its place. \ DEATH SHIPS: The longer a Command Ship eludes your laser fire, the closer it gets to transforming into a madly-spinning Death Ship. These "ninjas of space" represent the ultimate in Omegan technology, rebounding off the walls of the arena, varying both speed and direction, firing an endless succession of laser blasts and leaving behind a deadly trail of explosive Photon Mines. Should you be skillful enough to destroy a Death Ship, it'll just be a matter of micro-seconds before another Command Ship turns into one. \ PHOTON MINES: Photon Mines left by Death Ships are a lot like mustard gas; they're very persistent. A Photon Mine will stay exactly where it is until you either blast it or crash into it. Of the two, the first way is more desirable. However, any Photon Mines left in the arena when a wave is cleared will automatically be disintegrated. \ \ TWO-PLAYER VERSIONS\ Two players may compete in OMEGA RACE, alternating turns. There are two different ways to set up your video game console for the two-player game: use the GAME SELECT switch to select Game 2 and set the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch to "B". Both players will then use the same controller, trading back and forth at the beginning of each turn. \ If you own a second controller, plug it into the RIGHT CONTROLLER jack. Select Game 2 and set the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch to "A". Each player will then be able to use his/her own controller. Either way, game play remains the same, except that the second player's score appears at the bottom of the screen instead of the top. \ \ END OF GAME: The game ends when you sacrifice your last Fighter in a race that never ends...OMEGA RACE! [Othello] File=/rom/Othello.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Othello Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=You'll need strategy, foresight and cunning to be a success at this classic board game. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. Instructions. \ The board game of Othello is a grid of 64 squares. Each player is designated by a color(white or black) and takes turns trying to capture as many squares as possible. \ When you capture a square, it becomes your square and changes to your color. Your corresponding score is displayed at the top of the screen. \ \ To capture a square, you must OUTFLANK your opponent. To do this, you must position your squares on the grid so that one or more of your opponent's squares is in a row which is bordered on each end by one of your squares. \ See example in instruction book. \ You may also outflank your opponent in more than one direction(horizontal,vertical, or diagonal) at one time. \ \ If you have no available moves to outflank and capture at least one square, the cursor changes to your opponent's color after one second and you forfeit your turn. \ If neither player can make a move the game is over. This can occur when one player has no pieces left on the board. \ It is also possible to end a game when there are blank squares on the board and both players have pieces left but there are no legal moves. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Game 1: Beginner Level. Player vs Computer. Computer is Novice. \ Game 2: Intermediate Level. Player vs Computer. Computer is Average. \ Game 3: Expert Level: Player vs Computer. Computer is Expert. \ Game 4: 2 Players Play. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ To move the cursor: Move the Joystick right, left, forward, backward, or diagonally to move the cursor in the same direction on the grid. \ When you move the cursor off one edge of the grid it will "wrap around" the playfield and come in on the opposite side. \ To position your move: Move the cursor to the desired square and press your red controller button. The square then becomes yours and changes to your color(white or black). \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Left Difficulty Switch: In the A position, this switch causes the game to go into a setup mode in which either players' Joystick can be used to position squares on the grid. \ To do this, place the curser in the desired square using the Joystick. As you press and release the red controller button, the square will alternate between white, black, and blank(green). \ Use the setup mode to work out specific problems or to work on experimental situations. The scores at the top of the screen will change as you position squares around the grid. \ The B position is for normal play. \ Right Difficulty Switch: A black player moves first; in B the white player moves first. [Pac-Man] File=/rom/Pac-Man.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pac-Man 1 Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=Keep PAC-MAN happy and healthy in his home of Mazeland. You score a point for every video wafer that PAC-MAN eats. You also score points when PAC-MAN eats power pills, vitamins, and ghosts. Everytime PAC-MAN eats all of the video wafers on the maze, he earns an extra life and a new maze full of video wafers. But beware of the GHOSTS that chase him through Maxeland! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1 Ghosts move at jogging speed. \ GAME 2 Ghosts move at running speed. \ GAME 3 Ghosts crawl around the maze. \ GAME 4 Ghosts move at walking speed. \ GAME 5 Ghosts move at jogging speed. \ GAME 6 Ghosts move at running speed. \ GAME 7 Ghosts crawl especially slow for young children. \ GAME 8 Ghosts move at walking speed. \ (Each GAME variation has options for 1 player or 2 players.) \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ When the DIFFICULTY switch is in the "B" position, the power pills last longer and the vitamins stay on the screen longer. \ The "A" position is for the advanced PAC-MAN player. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick Controller to guide PAC-MAN around the maze. Move the Joystick in the direction you want PAC-MAN to move. PAC-MAN moves around the area of the maze, but he can use the opening at the top and bottom of the maze as an escape route. Remember that the ghosts can use the same escape routes, and that they may be waiting for PAC-MAN when he reenters the maze. When PAC-MAN escapes through the bottom opening, he reenters through the top. When he escapes through the top, he reenters at the bottom. \ \ The red fire button is not used during game play, although it may be used to start a game. \ \ VIDEO WAFERS: These are the dotted lines on the screen. You maneuver PAC-MAN around the playfield over the video wafers. He automatically eats the video wafers, and they disappear from the maze. You score one point for each video wafer he eats. \ POWER PILLS: Power pills are located in the four corners of the playfield. Each power pill is worth five points. When PAC-MAN eats a power pill, the ghosts become a transparent blue color. During this time, PAC-MAN has the super-strength to overcome the ghosts. This is his big chance to chase and gobble down each ghost. Unfortunately, this great power only lasts a few seconds. When the power starts wearing off, the ghosts turn pink and then back to yellow. \ VITAMINS: Vitamins are the two intersecting rectangles in the center of the playfield. They only appear for a few moments and then disappear and reappear. The vitamins are worth 100 points each time PAC-MAN eats them. \ GHOSTS: The ghosts are the quartet of bad guys chasing PAC-MAN around the maze. If a ghost eats PAC-MAN, you lose one life. On the other hand, if PAC-MAN eats a ghost, you score points. PAC-MAN can only eat ghosts after eating a power pill. Then he can run around the maze eating ghosts. If the power pill wears off before PAC-MAN eats all the ghosts, he must eat another power pill and start chasing the ghosts again. After PAC-MAN eats a ghost, you only see eyes left on the ghost. But, the ghosts are reincarnated by returning to the big, square chamber in the center of the playfield. \ \ NOTE: Sometimes the ghosts try to hide behind each other, so they appear to be one single ghost chasing PAC-MAN. [Party Mix: Vol.1] File=/rom/PartyMix.a26 Platform=StarPath Sort=Party Mix 1 Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Party Mix: Vol.2] File=/rom/PartyMix2.a26 Platform=StarPath Sort=Party Mix 2 Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Party Mix: Vol.3] File=/rom/PartyMix3.a26 Platform=StarPath Sort=Party Mix 3 Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Pelé's Soccer] File=/rom/PelesSoccer.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Peles Soccer Year=1981 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Pengo] File=/rom/Pengo.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pengo Year=1984 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Pepsi Invaders] File=/rom/PepsiInvaders.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pepsi Invaders Year=1983 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Pete Rose Baseball] File=/rom/PeteRoseBaseball.a26 Platform=Absolute Sort=Pete Rose Baseball Year=1988 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Phoenix] File=/rom/Phoenix.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Phoenix Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Your mission: Eliminate seemingly immortal war hawks, destroy the alien spaceship, and safeguard our planet from ravaging energy-thieves. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You have five lives in which to survive the bombing attacks of four separate flocks of Phoenix war birds who protect the alien spaceship. Your challenge is to eliminate the birds, get to the spaceship that follows the fourth wave of birds, and shoot the alien pilot. \ To eliminate the large, menacing Phoenixes of the third and fourth waves, you have to hit them in the center. If you only wing a Phoenix, like its ancient ancestor, it will soon regenerate the missing part and become a whole bird to attack you some more. \ To destroy the alien pilot, you have to erode the multi-colored hull of the spaceship directly beneath the cockpit to create a clear shot at him. But one of the hull layers - the blue layer - rotates the length of the spaceship. So, you not only have to chip away at the blue layer, but you also have to time your shot at the alien to coincide with the hole passing directly under him. \ \ Move your Joystick left or right to move your laser cannon left or right. Pull the Joystick toward you to activate a protective force field around your laser cannon. \ This force field is energized for only 1 1/2 seconds before it fades; it cannot be reactivated until another 3 1/2 seconds elapse. When the force field is activated, you cannot move your cannon, but you can still fire your laser. \ \ To fire your laser cannon, press the red fire button. You can only have one laser shot on the screen at any one time. [Picnic] File=/rom/Picnic.a26 Platform=USGames Sort=Picnic Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Piece O' Cake] File=/rom/Pieceocake.a26 Platform=USGames Sort=Piece O Cake Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Plaque Attack] File=/rom/PlaqueAttack.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Plaque Attack Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Across America, awful jawfuls of junk food are causing deadly dental decay. Plaque is spreading its invisible film, turning teeth yellow as they decompose before our very eyes. Blast this junk with toothpaste before it gets to your teeth! And don't let up. This is the Plaque Attack, by cuspid, the last stop before gum city! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose Game Variation. Press the START button to start the game. \ GAME 1: One player - Advanced (Difficulty and points increase rapidly as your score rises.) \ GAME 2: Two players - Advanced (Difficulty and points increase rapidly as your score rises.) \ GAME 3: One player - Beginner (Less rapid increase in difficulty, less rapid increase in points.) \ GAME 4: Two players - Beginner (Less rapid increase in difficulty, less rapid increase in points.) \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT & RIGHT DIFFICULTY to "A" for slow, continuous fire. \ LEFT & RIGHT DIFFICULTY to "B" for fast, continuous fire. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Push Joystick left or right and you'll move left or right. Pull Joystick back and you'll aim toward the lower mouth. Push Joysitck forward and you'll aim toward the upper mouth. Press the red button to squirt the toothpaste. \ \ Time is a factor. As soon as you press game reset, you'll have 35 seconds to wipe out each wave of food. Your tube will shrink as time runs out. \ \ Points are scored each time you shoot a food article. Bonus points are received at the end of every eave for each tooth remaining and for each second of time left. \ \ When you've blasted all of the food in all eight of the waves, brace yourself for a super Plaque Attack! All eight waves will return in ferocious retaliation. And the harder you work, the harder they work, taking on hectic motion patterns and evading your moves with each new cycle. \ \ There's no limit to the number of shots you can fire. However, your toothpaste tube will shrink as time runs out, and eventually disappear. Careful! Without a tube in your mouth, your teeth are defenseless against the food remaining in that wave. \ \ Once plaque attacks a tooth, it turns yellow. But it can still be saved if you act quickly! And immediate blast of toothpaste at the food invader will wipe out the food and plaque and restor your tooth's health and whiteness. [Pole Position] File=/rom/PolePosition.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pole Position Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Qualify for the Grand Prix and win the Pole Position, the number one starting spot. Then go flat out to beat the track record and finish a winner! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ QUALIFYING LAP: Fanfare music signals the start of the Qualifying Lap. Your car starts automatically in low gear. When the red Speed Line is about halfway to 200 mph, shift down into high gear. Now all you have to do is finish the Qualifying Lap in 73 seconds or less and pass cars without crashing into them. Get set when you hear the three low warning tones and GO on the high pitched tone. \ If you fail to beat the Race Timer on any lap, your car stops, your passing bonus is added to your score, and the game ends. \ After the fourth lap, your time bonus (200 points for each second remaining on the Race Timer) and passing bonus are added to your score. Then your total time for the race (in seconds) flashes alternately with your final score. \ \ CRASHING: Crashes aren't fatal, but they slow you down, and lost time means lost points. Cars can switch lanes, so watch out! \ \ RUNNING OFF THE TRACK: Running on the red-and-white shoulder slows you down a lot, but sometimes it's the only way to avoid a crash. \ \ STARTING: Your car starts automatically in low gear. \ \ SHIFTING GEARS: Move your Joystick up for low gear, down for high gear. Top speeds are 100 mph in low, 200 mph in high. \ \ STEERING: Move your Joystick right to steer right, left to steer left. \ \ BRAKING: Press the red controller button. [Popeye] File=/rom/Popeye.a26 Platform=Parker Bros Sort=Popeye Year=1983 Genre=console Description=You're POPEYE! And your goal is to catch all of Olive's hearts, notes, and "Xs" (smooches!) before they hit the water and sink - or before Brutus or the Sea Hag's bottles knock you overboard. Each time you complete a round, you'll automatically proceed to the next, and more difficult one. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start the game, press the START button ot the "Fire" button on the joystick. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You'll start the game with 4 Popeyes. The first Popeye will appear on the left, topmost ledge as soon as you hit the "FIRE" button or the RESET switch. The remaining Popeyes are briefly displayed, at the top of the screen and are then replaced by your score. \ \ In each round, Popeye must win Olive Oyl's affection by catching all of her hearts, notes, or "Xs" depending on the which round you're playing. To do this, you must guide Popeye up and down stairs, off ledges - even bounce him on a trampoline - to reach these tender tokens. \ But Brutus and the Sea Hag do their best to knock Popeye overboard - Brutus with his fists, and the Sea Hag with her fast-flying bottles! When either one hits Popeye, or if any of Olive's tokens fall into the water and are pulled out in time, you lose him and the next Popeye appears on the left, topmost ledge ready to try again. \ \ Throughout the rounds, Popeye's spinach will randomly flash in specific places on the screen. When it does, move Popeye over to it and press down the "FIRE" button. \ If you reach the spinach in time, Popeye will turn red and you'll hear the "POPEYE THEME". \ This means it's you chance to knock Brutus overboard. If you do, Brutus disappears and you gain 3,000 points! In addition, if you catch any of Olive's tokens while the tune is playing, you receive double the score for each. Once Popeye uses his spinach in any of the rounds, it will not appear during the same round again. \ \ Catch all 20 hearts before they fall into the water and sink - and without being knocked into the water by Brutus or the Sea Hag. Each time you catch a heart, a "brick" will appear on the side of Popeye's house, located at the top of the screen. Once there are 20 "bricks," you'll automatically begin the next round. \ \ In Round Two, there are two trampolines, one on either side of the screen. When Popeye is on the 3rd platform, he can jump off either one of the ledges and onto the trampoline. When he hits it, he'll bounce up and land on either the 2nd or 1st platform! Brutus can only bounce to the 2nd platform. \ \ In Round Three, there is a sliding floor. When Popeye steps onto it, he'll be whisked to the other side of the mast. This sliding floor moves in both directions, and Popeye is the only one who can use it. If Popeye misses the sliding floor, he falls to the next platform. \ \ The game ends when you run out of Popeyes. To play again, press down the "FIRE" button or the game RESET switch. The game will begin at round #1, the beginning level. [Porky's] File=/rom/Porkys.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Porkys Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ Mas cuidado, por que Porky estará por todos os lados tentando lhe impedir. \ Uma vez que o jogador atravesse a rodovia e chegue ao bar, ele terá que encontrar o caminho para o topo da estrutura, colocando dinamites no seu caminho. \ Chegando ao fim do caminho, o jogador poderá acionar os explosivos e dar adeus ao Porky’s Bar. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Private Eye] File=/rom/PrivateEye.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Private Eye Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Q*bert] File=/rom/Qbert.a26 Platform=Parker Bros Sort=Q Bert 1 Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Q*bert springs to life with all the adventure of the popular arcade game! Score as many points as possible by changing the color of the cubes on the pyramid from a starting color to a destination color. You'll do this by hopping Q*bert from cube to cube while avoiding the "nasty" characters who will try to stop him. Each time you complete a pyramid, you'll proceed to a new pyramid. Try to complete as many as you can. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start the game, press the START button ot the "Fire" button on the joystick. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the LEFT Difficulty switch: Position "B" (Novice): This is an easy game; there are no Red Balls rolling after Q*bert. \ Set the LEFT Difficulty switch: Position "A "(Expert): This is the regular game. All the characters described in the following rules will appear. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Hold the Joystick in your hand so that the four corners make a diamond with the "Fire" Button at the top. \ Try to hop Q*bert onto each and every cube, so that eventually, the entire pyramid becomes the destination color. The destination color is the same as the color of the remaining Q*berts and score as seen at the top of the screen. Be careful not to hop Q*bert off the sides of the pyramid or off the bottom row of cubes. When this happens, the next Q*bert will appear on the topmost cube ready to try again to complete the pyramid. \ \ RED BALL: When Red Ball starts rolling, get Q*bert out of its path or it will squash him! If this happens, the next Q*bert appears on the cube where the last one was squashed. \ PURPLE BALL: Poses the same kind of danger as Red Ball, except that when Purple Ball reaches the bottom of the pyramid, it hatches Coily the snake! \ COILY: The only way to get rid of Coily is to lure him off the pyramid by hopping a flying disc. The best way to do this is to hop Q*bert onto the exit cube. Then as soon as Coily approaches the exit cube, hop Q*bert aboard the flying disc. Q*bert flies off to safety while Coily falls into space. \ FLYING DISCS: When Q*bert is in trouble, he can board a flying disc that will whisk him off to safety at the top of the pyramid. The number of discs and their placement to the sides of the pyramid will differ, depending on the game level and round. Just make sure Q*bert boards the flying discs from the correct exit cube, or else he'll fall off the pyramid. \ SAM: He changes the cubes' colors back again so Q*bert has got to retrace his tracks. If Q*bert stops him (by running into him), you'll earn extra bonus points. \ GREEN BALL: If Q*bert catches Green Ball, all the characters except Q*bert freeze for a second, Q*bert can continue to hop, and you'll earn bonus points. \ \ END OF ROUND: The round ends when you complete the pyramid. As long as you have a remaining Q*bert, a new pyramid will appear with a new destination color. \ The game ends when you run out of Q*berts. To play again, press RESET. The game will begin at Level 1, Round 1. [Q*bert's Qubes] File=/rom/QBertsQubes.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Q Bert 3 Year=1984 Genre=console Description=Q Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Quadrun] File=/rom/Quadrun.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Quadrun Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Save the runts!! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Background: Long ago, the peaceful land of Quad was invaded by cruel Captors who rounded up all the helpless inhabitants and imprisoned them in cages. The Captors called their prisoners "Runts". And the name has stuck. \ Now you've come to Quad to rescue the Runts and destroy their Captors with your special weapon: phaser balls. \ \ 2. Instructions. \ Running around the quad The Quad consists of four sectors, with a Runt cage in the center. You can run to any sector on the screen. \ But to switch from a vertical sector to a horizontal sector, or vice versa, you must touch one of the side walls. \ The bad guys: the captors There are five Captors per wave. Each wave begins with the QUADRUN voice, and each wave features a different type of Captor. Captors patrol the quad vertically. You can \ shoot at Captors only while you're in the vertical sectors. If a Captor crashes into you, you lose a phaser ball. \ The good guys: the Runts Runts escape from the center cage and race madly left or right toward their doom: an electrified toaster grid. Catch each \ Runt before it runs into the grid or it will fry. You can cath Runts only while you're in the horizontal sectors. \ Don't let the critter counter disappear! The white line located at the top of the screen is the Critter Counter. \ Every time you fail to destroy a Captor or fail to catch a Runt, the Critter Counter decreases in length. When it disappears, the game ends. \ Crazy Crazed Wave After you complete five waves, you begin the CRAZED WAVE. At the start of the CRAZED WAVE, the Critter Counter returns to its full length \ and you receive bonus points for all remaining phaser balls. During the CRAZED WAVE, you face constant attacks from a random assortment of the five types of Captors. \ \ 3. Hints \ When a Brat Captor attacks, run to the opposite side of the screen and "lead it on" in order to destroy it. \ When a Yo-Yo rushes out, go to the spot where it first appeared and wait for it to return - like a yo-yo, \ it always comes back to where it started. Then hit it with your phaser ball. \ If you're not in a horizontal sector when a Runt escapes from its cage, hit the closest wall in order to move quickly into the horizontal channel and catch the Runt. \ If you have only one phaser ball left and a Captor is about to crash into you, fire the phaser ball (then go catch it!) so that you won't automatically lose it. [Quick Step!] File=/rom/QuickStep.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Quick Step Year=1983 Genre=Imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Raiders of the Lost Ark] File=/rom/Raiders.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Raiders Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Dust off your felt hat, throw on your leather jacket, and uncoil your rawhide whip - you're going on the greatest treasure hunt of your life! Your mission: Find the fabled Lost Ark of the Covenant. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. Background: The Lost Ark. A dazzling treasure covered by a sheet of shining gold, the Ark was used by the ancient Hebrews to carry stone tablets inscribed with the Ten Commandments. \ According to the Bible, the Ark possesses extraordinary powers and is able to "level mountains" and "lay waste to entire regions." Any army possessing it, the Bible says, is invincible. \ You've been hired by the government to find the Ark before your country's enemies do. The only question is, where? \ As an expert on the Egyptian occult, you know the Ark was hidden inside a chamber called the Well of Souls in the year 980 B.C. The location of the chambe is a mystery - but there \ is a way to find it. Go to the secret Map Room in the city of Tanis, and, if you're holding the right object at the right time, the location of the Well of Souls will be revealed. Of \ course, finding the Map Room is no easy task since Tanis was buried long ago in a sand storm that lasted over a year. You'll need sharp wits and courage to overcome the obstacles \ you encounter on your way to the Ark. Armed with your wit and steel nerves, however, you can handle anything! Anything, that is, except snakes - they've always given you the creeps. \ Snakes or no snakes, though, you've got to find the Ark! \ You're getting closer to the Ark, now. Look out! What's that slithering out of the corner? It's a deadly asp! Snakes! Why did there have to be snakes \ \ 2. SELECT button. \ Have no function in this game. \ \ 3. Use joystick controller. \ Both joysticks are used. Use the Joystick on the right controller to move Indy on the screen. He moves up, down, right, left, and diagonally in the \ direction you move the Joystick. To pick yp an object, guide Indy over the object and it will automatically be picked up. Items that have been picked up will appear in the red \ inventory strip at the bottom of the screen. You can carry a maximum of six objects; if you want to pick up an additional object and you already have six, one object must \ be dropped before a new one is picked up. The red fire button on the right controller makes use of any object placed in the red inventory strip. \ The left controller functions as your inventory control and can be used to select or drop objects that will help you on your quest. Notice the small white selector dot below the \ objects inside the strip - use it to select the article you want to use. You can move the dot to select an object by moving the Joystick to the right or left. Select the desired \ object by returning the Joystick to the neutral (center) position when the dot is beneath the object. To drop an object, move the dot beneath the object you no longer want, \ and press the red fire button on the controller. \ \ 4. Difficulty switches. \ Have no function in this game. \ \ 5. Description of Rooms and Objects. \ Read manual. [Rampage] File=/rom/Rampage.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Rampage Year=1989 Genre=atvi Description=You and your buddy are ready for a little mass destruction. You'll demolish buildings, grab and chomp horrified humans, and flatten puny helicopters and other antagonists who try to stop you. But you won't stop at just one town. RAMPAGE has 85 cities for you to totally trash. And you can put together one riotous wrecking crew from the likes of George the Ape, Lizzie the Lizard, and Ralph the Wolf. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button has no function in the game. Press the START button or the joystick "FIRE" button to go to the Monster Selection Screen. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ At the Monster Selection Screen, move the joystick up or down to highlight the name of your favorite monster, then press the joystick button once to select that monster. In a two-player game, the second player than selects one of the remaining monsters using the same procedure. \ \ Once your monster has been selected, press the joystick button a second time to start a one-player game. In a two-player game, the game will start immediately after the second monster has been selected. \ \ Each player begins the game with three lives. \ \ You can destroy as many as 85 North American cities. Your goal is to demolish every building in each city while trying to avoid enemy fire. As you CLIMB a building, you'll PUNCH holes in the walls and GRAB and CHOMP people and other delectable. Keep an eye out for helicopters, trolleys, boats, police cars and tanks. A good PUNCH will lay 'em out cold. \ \ To WALK right or left, move the joystick in the direction you want to move. \ To CLIMB a building, move RIGHT or LEFT to approach it, then move the joystick UP to climb. \ To PUNCH, hold the joystick in the direction you want to punch, then press the joystick button. \ To JUMP, simply press the joystick button with the joystick centered. \ \ Whenever you PUNCH certain enemies or innocent bystanders, you'll automatically GOBBLE them up. Keep in mind that soldiers and civilians that appear inside buildings can be eaten only if they're a different color from that of your monster. \ \ The DAMAGE BAR directly under your score lets you know how you're doing. If you run out of energy completely, you'll automatically turn into a measly human and lose one of your lives. If you have any lives remaining, the RAMPAGE Blimp will deliver your backup monster. [Reactor] File=/rom/Reactor.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Reactor Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ [RealSports Boxing] File=/rom/RealSportsBoxing.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Realsports Boxing Year=1987 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [RealSports Football] File=/rom/RealSportsFootball.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Realsports Football Year=1982 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [RealSports Tennis] File=/rom/RealSportsTennis.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Realsports Tennis Year=1983 Genre=atari Description= Note=Rating: 8 - Company: Atari - Year: 1983 \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Revenge of the Beefsteak Tomatoes] File=/rom/RevengeTomatoes.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Revenge of the Beefsteak Tomatoes Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Riddle of the Sphinx] File=/rom/RiddleoftheSphinx.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Riddle of the Sphinx Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [River Patrol] File=/rom/RiverPatrol.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=River Patrol Year=1984 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [River Raid II] File=/rom/RiverRaid2.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=River Raid 4 Year=1988 Genre=atvi Description=Your mission is to score as many points as possible by destroying enemy tankers, helicopters, fuel depots, jets, and bridges before your jet crashes or runs out of fuel. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to alternate between a one player game and two players taking turns. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick left or right to turn in that direction. Press the joystick button to fire missiles. Push the joystick up to fly faster, or down to go slower. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, missiles streak straight ahead. With switches in the B position, you can control the direction of your missiles after they have been fired by steering with your joystick. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Move the joystick or press the joystick button to start the action. \ Always keep an eye on your fuel gauge. Fuel is used up at a constant rate, regardless of speed. When your fuel drops below 1/4 full, a warning siren sounds to alert you--it's time to refuel! The slower you fly over a depot, the more fuel you receive. A bell will sound while you are refueling. The sound changes to a higher pitch when your fuel tank is full. The farther down the river you fly, the fewer fuel depots you'll find, so you'll have to increase your flight speed if you want to survive. \ You lose a jet when it collides with the river bank or one of the enemy objects (except fuel depots), or when you run out of fuel. If you lose a jet before destroying a bridge, you will restart at the beginning of that section. If you lose a jet after destroying a bridge, you will instead restart at that location. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Road Runner] File=/rom/RoadRunner.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Road Runner Year=1989 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Robot Tank] File=/rom/RobotTank.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Robot Tank Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Roc'n Rope] File=/rom/Rocnrope.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Rocnrope Year=1984 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Rubik's Cube] File=/rom/RubikCube.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Rubik's Cube Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Computer simulation of the classic Rubik's Cube puzzle. Note= \ Player Mode: One player game. \ \ 1. Instructions \ In normal mode the player can rotate the cube in any one of four directions until the desired side appears. Once a side has been selected, the player can then rotate \ the individual slices (rows and columns) until they think they have it in the right position. The player repeats this process until the cube is solved.\ In cheat mode, the player can actually set the colors on the cube to whatever they desire. In solve mode the computer solve the cube for them. The solve mode is actually \ a step-by-step demonstration (controlled by the fire button), and shows the player each move it is making. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick to turn the cube. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Left difficulty toggles between Normal and Cheat game modes. [Sea Battle] File=/rom/SeaBattle.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Sea Battle Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to deploy your battleships, submarines, aircraft carriers and more from your harbors. Then strategically battle your way across the seas in an effort to gain access and infiltrate your opponent's harbors. It's a bitter fight to the end! Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start game, press RESET. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Game begins in MAP MODE. White harbor at top of screen belongs to LEFT controller. Yellow harbor at bottom belongs to RIGHT controller. Launch ships with goal of entering and capturing opponents harbor. Engage enemy ships in battle to stop them from entering your harbor. \ \ LAUNCH SHIPS At start of game both harbors are flashing. While a harbor is flashing. ships can be launched. There are four types of ship: Destroyer. PT Boat. Submarine and Battleship. At start of game you have 3 of each type for a total of 12 ships. \ To launch a ship push JOYSTICK in one of four directions to choose type of ship and press RED BUTTON. The ship appears in your harbor. \ \ BUZZ WHEN LAUNCHING SHIPS you hear a buzz when trying to launch a snip. it means one of three twigs: \ 1. You already have tour ships on screen—you cannot launch another now \ 2. You no longer have any ships of type selected in reserve — try selecting another type of ship. \ 3. You are holding JOYSTICK at a 45 degree angle — hold JOYSTICK up, down, left or right. \ \ SELECT SHIPS, HARBOR: You and your opponent can each have up to four ships on screen at one time. Repeatedly press your RED BUTTON to cycle through your ships and your harbor. Whichever one is currently selected FLASHES. Whichever ship is selected (flashing) can be steered by the JOYSTICK. When the harbor is selected (flashing). you can launch another ship. A ship will continue moving when not selected if, while pressing RED BUTTON to select a different ship or your harbor, you hold JOYSTICK in desired direction. \ \ In MAP MODE, if a ship hits an island, it will slide along the shoreline and keep moving, whether selected or not. \ \ BATTLE MODE: When two opposing ships come within range of each other, they flash rapidly and the screen automatically switches to BATTLE MODE. Neither ship can retreat — it is a battle to the death! JOYSTICK controls direction and accelerat!on of your ship. Ships speed up and slow down at a rate determined by their type. Launch a missile by pushing JOYSTICK to aim and pressing RED BUTTON to fire! Keep holding BUTTON to steer missile with JOYSTICK. \ \ While RED BUTTON is held, your ship will continue to move in its previous direction at a constant rate, unaffected by JOYSTICK. (Exception: center JOY-STICK to slow your ship even while BUTTON is held.) \ \ There are two types of missiles: Salvos and Torpedoes. \ SALVOS: fired by Destroyers and Battleships, they reach their maximum arc while RED BUTTON is held. Hold BUTTON until salvo is halfway to its target. If you don't time it properly, salvo can pass over a ship without interacting. \ TORPEDOES: fired by PT Boats and Submarines, are slower with a shorter rang than salvos and explode on contact. In BATTLE MODE, avoid the islands! Hitting land damages your ship same as a missile hit! BATTLE MODE continues until one ship is hit enough times to be sunk. Once a ship is sunk, screen returns to MAP MODE. The ship that survives the battle carries its damage into its next battle, making it easier to sink. A ship cannot be repaired. \ \ In BATTLE MODE, only the two ships engaged in battle are seen. Entering your opponent's harbor in BATTLE MODE does not win the game—you can only win in MAP MODE. WINNING THE GAME Win by navigating a ship into your opponent's harbor. The captured harbor switcnes to your color and a triumphant blast on the ship's siren is heard. Congratulations! To begin a new games. press RESET. [Shield Shifter] File=/rom/ShieldShifter.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Shield shifter Year=2010 Genre=Action Description=Shoot your way through the shifting shields to give yourself a clean shot at the attacking Alien Queen! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. Press the controller button to fire. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press the controller button to begin play. Blast through the shield to attack the Alien Queen. [Shootin' Gallery] File=/rom/ShootinGallery.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Shootin Gallery Year=1982 Genre=Imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Skate Boardin'] File=/rom/Skateboardin.a26 Platform=Absolute Sort=Skate Boardin Year=1987 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Ski Hunt] File=/rom/SkiHunt.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=Ski Hunt Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Ski Run] File=/rom/SkiRun.a26 Platform=Suntek Sort=Ski Run Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Skiing] File=/rom/Skiing.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Skiing Year=1980 Genre=atvi Description=Now you can ski all year long without worrying about tight boots, cold hands, long lift lines - or whether it snows! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose the game variation. To start the game, press the START button or the "Fire" button on the joystick. \ SLALOM RUNS \ Game 1: 20 gates, Novice run \ Game 2: 40 gates, Intermediate run \ Game 3: 30 gates, Expert run \ Game 4: 50 gates, Olympic run \ Game 5: 30 gates, a new Expert run every time you select Game 5 \ \ DOWNHILL RUNS \ Game 6: 200 meters, Novice hill \ Game 7: 300 meters, Intermediate hill \ Game 8: 500 meters, Expert hill \ Game 9: 900 meters, Olympic hill \ Game 10: A new 900-meter Olympic hill every time you select Game 10 \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT difficulty switch in the "B" position, the ski run passes by vertically but does not change horizontally, so your skier cannot ski off the course. \ With the LEFT difficulty switch in the "A" position, you can direct your skier off the trail and through the woods--even ski all the way around the mountain, if you wish. \ With the RIGHT difficulty switch in the "A" position, you can jump moguls in Downhill Run games. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your Joystick controls the position of your skis. Push it to the left and your ski tips will move to the left; push it to the right and your ski tips will move to the right. The longer you hold the Joystick in either direction, the farther your skiis will go, until they reach horizontal (you can't ski uphill!). Your skier will go in the direction your skis are pointed and will reach maximum downhill speed when the skis are pointed directly downhill. \ \ If you hit a gate or a tree, do not lose heart: You skier will jump back up and keep going. But you do lose time, so be careful! \ The red button on your Joystick is not used in slalom racing, but can be used instead of the game reset switch to reset your skier at the top of the course. Don't push it unless you want to start over. \ \ The red button on your Joystick is only used when your RIGHT difficulty switch is on the "A" position during downing racing. Then you must push the button to make your skier jump any moguls in your path (they are the grey patches in the snow). The timing of your jumps is critical; if you're off, your skier will hit the mogul and fall on his face. If trying to dodge trees and jump moguls gets a bit too tricky, just push your RIGHT difficulty switch down to "B" and your skier will jump each mogul automatically. [Sky Jinks] File=/rom/SkyJinks.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Sky Jinks Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=The object of Sky Jinks is to race your P41 through the pylon course, in the shortest possible time, without hitting pylons, trees, or balloonists. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to select game variation. Press START o position your plane back at the beginning of the course and set your race timer to 0. Then, press the red "FIRE" button or move your Joystick to begin a new race. \ Game 1: Polo Grounds (25 pylon course) \ Game 2: Aero Race (50 pylon course) \ Game 3: Love Field (75 pylon course) \ Game 4: Speedway Meadows (99 pylon course) \ Game 5: Thompson Tourney (99 pylons and a new course each time you select Game 5) \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT DIFFICULTY switch - "A" (Trees are randomly placed in flight path), "B" (Trees are removed from flight path). \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Moving your Joystick to the left will bank your plane to the left. Move your Joystick to the right, and your plane banks right. Moving your Joystick forward or back during a race does not affect movement of the plane. The red button on your Joystick is your plane's throttle. Press the red button to accelerate. Release the button to slow your plane down. \ \ You must fly to the right of the red pylons and to the left of the blue pylons. There is a 3 second penalty each time you fly on the wrong side of a pylon. Your pylon count is shown above the timer on the screen and counts down each time you either successfully pass or crash into a pylon. So, at the end of the race, the count remaining on the screen indicates the number of missed pylons for that race. \ \ Trees and hot air balloons have been strategically placed along the course to really keep you on your toes and keep you from flying the fastest, most direct path. You'll need to master your racer and be able to make split-second decisions in order to do well in Sky Jinks. [Sky Skipper] File=/rom/SkySkipper.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Sky Skipper Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Slot Machine] File=/rom/SlotMachine.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Slot Machine Year=1978 Genre=Simulation Description=Standard slot machine rules apply in this Atari video adaptation. Choose from a traditional jackpot type, in which you win based on which three symbols show up in the center, or a payoff game, in which additional coins allow a payoff if a winning combination shows up in the top, bottom, or diagonal lines. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1, 3, 5, and 7 are for one player, and games 2, 4, 6, and 8 are for two players. Each machine playfield features a specific number of paylines. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P2 or right slot joystick for one player games, and the P1 or left slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Use the controller button to place your bet. You can bet up to five coins each time. Games 3, 4, 7, and 8 have a maximum of five paylines. Each bet of one coin increases the chances of adding to your bank. \ After placing your bet, pull back on your joystick to spin the reels of the slot machine. In two-player games, both players must do this to spin the reels. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The game ends when one player's bank is broke. [Smurf: Rescue in Gargamel's Castle] File=/rom/Smurfs.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Smurf 1 Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Sneak'n Peek] File=/rom/SneakPeek.a26 Platform=US Games Sort=Sneak ´N Peek Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Peanuts: Snoopy and the Red Baron] File=/rom/Snoopy.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Snoopy and the Red Baron Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=The dastardly Red Baron has stolen important food supplies from the allies during the war. Hamburgers, ice cream cones, popcorn and other tasty treats have been taken by this evil aviator and sharpshooter. Your task is to help Snoopy shoot down the Red Baron and recover the stolen supplies. Note= \ Player Mode:Single-player game \ \ Press GAME RESET to start and restart the game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press GAME SELECT to choose the skill level you want: 1-medium, 2-advanced, or 3-expert. Game 4 is an easy version for young children and beginners. The number to the right of the game number indicates the number of Red Barons in each round. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Press the red button to continue playing at the end of each round. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ To catch a stolen treat: Keep an eye on the Red Baron when he drops a tasty morsel from his tri-plane. Recover the falling treat by touching it with Snoopy's doghouse. But watch out! The Red Baron can also drop skull and crossbones, and if you catch one, you lose all of the treats you've collected. \ If you manage to shoot down all the Red Barons in the round and collect all the treats, bonus points are added to your score (see SCORING). Press the controller button to begin the next round. \ \ Before you press GAME RESET (see CONTROLS), you can play a practice game without scoring points, and without being shot down. [Solar Fox] File=/rom/SolarFox.a26 Platform=CBS Sort=Solar Fox Year=1983 Genre=console Description=The object of SOLAR FOX is to successfully maneuver your Starship through a series of colorful, pulsating solar cell matrixes. Points are scored for each solar cell you capture and for how fast you clear each matrix. Players may also earn the right to complete Challenge Racks for bonus points and clues to the mystery of SOLAR FOX. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose game variations. Press START to begin the game.\ Game 1 - One-Player \ Game 2 - Two-Player \ Game 3 - One-Player (Parent-Play)* \ Game 4 - Two-Player (Parent-Play)* \ *Games 3 and 4 are, respectively, easier one and two-player versions of SOLAR FOX that let parents have almost as much fun as their kids. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2.\ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Each player's DIFFICULTY switches: \ "A" position - Fast Cruise Speed. \ "B" position - Slow Cruise Speed. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You begin each game with a squadron of three Starships. Only one Starship at a time may move about a matrix. The solid squares in the lower right-hand corner of your screen indicate how many of your Starships are left. Use your Joystick Controller to maneuver your Starship through each matrix. The red button acts as your Starship's speed control. Starships have no firepower. You must *capture* the solar cells, do not shoot at them. You will be awarded one extra Starship for every ten matrixes cleared. \ \ There are twenty different solar cell matrixes, not counting Challenge Racks. Each matrix varies in its shape, composition, complexity and, in some cases, color. The more you play SOLAR FOX, the more familiar you'll become with the unique challenges each matrix presents to you. Racks 1 to 6 are composed of single solar cells. Racks 7 to 20 are made up of double solar cells; each cell must be passed over twice to be cleared from the screen. (Points are scored for both passes). When the last matrix is cleared the cycle of matrix patterns is repeated. \ \ Each of the twenty matrixes is equipped with a Skip-A-Rack timer. If you begin a matrix and manage to clear it before the letters of SKIP-A-RACK disappear, you'll automatically skip the next matrix and earn all the points available from it. The length of time allotted for the Skip-A-Rack timer varies with the complexity of each matrix. If your Starship is destroyed by a fireball before the Skip-A-Rack timer has elapsed, the timer is forfeited for that matrix. There is no penalty for failing to beat the Skip-A-Rack timer. \ \ After every fifth matrix of SOLAR FOX, a Challenge Rack appears. There are six different Challenge Racks throughout the game, making the total number of matrixes 26. These special matrixes require expert maneuvers and precise timing. You must clear the Challenge Rack of all its solar cells before the letters of CHALLENGE! disappear. Points are scored for each solar cell captured, but only if the entire matrix has been cleared. When you complete the Challenge Rack, a code letter will briefly appear on the screen. This letter is part of a mystery word that has been programmed into your cartridge. To get all six letters, you must successfully complete all six Challenge Racks. \ \ The game ends when all of your Starships have been destroyed by the deadly fireballs. [Solar Storm] File=/rom/SolarStorm.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Solar Storm Year=1983 Genre=imagic, paddle Description=You're strapped in your laser ship, battling fierce Deltoids and Shields. They approach in waves, at faster and faster speeds. Each raider can shoot a single flash of proton energy that comes at you like a lightning bolt. Blast almost everything you see! If you don't, heat from the solar debris can destroy your planet. If you prevail, you can move out to the edge of space and attack your foes. Sweet revenge! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to select 1 player or 2 player version. Press START or your controller's "FIRE" button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use Joystick/Paddle controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. P1 uses the left paddle, and P2 uses the right paddle. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ In the first battle, you must defend the planet surface with your laser ship. You have 3 in reserve. \ \ The first wave of attackers shoots lightning-fast bolts of proton energy down toward the planet surface. Keep your laser ship moving. Position it beneath shooting objects just long enough to fire at them! You have this advantage: each shooting object can fire only once. But you can fire at them repeatedly, until they descend to your planet's surface. \ \ More objects fall in subsequent waves. A wave ends when you shoot all objects or they reach your planet, OR you lose a laser ship. If an object or its ray hits you, you lose a laser ship. As the game goes on, targets fall faster and faster, and at different angles. Some will shoot at you. The most important solar fragments are the Sizzloids! They can appear during any wave. If you hit a Sizzloid you clear the entire screen for a brief period and receive 50 points. If you allow a Sizzloid to reach your planet's surface, it adds a lot to the heat build-up that can end the game! The longer the game lasts, the more frequently Sizzloids appear. \ \ ORBITAL PLATFORM \ At the end of a wave when your score reaches 500, 1000, 1500, etc., the orbital platform appears. Now you can earn more points and an extra laser ship (up to a total of 8). To earn the bonus laser, you must hit at least 5 of the fleet ships before the timer counts down to zero. Turn the Paddle Controller to aim the orbital gun spotter, then press the red button to fire. If you hit 5 targets in time you'll hear a fast clicking sound. The remaining fleet ships change color. Each time you see the orbital platform your available time is a little shorter, but the fleet ships move at the same speed. When time runs out, you return to the planet surface. \ \ THE HEAT FACTOR \ The Heat Indicator bars on both sides of the screen tell you how much solar radiation your planet has absorbed. If too much debris reaches the surface of the planet, the heat will be too intense for you to survive, and the game will end. At the beginning of the game the Heat Indicators are blue, and relatively low. As your planet absorbs falling targets, the Indicators grow taller and change color. At extremely high temperatures they begin to flash. When the heat indicator bars are flashing, the next deadly hit may cause the planet to overheat and explode, thus ending the game, even if you have some laser ships left. \ \ Targets have different heat-raising effects: \ * Each SUN SPOT has very little heating power. \ * Each DELTOID, SHIELD, and LANDER adds somewhat more heat. \ * Each SOLAR FLARE adds quite a lot of heat. \ * Each SIZZLOID is very hot - just a few of them can make the planet overheat and explode! \ * If you hit several objects one after the other, the planet cools down. The indicators will gradually get shorter and change color back to blue. \ * Your planet's heat level doesn't change during the orbital platform sequence, between waves or during your opponent's turn in a 2-player version. \ * If solar debris hits your laser ship, it does not raise the temperature on the planet surface. [Space Attack] File=/rom/SpaceAttack.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Space Attack Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to defend your Mother Ship from attacking aliens. You have 3 squadrons, with 3 ships in each squadron. Destroy all alien fleets and you win! If your squadrons are destroyed first, the aliens move in and annihilate the hidden Mother Ship. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start the game, press the RESET Switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT Difficulty Switch controls how well the aliens fight. Battle is much more fierce in Hard Position "A" than in Easy Position "B". Alien ships fire and zigzag MUCH more frequently and their photon blasts travel twice as fast. \ RIGHT Difficulty Switch controls activity on the Radar Screen while you are in Battle Mode. \ EASY POSITION "B" - NO activity on Radar Screen while you are in Battle Mode. Computer does NOT fight battles for you. \ HARD POSITION "A" - All activity on Radar Screen continues when you are in Battle Mode, but at 1/4 NORMAL RATE. If any other dispatched squadron reaches its target fleet, battle begins and the COMPUTER FIGHTS FOR YOU, losing roughly one of your ships for every four alien ships destroyed. \ \ BOTH LEFT AND RIGHT SWITCH SHOULD BE SET AT THE SAME DIFFICULTY LEVEL. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You see a radar view of space, with alien fleets moving toward the inner rectangle where your Mother ship is hidden. Select an alien fleet to attack. Then dispatch one of your squadrons - blue, white or gold - after it. Dispatch one, two or all three squadrons, but ONLY ONE SQUADRON PER ALIEN FLEET at a time. Your squadrons appear in the center of the screen only after you dispatch them. \ \ TAKE YOUR SQUADRON INTO BATTLE MODE,when it reaches its target fleet and starts blinking. In Battle Mode, you look out into space through your laser gunsight, as alien ships engage you in a space dogfight. Move your gunsight ahead of an alien ship and fire! Your lasers come from the bottom of the screen and converge at the point where your gunsight was WHEN YOU FIRED. Watch out for return fire. Alien photon blasts are fired from the alien ships, at your gunsight. If they TURN RED and hit your gunsight, they destroy one of your ships. NUMBERS AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN INDICATE NUMBER OF SHIPS REMAINING IN THE ALIEN FLEET (LEFT) AND NUMBER OF SHIPS REMAINING IN YOUR SQUADRON (RIGHT). \ \ YOU AUTOMATICALLY RETURN TO RADAR MODE when you shoot down an entire alien fleet or lose your squadron. If your squadron survived the battle, it remains in place until you dispatch it again. Go after the next alien fleet, until all are destroyed. \ \ A SIREN WARNS YOU WHEN THE MOTHER SHIP IS UNDER ATTACK. Siren gets faster as the Mother Ship sustains more damage. The game ends if the Mother Ship is destroyed. \ \ PULL JOYSTICK DOWN REPEATEDLY, until selected alien fleet turns purplish color. while HOLDING DOWN the FIRE BUTTON: \ Move Up = Dispatch White Squadron \ Move Right = Dispatch Gold Squadron \ Move Left = Dispatch Blue Sqaudron \ \ TO TAKE A SQUADRON INTO BATTLE, (when squadron reaches alien fleet and starts blinking, MOVE JOYSTICK TO UP, LEFT OR RIGHT POSITION, WITHOUT PRESSING THE RED BUTTON. \ TO RE-DISPATCH A SQUADRON, follow Steps 1 and 2 above. \ \ IN BATTLE MODE: Move the joystick in any direction, to guide the gunsight where you wish your lasers to hit. Keep your gunsight away from red alien fire. \ PUSH THE RED BUTTON TO FIRE YOUR LASERS. [Space Invaders] File=/rom/SpaceInvaders2600.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Space Invaders 0 Year=1980 Genre=atari Description=You are at war with invaders from space who are threatening the earth! Your objective is to destroy these invaders by firing your laser cannon. You must wipe out the invaders either before they reach the bottom of the screen or before they hit you three times with their laser bombs. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. There are 112 game variations (including Moving Shields, Zig-Zagging Bombs, Fast Bombs, Invisible Invaders): \ Basic Game (1 player):1 - 16 \ Basic Game (2 players alternating): 17 - 32 \ Players Competing At The Same Time: 33 - 48 \ One Player Moves Right/Other Player Moves Left: 65 - 80 \ Alternating Fire & Control: 81 - 96 \ One Player Moves/Other Player Fires: 97 - 112 \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches control the size of the laser cannons on the screen. In the "B" position, the cannon is smaller, and therefore easier for the beginning player to use. In the "A" position, the cannon is twice as large, and therefore more susceptible to enemy fire \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Move the Joystick to the right or left to manuever your laser cannon across the bottom of the screen. Do this to avoid being hit by the laser bombs, which the invaders will continually drop from the sky, and to aim your own "laser beams." Each time your cannon is hit by one of the laser bombs the game pauses temporarily, and the number of hits you have remaining is displayed at the bottom of the screen. \ \ Press the red controller button to fire your laser cannon. Each time you fire the cannon you may not fire it again until you hit a target, or until the laser beam disappears off the top of the screen. \ \ The COMMAND SHIP is simply a bonus if you are able to hit it. Be careful not to concentrate so much on hitting it that you get hit with an enemy laser bomb. \ \ There are SHIELDS positioned on the screen between your laser cannon and the SPACE INVADERS. At the outset you are safe behind the SHIELDS. However, as you and the enemy hit the SHIELDS, they become damaged, allowing laser beams from your cannon and laser bombs from the enemy to pass through them. As the SPACE INVADERS get close to the SHIELDS on their way to the earth, the SHIELDS disappear altogether. \ \ Remember, if the lowest SPACE INVADERS reach the earth (bottom of the screen), the game ends. [Space Shuttle: A Journey Into Space] File=/rom/SpaceShuttle.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Space Shuttle Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Space Tunnel] File=/rom/SpaceTunnel.a26 Platform=Bit Corporation Sort=Space Tunnel Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Spacemaster X-7] File=/rom/SpaceMasterX-7.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Spacemaster X-7 Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Spider Fighter] File=/rom/SpiderFighter.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Spider Fighter Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Now don't get itchy. But, there are bugs in your game console. Lots and lots of creepy crawly, pesky spiders. And they want your fruit! You got to stomp 'em, smite 'em and fight 'em with all your might! If the spiders get your fruit, they'll get you! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. Press the START switch to begin. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT Difficulty Swtich: "A" - Regular Game, "B" - Expert Game \ RIGHT Difficulty Swtich: "A" - Straight Pellets, "B" - Guided Pellets \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to protect your fruit orchard from insect fruit theives, scoring points by exterminating the attackers. \ \ FRUIT ORCHARD: Your fruit orchard is growing oranges, grapes, strawberries and bananas. You must protect each variety of fruit from waves of insects. Four waves attack oranges, grapes and strawberries. Then, unlimited waves of insects attack your bananas. Each wave starts out with three fruit and four Master Nests. \ REINFORCEMENTS: You begin each game with four bug blasters in reserve. If you manage to save all three fruit from an insect wave, you're awarded an aditional blaster. You can only have up to four reserve blasters on the screen at one time. \ BUG GLOSSARY: \ Master Nests - They are protected from poision by a white band, until it releases a Spy Pod. \ Spy Pod - Critters that scout around and instruct the Master Nest to relase more insects. \ Green Widows - They protect the Master Nest with cover-fire, also act as shield for the insects. \ Stingers - Stingers track your blaster to destroy you. When the Master Nest is detroyed, Pods and Widows instanlly transformer into Stingers. [Spider-Man] File=/rom/SpiderMan.a26 Platform=Parker Bros Sort=Spider-Man Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Springer] File=/rom/Springer.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=Springer Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Spy Hunter] File=/rom/SpyHunter.a26 Platform=SEGA Sort=Spy Hunter Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Sssnake] File=/rom/Sssnake.a26 Platform=DataAge Sort=Sssnake Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Star Raiders] File=/rom/StarRaiders.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Star Raiders Year=1982 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Star Strike] File=/rom/StarStrike.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Star Strike Year=1982 Genre=console Description=A powerful alien space station is about to launch a missile that will destroy the Earth. You are piloting a small spaceship, armed with laser guns and bombs. Y Quickly bomb 8 alien missile silos. Shoot as many alien spaceships as you can. You must hit all 8 silos before "Planet Earth" moves directly over the Launch Trench. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start, press the RESET switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT: "B", RIGHT: "B" - Slow Speed, Aimed meteor-missles \ LEFT: "A", RIGHT: "B" - Medium,a imed meteor-missles \ LEFT: "B", RIGHT: "A" - Medium, slow guided meteor-missles \ LEFT: "A", RIGHT: "A" - Fast, fast guided meteor-missles \ \ 4. Instructions. \ WATCH OUT! YOU'RE BEING FOLLOWED: Alien ships appear one at a time behind your spaceship. They pause briefly before attacking, then overtake your ship. When they get within range, they start to fire. \ ALIEN SHIP ATTACKING: If any of their blue lasers hit you, your ship loses control and drops DOWNWARD each time it is hit. Push your joystick FORWARD to gain altitude. Take evasive action to avoid further hits. \ BLUE LASERS: Your red FIRE BUTTON on your joystick controller is your air-to-air laser trigger. When an alien passes your spaceship, its color changes to light blue. When an alien is in front of your spaceship, you can hit it. If you shoot an alien ship or meteor-missile, there is a brief pause in the alien attack. If the aliens leave the screen or explode on their own, a new alien attack occurs immediately. \ VANISHING POINT: All air-to-air lasers go toward the "vanishing point", roughly at the center of the Trench. Keep this in mind when firing at alien ships. \ ALIEN METEOR-MISSILES: Deadly meteor-like missiles come at you from the depths of space. "Aimed" meteor-missiles travel in the general direction of your ship, while "guided" meteor-missiles track and follow your ship. You must avoid the meteor-missiles to maintain control! \ IF YOU ARE HIT: When you are hit by a laser from the alien saucer, your ship falls for a short time. Your ship falls farther each time it is hit. When you are hit by an alien meteor-missile, your controls become "scrambled" for a few seconds (UP may become DOWN, DOWN may become LEFT, etc.). It is always possible to go in the direction you want to go...if you can hang on a few seconds, the controls will return to normal. \ YOU HAVE 8 MISSILE SILOS: All is in vain unless you successfully bomb 8 missile silos before the Planet Earth moves over the center of the Trench. If any unbombed silos get past you at that point, the game is over. At the two highest skill levels, the Planet Earth moves more rapidly to the center of the Launch Trench. \ \ To release a bomb, press the red FIRE BUTTON when you are INSIDE the Launch Trench. A beeping radar warning alarm gives you a signal just before each silo comes over the horizon. If your bomb hits a silo, the picture shakes from the concussion and that silo turns solid. When you bomb the 8th silo, you destroy the enemy star completely and "save the Earth"! [Star Voyager] File=/rom/StarVoyager.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Star Voyager Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description=Returning from a secret diplomatic mission, the Astro-Cruiser Star Voyager receives an urgent stellar communication: "Zakor has betrayed new treaty. Capital Starport under siege. Relief imperative. Return immediately. Caution: Zakoran enemy ships patrol the seven-star portals. Energy supplies limited: Refuel at each star portal. Hurry!" Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose 1 or 2 player game. Press START to begin the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT Difficulty Lever controls the pace of enemy attack and star portal appearance. \ Normal mode: "A" \ Accelerated action: "B" \ \ Select weapons with the RIGHT Difficulty Lever. \ Lasers: "A" \ Photon Torpedoes: "B" \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Pilot Star Voyager through treacherous space. As you look out from the Command Bridge, stars rush past. Penetrate the seven-star portals and save the Capital Starport. Destroy enemy ships with photon torpedoes or lasers or evade them to maintain your precious energy supply. \ \ Your viewer displays the hostile space you navigate. Sights at the center of the viewer show where your 2 lines of fire meet. Weapon fire originates under wings located on either side of the Command Bridge. Lasers use more energy than photon torpedoes but have a wider, more effective range. Both destroy anything in their paths. \ \ Enemy ships and star portals first appear as small distant dots, then advance. Enemy pulsar bombs flash white hot on your viewer. Each hit costs you energy as enemy ships and their fire crash into Star Voyager defense shields. \ \ Keep track of energy levels on the instrument panel. Use your radar screen to locate opponents and approaching star portals. Only passing through a star portal restores your energy reserves. But be warned! Crashing into a star portal will destroy you! \ \ Your instrument panel helps. The reading on the left indicates the number of enemy ships you've blasted. Energy still in reserve appears on the right. The radar screen in the middle of the panel shows both the nearest enemy (solid dot) and star portal (flashing blip.) Audio signals alert you to approaching foes and star portals. Four beeps indicate an alien presence. A musical overture sounds when a star portal is near. [Star Trek] File=/rom/StarTrek.a26 Platform=Sega Sort=Star Trek 1 Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Star Trek: Strategic Operations Simulator traz para você que é fã da franquia de Star Trek, um universo gigante, batalhas espaciais contra os Klingons, que vão ficando cada vez mais fortes, mas muito cuidado por onde anda, pois existem meteoros espalhados pelos setores. Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ Com uma jogabilidade intuitiva, o jogo flui muito bem, não demora muito para você entender a complexidade do jogo e com isso a diversão é garantida. \ Na época quando era comprado o jogo, ele vinha com um “Combat Control Panel” que nada mais era do que um overlay (uma “capa”) para melhorar ainda mais jogabilidade e a interação do jogo com o jogador. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Star Wars: The Arcade Game] File=/rom/StarWarsArcade.a26 Platform=Parker Brothers Sort=Star Wars 1 Year=1984 Genre=console Description=Use the force to score as many points as possible by destroying a relentless swarm of IMPERIAL TIE FIGHTERS, a barrage of deadly fireballs, and a maze of sinister laser towers before finally blasting the infamous DEATH STAR from existence. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the LEFT DIFFICULTY SWITCH: \ Position "A" (Expert): you begin the game at WAVE 3. \ Position "B" (Novice): you begin the game at WAVE 1. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ There are increasing WAVES of difficulty. Each WAVE features 3 Rounds (except for WAVE 1). The rounds involve: (1) destroying fireballs and shooting down TIE FIGHTERS patrolling the DEATH STAR, (2) blasting fireballs and the tops off of LASER TOWERS along the surface of the DEATH STAR, and (3) destroying fireballs while avoiding CATWALKS in the DEATH STAR'S EQUATORAL TRENCH. It is in this last round that you must also hit the MAIN REACTOR PORT on the floor of the TRENCH with a PROTON TORPEDO to destroy the DEATH STAR completely! \ \ You'll begin the game at WAVE 1, Round 1 with 8 energy shields. Each time you successfully complete a WAVE, you'll automatically advance to the next and more difficult one with your remaining number of energy shields (NOTE: the maximum numbers of energy shields you can have at one time is 8). When you lose all 8 energy shields, and are hit by a fireball, tower, or CATWALK, the game ends and you must begin again. [Star Wars: Jedi Arena] File=/rom/JediArena.a26 Platform=Parker Brothers Sort=Star Wars 6 Year=1983 Genre=paddle Description=Will you accept the challenge to become the JEDI MASTER? Find out if you, a JEDI KNIGHT, are worthy of such a title. Meet your opponent in the JEDI ARENA, where you're face-to-face in an electrifying laser battle. Use quick reflexes and a swift LIGHT SABER to score once...twice...three times. When you do, you are the JEDI MASTER! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 Player - Slow Seeker \ GAME 2: 2 Player - Slow Seeker \ GAME 3: 1 Player - Medium Seeker \ GAME 4: 2 Player - Medium Seeker \ GAME 5: 1 Player - Fast Seeker \ GAME 6: 2 Player - Fast Seeker \ GAME 7: 1 Player - Invisible Seeker \ GAME 8: 2 Player - Invisible Seeker \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers or paddles. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. If using paddles, plug the paddle controller into the P1, or left, joystick port. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the DIFFICULTY SWITCH. \ Position "A": You have 3 lines of protection in your FORCE FIELD. \ Position "B": You have 4 lines of protection in your FORCE FIELD. \ In both one and two player games, the red player uses the left DIFFICULTY SWITCH and the blue player uses the right DIFFICULTY SWITCH. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Both you and your opponent use the SEEKER as a weapon. When you press the FIRE button, a laser bolt (red or blue, depending on your KNIGHT's color) will shoot our from the SEEKER at your opponent. You control the angle of the laser bolt with your LIGHTSABER by turning the paddle dial in the direction you wish the laser bolt to fire. But be quick, because the SEEKER is constantly moving. Watch the position of the SEEKER, aim your LIGHTSABER, then fire! \ \ Direct a laser bolt at your opponent's FORCE FIELD. Every time you hit a protective line of the FIELD, you'll hear a sound that means you've knocked away a piece of the FIELD. Send a bolt through an opening in the FIELD, and you score! \ \ You can use your opponent's laser bolts to your advantage. Whenever a bolt hits your LIGHTSABER, the bolt is "frozen" to that spot for a brief moment. Take advantage of such a moment to quickly aim a bolt at your opponent. \ \ Each time a laser bolt gets through your opponent's FORCE FIELD, you score a point and end that match. The action of the game will stop briefly, then resume with the JEDI KNIGHTS facing each other from a different side. Players begin again with a new FORCE FIELD in front of them. \ The game ends when one JEDI KNIGHT has scored three points (won three matches). At that time, the action will stop and the STAR WARS theme will play. [Star Wars: Return of the Jedi - Deathstar Battle] File=/rom/DeathStarBattle.a26 Platform=Parker Brothers Sort=Star Wars 2 Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Use the force to destroy the sinister DEATH STAR before the EMPIRE completes its construction! But reaching this powerful space station won't be easy. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the Red "Fire" Button. \ GAME 1: Beginner \ GAME 2: Advanced \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the DIFFICULTY switches: \ LEFT DIFFICULTY switch Position "A" (Expert): Your MILLENNIUM FALCON will explode when it collides with TIE INTERCEPTORS. \ Position "B" (Novice): Your MILLENNIUM FALCON will not collide with TIE INTERCEPTORS. \ RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch Position "A": The DEATH RAY moves across the entire length of the screen. \ Position "B": The DEATH RAY only moves from one side of the DEATH STAR to the other. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ When you press the "FIRE" button, your first of six MILLENNIUM FALCONS will appear in the lower, center portion of the screen. The remaining MILLENNIUM FALCONS are shown at the bottom of the screen. \ Try to shoot down as many TIE INTERCEPTORS as possible before they blast you with their lasers, or speed off and circle back for another attack. And keep a look out for the ever-searching DEATH RAY! \ Eliminate a number of TIE INTERCEPTORS and you'll notice random openings appearing in the DEATH STAR's energy shield. When the shield's outermost gray energy band is deactivated, and there is an opening in the shield, guide your ship through it. Upon penetrating this opening, you'll enter into HYPERSPACE and arrive at the DEATH STAR. \ Fire your lasers at the DEATH STAR in order to knock out pieces of its outer wall. But beware of the DEATH RAY! It will track your every move, trying to destroy your ship. Eliminate as much of the DEATH STAR as possible (to maximize your bonus points), before you finally aim and fire on the energy core. When you hit it, be ready to outrun the explosion of fireballs before they reach your ship! \ \ Aboard the IMPERIAL SHUTTLE rides a well known figure - THE DARK LORD! Randomly throughout the battle, you'll hear a "warning" sound. This means that the IMPERIAL SHUTTLE is approaching. If it collides with your MILLENNIUM FALCON, your ship is destroyed. But one well placed laser shot to its upper body and you'll vaporize this SHUTTLE in its tracks! YOU GAIN 3000 BONUS POINTS! \ \ Fireballs are more than hot, they're DEADLY! It only takes one to blow your ship apart. But the trick is to avoid them for as long as possible. The longer you do, the higher your bonus points. \ The game ends when you have lost all of your MILLENNIUM FALCONS. Begin another round by pressing the "Fire" button. [Star Wars: The Empire Strikes Back] File=/rom/EmpireStrikesBack.a26 Platform=Parker Brothers Sort=Star Wars 2 Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The Empire's revenge has begun! Right now an army of Imperial Walkers is marching toward the Rebels' power generator on the Ice Planet Hoth. Use the force to destroy as many of the Imperial Walkers as you can before they reach the power generator at the end of the battlefield - or before the Imperial Walkers destroy your fleet of Snowspeeders. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1-4: 1 Player - No Variation (eaisest to hardest) \ GAME 5-8: 1 Player - Smart Bombs (Easiest to hardest) \ GAME 9-12: 1 Player - Solid Walkers (eaisest to hardest) \ GAME 13-16: 1 Player - Smart Bombs & Solid Walkers (eaisest to hardest) \ GAME 17-20: 2 Player - No Variation (eaisest to hardest) \ GAME 21-24: 2 Player - Smart Bombs (Easiest to hardest) \ GAME 25-28: 2 Player - Solid Walkers (eaisest to hardest) \ GAME 29-32: 2 Player - Smart Bombs & Solid Walkers (eaisest to hardest) \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Player 1 uses the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch. Player 2 uses the RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch. Set the DIFFICULTY switch: \ Position "A" - The landing pad where you repair your snowspeeder is made smaller. \ Position "B" - The landing pad is made larger. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick to fly your Snowspeeder. Snowspeeders can fly left, right, up, and down. Your Snowspeeder can accelerate in all four directions, too. To slow it down, simply change directions. \ Press the red button to fire your missiles. [Stargate] File=/rom/Stargate.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Stargate Year=1984 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Stone Age] File=/rom/StoneAge.a26 Platform=CCE Sort=Stone Age Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ This is the same game as the never released Stone Age from TechnoVision. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Strategy X] File=/rom/Strategyx.a26 Platform=Konami Sort=Strategy X Year=2010 Genre=Action Description=Your mission is to attack strange immortalians violently. Advance by controlling the lever. Aim and get the enemy in any direction. Their attack patterns will differ as they advance. Find their weak points for the shortest way to clear. Fuel will be supplied as the tank gets to the section FUEL. Keep away from “slip zone”, where the controlling is difficult. Firing at random only causes shortage in fuel. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between a one or two player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. Press the controller button to fire. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your mission is to attack and destroy the enemy. Attack the enemy from any direction. Their strategy will change as they get closer, so try to find their weakness quickly. Keep away from the slip zone, where control of the tank is difficult. And don't waste fuel by firing at random. [Strip Off] File=/rom/Stripoff.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Strip off Year=2009 Genre=Homebrew Description=Destroy the alien ships before they steal your planetary barrier! For one player. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left joystick, for this one player gamer. Move left and right with the joystick. Press the controller button to shoot. \ \ Push the joystick up to move up and push the joystick down to move down. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET to begin. \ \ Score points by killing the alien ships. The game ends when all of your barrier blocks have been stripped away by the invading aliens. \ \ You score 30 points for each alien destroyed. When you are down to 10 barrier chunks left the alien doubles in speed! Your barrier gets replenished every 900 points (30 alien kills). [Sub Scan] File=/rom/SubScan.a26 Platform=SEGA Sort=Sub Scan Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Subterranea] File=/rom/Subterranea.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Subterranea Year=1983 Genre=imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Summer Games] File=/rom/SummerGames.a26 Platform=Epyx Sort=Summer Games Year=1987 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Super Challenge Baseball] File=/rom/ChallBaseball.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Super Challenge Baseball Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to score the most runs in 9 innings or extra innings to a decision. Most professional baseball rules apply - 3 strikes for an out, 4 balls for a walk, first 2 fould balls count as strikes. Each player controls an 8-man team. One team fields while the other team is up to bat. Home runs, force-outs, double and triple plays can all be made. Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start, press the RESET switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Only the LEFT Difficulty Switch makes any difference in game play. In "B" position, all baserunners AUTOMATICALLY advance one base after a hit. You do not control baserunners. \ In "A" position, you control the LEAD baserunner. After a hit, all runners except the lead runner, automatically advance one base. Lead runner may move HALFWAY to the next base (if another runner is moving to occupy the base he was on). You must move him the rest of the way. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Each player controls an 8-man team. HOME team is BLUE. VISITORS are RED and always bat first. During the game, the man you select to control changes shape. \ When your team is up to bat, you control the batter. When the pitch is right, swing away (by pushing the red button). Timing on your swing determines where the ball goes. All hits are grounders, so the batter cannot fly out (not even on fouls). If you play the more difficult game, you control the lead baserunner, so you can steal bases. \ When your team is in the field, you control any one man at a time - pitcher, baseman or fielder. Pitch inside or outside, or lay the ball right over the plate. Move a fielder to catch your opponent's hit. Then throw the ball to a baseman or tag the runner for the put-out! \ Scoreboard automatically displays Home score, Visitors score, balls, strikes, outs and inning being played. Scoreboard disappears during actual play. IF THE SCORE IS TIED AFTER 9 INNINGS, YOU GO INTO EXTRA INNINGS TO A DECISION. Inning number on the scoreboard does not advance beyond 9. \ \ TO PITCH: \ For INSIDE PITCH, push joystick LEFT. For STRAIGHT PITCH, push joystick DOWN. \ For OUTSIDE PITCH, push joystick RIGHT. For FAST PITCH, push joystick DOWN. For SLOW PITCH, push joystick UP. \ FOR A FAST PITCH, pull the joystick DOWN. \ FOR A SLOW PITCH, push the joystick UP. \ Change pitch while the ball is in the air, by moving the joystick. \ \ TO RETURN THE BALL TO THE PITCHER, press the red button. \ \ TO FIELD: Hold red button down while you push joystick UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT. Push joystick once for infielder, twice for outfielder. \ \ To BAT: To swing, press the red button. To move a runner, push joystick right to move runner FORWARD. Push joystick left to move runner back. [Super Challenge Football] File=/rom/ChallFootball.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Super Challenge Football Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The object of the game is to out-score your opponent. There's passing, rushing, blocking, and touchdowns! Simulated 15 minute quarters. You set both offense and defense. Individual control of both the quarterback and linebacker. Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start, press the RESET switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ One player controls the Home Team, the other player controls the Visitors. There are 5 men on offense: 4 linemen and the quarterback. There's a 5 man defense: 4 linemen and the linebacker. The team with the flashing ball has possession. \ The field is regulation 100 yards. Each quarter begins on the 20 yard line. As a team moves downfield, the field moves too! The score, time left in the quarter and first down markers are displayed during play. During the huddle you will see downs and the quarter of play. \ There's passing, rushing, tackling, interceptions and incompletes. No kicks! No out of bounds. Touchdowns count 7 points (point after touchdown is automatic), 2 points for a safety. \ \ OFFENSIVE PLAY CALLING: Before each play, when the teams are lined up on the field, program the 4 linemen. Before being programmed, each lineman faces the quarterback. After being programmed, each lineman faces the opposing team. Now choose one of five running patterns, and program all 4 linemen. \ Here's how: \ Push red button, without moving joystick: designates the actual pass receiver. \ Push up: offensive player will block upward. \ Push down: offensive player will block downward. \ Push left or right toward quarterback: offensive player will block straight ahead. \ Push left or right toward other team: offensive player will go out for a pass as decoy receiver. \ \ DEFENSIVE PLAY CALLING: Before each play, when the teams are lined up on the field, program the 4 defensive linemen. Before being programmed, each lineman faces the linebacker. After being programmed, he faces the opposing team. Now choose one of four defensive moves, and program all 4 defensive linemen. \ Here's how: \ Push up: defensive player will rush up then go for QB. \ Push down: defensive player will rush down then go for QB. \ Push left or right toward other team: defensive player will rush offensive player straight on then rush the QB. \ Push left or right toward linebacker: defensive player covers offensive counterpart going out for a pass. \ \ TO HIKE: After all the offensive and defensive men have been programmed, offense presses the RED BUTTON to hike the ball. Once the ball is hiked, linemen carry our their programmed patterns. \ \ TO RUN: Once the ball is hiked, control the quarterback and linebacker with your respective joysticks. \ \ TO PASS: Once the ball is hiked, press the RED BUTTON and the quarterback passes the ball towards the receiver. Once the pass is in motion, the Joystick controls the receiver. Move him to complete the pass. [Superman] File=/rom/Superman.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Superman Year=1978 Genre=atari Description=Play as Superman and capture Lex Luthor and his gang while also finding parts to rebuild the destroyed bridge! Look out for wandering Kryptonite satellites that will zap you and steal your strength! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ The Superman Game Program can be played by one or two people. As a two-player game, teamwork is required between the players for Superman to avoid the Kryptonite Satellites and to capture Lex Luthor and his gang. \ The player using the left Joystick Controller will have priority over the left and right movements of Superman, while the player using the right controller will have priority over the up and down movements of Superman. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button functions as PAUSE. To restart move the joystick in any direction.\ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. The joystick button activates X-Ray vision. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The RIGHT difficulty switch controls the speed of Lex Luthor, his gang, and the Kryptonite satellites. \ Position A: Fast \ Position B: Slow \ The LEFT difficulty switch controls the behaviour of Lois Lane. \ Position A: You must find Lois \ Postion B: Lois will appear when you are zapped by Kryptonite \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of this game is to put all the crooks behind bars, rebuild the Bridge, change back into Clark Kent and go to the Daily Planet in the shortest amount of time. \ There is a timer at the top of the playfield that is incremented in minutes and seconds. It will start when you move the Joystick after depressing either Game Reset or Game Select, and stops when Clark Kent enters the Daily Planet. \ There are six markers at the top of the playfield; the largest represents Lex Luthor, the other represent his henchmen. As each crook is put into Jail, one of these markers will disappear. \ Each "frame" denotes a city block of Metropolis. They are connected at each of the four adjoining sides. You can pass through all the city blocks of Metropolis by flying either east (right) or west (left). Flying north (up) or south (down) continually will miss the phone booth and the Bridge. \ You can enter the Metropolis Subway System through the "doorway" of any of the four subway stations. Once inside, to stay within the Subway System, you must move upward (north), as each of the four different colored areas are connected at the top. \ To exit into the city from the Subway System, move east (right), west (left), or south (down). Each of the four different colored areas will exit into a different portion of Metropolis. For example, exiting west from the pink section will bring you to the Jail; exiting west from the yellow section will bring you to the Daily Planet. \ There is a room inside the Daily Planet that is entered by passing through the "doorway" of the building. Once inside, you must go through the Subway System before you can exit into the city. \ If you lose Lois Lane into the Daily Planet, she will tend to stay there. But... if the Helicopter goes by outside the building, she will come out to see what is going on and wander off. \ USING THE CONTROLLER \ If you are above or below "street level", you can fly in any direction by moving your joystick as shown in the diagram. \ If you have been "zapped" by a Kryptonite satellite or are in your guise as Clark Kent, you can only walk to the right or left, unless you are in the Subway System or inside the Daily Planet. Then you can walk in any direction. \ To land, return the Joystick to the center or "neutral" position. If you are above "street level" you will float down to "street level", where you can walk. If you are below "street level", you will float down to the city block below. \ To capture a crook, or to carry Lois Lane or pieces of the Bridge, you must touch them while flying. To release them, land by returning the Joystick to neutral. \ To rebuild the Metropolis Memorial Bridge, all three pieces must be between the two buildings. As the third piece of the Bridge touches the other two, the Bridge will be complete. \ To put Lex Luthor or one of his henchmen in Jail, fly through the bars of the Jail while carrying the crook. When you do this, the crook's "marker" at the top of the playfield will disappear. \ If you land while carrying a crook, he will try to escape. \ X-RAY VISION \ X-Ray vision enables you to see into one of the four adjoining frames. Press the red controller button and move the Joystick in the direction in which you wish to see. Be careful! You will not move while using your X-Ray Vision, but the Kryptonite Satellites will, and they can "zap" you when you are looking elsewhere. [Sword Fight] File=/rom/SwordFight.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Sword Fight Year=1982 Genre=console Description=Two knights face each other at the edge of the universe. They slowly advance on each other, their laser swords tightly gripped as they prepare to fight to the death. Destroy your opponent before being destroyed yourself. Show no mercy; there can be only one! Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. To start the game, press the RESET switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Each fighter draws his sword by pressing the RED BUTTON. \ You have three offesnive swings and three defensive blocks controlled by the joystick. Advance and retreat by pressing the RED BUTTON. \ At the beginning of the game, each fighter stands on four energy platforms. With every three hits to a fighter, one of that fighter's energy platforms disappears. \ After 12 hits, the fighter fades away. The other fighter is victorious!\ \ OFFENSIVE SWINGS \ Left Swing: UP-LEFT \ Overhead Swing: UP \ Right Swing: Up-Right \ \ DEFENSIVE BLOCKS \ Left Block: LEFT \ Overhead Block: DOWN \ Right Block: RIGHT [Tac-Scan] File=/rom/TacScan.a26 Platform=Sega Sort=Tac-Scan Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description=Squadron alert! Enermy ships are approaching your command base. All that stands between you and annihilation is your five-ship squadron. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no fuction in the game. Press START to abort the game. Press the "FIRE" button to begin. \ \ 2. Use paddle controller. \ Paddle-based game. It may not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You begin with no reserve ships. Every time you complete a round by shooting 10 enemies, you are awarded a reserve ship. You will need to manueuver your squadron to allow the new reserve ship to "dock" within the fighting formation. If you miss the "docking" ship, it will fly past your sqaudron, and the next round begins. Missed ships are not lost; These and other reserve ships are stored off-screen for deployment during the docking maneuver. \ When you complete four rounds, the game automatically advances to the next difficulty (the screen colors change and a special sound is heard.) \ Spin your controller to move left or right to evade pursue enemy craft. You will travel in the direction yout squadron is pointing. Press the "FIRE" button to launch you missles. [Tapper] File=/rom/Tapper.a26 Platform=Sega Sort=Tapper Year=1983 Genre=console Description=You are a frenzied bartender trying to keep the never-ending flow of thirsty customers well-watered. You'll have to keep slinging sodas and occasionally guess which cans of soda the Soda Bandit has shaken. As if that's not enough work for one bartender, try covering four different bars with a different crazy crowd in each bar. Keep the sodas coming, but not too fast. You'd better be sure you've got a customer without a drink at the bar or the drink will slide right off the bar and no self-respecting bartender throws drinks away. Keep your eyes open for the empties the customers sling back your way. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose 1 or 2 player game. Press START or your controller's "FIRE" button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ BOTH DIFFICULTY switches are used together to select game difficulty level. \ LEFT & RIGHT DIFFICULTY in the "B" position - Beginners, five lives with slow-moving customers. \ LEFT DIFFICULTY on "B" and RIGHT DIFFICULTY on "A" - Intermediate, three lives with slow-moving customers. \ LEFT DIFFICULTY on "A" and RIGHT DIFFICULTY on "B" - Arcade, five lives with fast-moving customers. \ LEFT & RIGHT DIFFICULTY in the "A" position - Expert, three lives with fast-moving customers. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use your joystick control to move your Bartender accordingly: \ Up - Bartender moves up to next bar. \ Left - Bartender moves left along bar. \ Right - Bartender moves right along bar. \ Down - Bartender moves down to next bar. \ \ If you move your Bartender down all the way to the bottom bar and you continue to press the joystick down, he will automatically wrap around to the top bar. If you move your Bartender all the way to the top bar and continue to press the joystick up, he will automatically wrap around to the bottom bar. \ \ Push the "Action Button" for the Bartender to fill the mugs. You have to keep the Bartender in place while filling mugs. The mugs will not go to customers unless they are full. \ \ Tapper consists of five separate game screens. The Old West Saloon, the Jock Bar, the Punk Bar, the Space Bar, and the Bonus Round which occurs between each of the four bar scenes. In order to advance through each of the screens comprising the different bar scenes, you must successfully serve each of the customers as they approach you at each bar. When a customer finishes his soda, he'll sling his mug back to the bartender. The Bartender must catch the empty mug, or you lose a life. At the end of a round, a trio of dancing girls appear on the stage. \ \ In the Bonus Round, The Soda Bandit challenges the Bartender to a sodacan version of the old-fashioned shell game. Push the ACTION button to open the can you have chosen. If you have chosen the unshaken soda can, you receive a 3,000-point bonus to the sound of the Bonus Tune. If, however, you have mistakenly opened one of the cans the Soda Bandit has shaken, you'll get a shot of soda sprayed in your face. [Taz] File=/rom/Taz.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Taz Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Snack Attack! You are TAZ, the ravenous Tasmanian Devil who whirls like a tornado and eats everything in sight. Hamburgers, root beer, ice cream - you are jazzed by such junk! But look out, sometimes your feeding is so frenzied that you accidentally swallow dynamite! POW! What a bellyache! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose 1 or 2 player game. Press the red "FIRE" button on your controller to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your objective is to glut on every edible item that comes your way to achieve the fattest score possible while you stay alive as long as possible. \ \ TAZ is an eating contest composed of three unbalanced meals. Each meal consists of eight courses. After you eat 50 items of one course, the next course is served. As you progress through the courses, the food moves faster and arrives more frequently. When you finish all eight courses of one meal, you immediately start the next. In each of the three meals the same food is served in the same sequence - you start with hamburgers and end with sundaes. If you devour all three meals, you are rewarded with a surprise "dessert." \ \ After you finish the fudgesicle course in the first meal, the game pauses and the words CRAZED WAVE appear on the screen. This is a warning that from here on the game gets crazier because the food is served faster and faster. [Tennis] File=/rom/Tennis.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Tennis Year=1981 Genre=atvi Description=Tennis is as exciting as a sports game can get on the 2600, especially when played against a buddy rather than the computer. The intuitive gameplay allows you to hit the ball at many angles, depending on where on your racket you hit the ball. The game is scored just like real tennis, meaning a set between two good players can be extremely competitive and last quite a while if the score is continually tied up at "deuce." Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose game variation. Press START to begin game. \ Game 1: You against the Activision computer pro (full speed). \ Game 2: You against a friend (full speed). \ Game 3: You against the Activision computer pro (slow motion). \ Game 4: You against a friend (slow motion). \ NOTE: In games 1 and 3, you are the orange player; the computer pro is the blue player. On black and with TVs, the orange player is white and the blue player black. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With DIFFICULTY switches in the "B" (down) position, players can hit shots at a wide variety of angles - some of them very sharp. \ With switches in the "A" (up) position, the widest-angle shots are eliminated. \ LEFT DIFFICULTY affects orange player \ RIGHT DIFFICULY affects blue player. Set difficulty switches at "B" (down) to start. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ To serve: Use the Joystick to position your player, then push the red button to serve. The red button is used for serving only. After serving, players will swing automatically if they are in position to return a shot. \ \ The left joystick controls the orange player in all games. The right joystick controls the blue player in games 2 and 4. Moving the joystick left moves your player left, and moving it right moves him right. Push forward or pull back to move to and from the net. Before each serve, you can only move to the right or left. During game action, you can move in all directions. [The Texas Chainsaw Massacre] File=/rom/TexasChain.a26 Platform=Wizard Video Sort=Texas Chainsaw Massacre Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Threshold] File=/rom/Threshold.a26 Platform=Tigervision Sort=Threshold Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Thunderground] File=/rom/Thunderground.a26 Platform=SEGA Sort=Thunderground Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Time Pilot] File=/rom/TimePilot.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Time Pilot Year=1983 Genre=console Description=You're caught in a time warp! Earn your wings against ruthless enemy aircraft from the dawn of aviation to the superjet age and finally to the future! TIME PILOT takes you through the decades as you face enemies from five time periods: 1910, 1940, 1970, 1983 and 2001! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. Press START to begin the game.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2.\ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the DIFFICULTY Switches to select number of players and Skill Level: \ Skill 1/One Player — left B/right B \ Skill 2/0ne Player — left B/right A \ Skill 3/0ne Player - left A/right B \ Skill 3/Two Players - left A/right A \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your Timeship turns to face the direction in which you press the Control Stick. The Timeship stops turning when it reaches that direction. If you release the Control Stick, the Timeship stops turning immediately. \ \ Press and release the "FIRE" Button to make your Timeship fire bullets in the direction it faces. Tap a button to fire a short burst. \ \ In each level, players battle enemy aircraft and then a stronger aircraft. Players' fighter jet is in the center of the screen at all times. Players eventually battle a mothership of the time period they are in; once the mothership is defeated, they move onto the next time period. [Titlematch Pro Wrestling] File=/rom/ProWrestling.a26 Platform=Absolute Sort=Titlematch Prowrestling Year=1987 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Tomcat: The F-14 Flight Simulator] File=/rom/Tomcat.a26 Platform=Absolute Sort=Tomcat Year=1988 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ Lançado pela Activision como Fighter Pilot. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Towering Inferno] File=/rom/ToweringInferno.a26 Platform=US Games Sort=Towering Inferno Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Track & Field] File=/rom/TrackField.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Track & Field Year=1984 Genre=atari Description=Welcome, sports fans! It’s a clear and sunny 70 degrees here at the Coliseum – a perfect day for our contestants to demonstrate their gold medal potential in six classic Olympic events. We’ve got some tremendous competition here today for what promises to be an action-packed afternoon. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to choose a one or two player game and one of three difficulty levels: NOVICE, ARCADE, or EXPERT. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the player one, or left, joystick, for one player games, and the player two, or right, joystick, for the the second player in two player games. \ \ Move the joystick left and right to run. Hold down joystick button to set an angle; release to jump, or to throw the hammer or javelin. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press GAME RESET or the joystick button to being play. \ \ You compete in six events. Before proceeding to the next event, you must earn a qualifying score by beating the qualifying time or distance for that event. \ \ 1. 100-METER DASH... and they’re coming down to the wire... \ - Race to the finish line as fast as you can. \ - You run in head-to-head competition with either the computer or your opponent. \ - You have one try to qualify. \ - If you run before the starter’s gun goes off, you foul. Three fouls and you’re out of the race. \ Hint: To make the best time, go as fast as you can! \ \ 2. LONG JUMP... an unofficial new on that one!... \ - Get a running start to the sand, set your angle... then jump. \ - It’s you against the tape measure as you try to beat your opponent’s record. \ - You have three tries to qualify. \ - Be sure to set your angle and jump before you reach the sand. If you run into the sand, you foul. \ Hint: Try to set your angle at 45 degrees. \ \ 3. JAVELIN... ooh! That was one tremendous toss!... \ - Get a running start to the white line that crosses the track, set your angle, then throw the javelin. \ - It’s you against the tape measure. \ - You have three tries to qualify. \ - Be sure to set your angle and throw before you reach the grass. If you cross over on to the grass, you foul. \ Hint: Try to set your angle at 45 degrees to maximize throw. \ \ 4. 110-METER HURDLES... Guns up for the final heat! \ - Race to each hurdle, then jump. You must jump over ten hurdles. \ - You run in head-to-head competition with either the computer or your opponent. \ - You have one try to qualify. \ - If you run before the starter’s gun goes off, you foul. Three fouls and you’re out of the race. \ Hint: If you hit the hurdles, it’ll slow you down! \ \ 5. HAMMER THROW... Crank it up! Make that hammer fly!... \ - To start, push the joystick once to the right or left. As you circle around and pick up speed, throw the hammer. \ - It’s you against the tape measure. \ - You have three tries to qualify. \ - Hold down the button to increase your angle. \ - You’ll foul if you throw the hammer outside of the white lines or wait too long to throw. \ Hint: Watch for the player to turn red, and then throw! \ \ 6. HIGH JUMP... and he’ll be tough to beat! \ - To get a running start, push the joystick once to the right or left, set your angle, then jump. \ - You and your opponents take turns. \ - You’ll foul if you touch the cross bar or if you run into the mat. \ Hint: Jump as close as possible to the bar, then control your fall by readjusting your angle. [Trick Shot] File=/rom/TrickShot.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Trick Shot Year=1982 Genre=imagic Description=Name your game: Pool, English Billiards, or Trickshot combinations test your poise and accuracy, while 9 Practice Shots allow you to refine your skills even further. Line up with your joystick-controlled cue. Decide how powerful an impact to apply and use just the right amount of "English." One or two players compete for the winner's trophy, striving all the while to perfect each shot. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose one of the 14 game variations. Press START or the joystick "FIRE" button to begin the game.\ 1T - 1-Player Trickshot \ 2T - 2-Player Trickshot \ 1P - 1-Player Pool \ 2P - 2-Player Pool \ 2B - 2-Player English Billiards \ 1... 9 - Trickshot Practice Modes \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2.\ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches control cue ball scratch options. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ With your joystick controller you determine cue placement, shot impact and the amount of "English" applied in each turn. Move joystick left or right to rotate cue around cue ball - there are 32 possible cue positions. \ \ To take a shot, press the red "FIRE" joystick button. The longer you hold the red button down, the harder the cue hits the cue ball. For a light touch, press and release button immediately. For maximum impact, hold button down for 5 seconds. \ \ Scores appear on the blue strip at the bottom of the screen. The black ball at the center of the strip indicates which player's turn it is. At the end of a turn in a 2-player game, the ball shifts to the other player's score. At the end of every game, a trophy appears in the place of the black ball. The high scorer wins. [Tron: Deadly Discs] File=/rom/TronDeadlyDiscs.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Tron 2 Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The ultimate in futuristic adventure! Based on the Motion Picture from Walt Disney Productions. Move TRON safely through battle against warriors attacking in waves of three against one. Lethal saucers are the weapons. Score points by knocking them out before they get TRON! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button has no function in the game. Move the joystick to begin the game.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch: \ "A" - Faster, more challenging game. \ "B" - Slower, easier game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ TRON is alone, standing in the center of an arena with walls on all sides. Three doors open and three computer-controlled attackers enter the ring. The contest is on! Warriors more around throwing destroyer discs. Split-second reflexes keep TRON in motion, dodging their deadly aim. Keep him moving...he can only withstand 5 hits before he is "de-rezzed". \ \ Fire back and hit as many of them as possible. Warriors destroyed by TRON's disc are replaced every 10 seconds, unless you clear the board by getting them before they get him. If you succeed in knocking down all of his opponents before the replacements arrive, you advance a scoring level. This increases the point value of each opponent hit. As your score goes higher, warriors become faster, more aggressive, their discs speed up, and they throw them more often. \ \ TRON's disk is thrown by depressing the red FIRE BUTTON on the Joystick controller. It travels in one of the eight directions as indicated by which way the joystick is being held at the time the button is pushed. The disc returns to TRON after it travels far enough to reach one of the walls. It can also be recalled to TRON at any time while it is in flight simply by depressing the FIRE BUTTON a second time. \ \ TELEPORTING: Often there will be two entrances opposite each other across the arena which will have been locked open. Together they provide a mechanism with which TRON can "teleport" himself across the screen, disabling enemy shooting for about two seconds. Simply direct TRON into one of the par of entrances. The entrance from which he is "teleported" is then closed. [Tunnel Runner] File=/rom/TunnelRunner.a26 Platform=CBSElectronics Sort=Tunnel Runner Year=1983 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Turmoil] File=/rom/Turmoil.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Turmoil Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Up'n Down] File=/rom/UpNDown.a26 Platform=SEGA Sort=Up N Down Year=1984 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Vangaurd] File=/rom/Vanguard.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Vanguard Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Your goal is to reach the City of Mystery at the end of the tunnel and destroy Gond. In the tunnel zones, you maneuver around sharp rocks and barriers while battling weird flying objects. The more enemy objects you destroy, the more points you earn. If you make it to the City of Mystery and shoot Gond, you earn bonus points. But watch out! Gond could shoot you instead. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose 1 or 2 player game. Press START to begin the game or reset to Tunnel 1.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches control the way the spaceship fires. Set the LEFT and RIGHT switches for the method that suits you best. You can change switch settings any time you like. \ 1. Left "A", Right "A": Press the red controller button and move the Joystick in the direction you want to fire. Release the button to stop firing. \ 2. Left "A", Right "B": Same as method 1 except that you do not have to move the Joystick forward to fire forward. The forward laser gun fires automatically when the red button is pressed. \ 3. Left "B", Right "A": Move the Joystick in the direction you want to fire. Press the red button to stop firing. \ 4. Left "B", Right "B": Same as method 3 except that the forward gun fires automatically. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The player controls a ship urged along a surrounding conduit and with a limited amount of fuel that constantly depletes. Fuel is replenished by destroying enemies, so running out of fuel is less common. Some portions of Vanguard scroll vertically, horizontally or diagonally. \ \ The ship can fire lasers independently in any of the four cardinal directions using the four buttons. Flying into an energy pod makes the ship invulnerable for a short while, allowing both enemy ships and the tunnel walls to be destroyed by ramming. \ \ The game is divided into two tunnels of multiple zones each. The first tunnel consists of Mountain Zone, Rainbow Zone, Styx Zone, Rainbow Zone 2, Stripe Zone, Rainbow Zone 3, Bleak Zone, and the City of Mystery/Last Zone. The second tunnel consists of Mountain Zone, Stripe Zone, Styx Zone, Rainbow Zone, Bleak Zone, and the City of Mystery/Last Zone. \ \ At the end of each tunnel the player must defeat a boss guarded by two moving force fields with holes in them. [Venture] File=/rom/Venture.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Venture 1 Year=1981 Genre=atari Description=The goal of Venture is to collect treasure from a dungeon as a round smiley-face named Winky. Note= \ Player Mode:Single-player game \ \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. Press the START (Reset) switch to begin. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the Left and Right Difficulty switches to select a skill level from 1 to 4. (Level 1 is the easiest and 4 the most difficult.) \ \ Skill Switch \ Level Setting \ 1 left B/right B \ 2 left B/right A \ 3 left A/right B \ 4 left A/right A \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Hold the joystick so that the fire button is on the top-left corner \ Move the joystick handle left, right, up, or down to make Winky run. \ Position the joystick handle in the direction you want Winky to shoot an arrow. [Walt Disney: Sorcerer's Apprentice] File=/rom/SorcerersApprentice.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Walt Disney Sorcerers Apprentice Year=1983 Genre=atari Description=Here you have to help Mickey stop the brooms before the Sorcerer's cavern gets flooded. Note= \ Player Mode:Single-player game \ \ 1. Instructions. \ The object of SORCERER'S APPRENTICE is to help Mickey prevent the cavern from flooding by stopping the stars that fall between the mountain peaks. These stars are turning into a broom with a water-filled bucket in the Cavern. These brooms are then dumping the water into the cavern. \ To prevent the Cavern from flooding, you must help Mickey catch stars with the Sorcerer's magic hat which Mickey is wearing, hit stars with his magic fireballs or hit meteors with fireballs. Each meteor you hit turns into two empty buckets that can bail out water in the Cavern. \ Use the Water Level Guide at the bottom of the screen to find out how much water is in the Cavern. When you hear a "swoosh" sound, that means a star has created a broom. The SORCERER'S APPRENTICE tune signals that a broom has dumped a bucket of water in the Cavern. If the water level gets too high you may still be able to stop the brooms by going into the cavern. \ \ The Cavern \ To enter the Cavern, simply run Mickey off the far right or far left side of the Mountain screen. He will descend through a passageway before entering the Cavern. When Mickey enters the Cavern, he will be at the top of a large staircase. Even while Mickey is in the Cavern, stars are still creating more brooms with water-filled buckets. \ \ Your task is to: \ Stop the brooms from reaching the bottom of the staircase by running Mickey into them. \ Clear a path for your empty buckets to climb up the stairs - stop the brooms as quickly as possible! \ To return to the Mountains, run Mickey back up through the Cavern doorway which is quicker than running off either side of the Cavern stairway. \ \ 2. Select Button \ There are 4 game variations: Games 1-4 are Slow, Medium, Super Sonic, Beginner. \ \ 3. Use joystick controllers. \ To catch stars: Center Mickey under a falling star. If the star lands safely in the magic hat, you will hear the bell tone. \ To throw fireballs: Press the red controller button. Then use your Joystick to guide the fireball through the sky. \ To stop brooms in the Cavern: Run Mickey directly in front of a broom. He must cover the broom completely for it to stop. When a broom is stopped, you will hear a "swoosh" sound and the broom will disappear. \ \ 4. Difficulty switches. \ Use your LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to adjust Mickey's throwing ability: In position A Mickey throws one fireball each time you press the red fire button; in position B Mickey throws fireballs continuously when the red fire button is held down. \ \ 5. Hints. \ Use the SOUND GUIDE to help you learn the different game sounds. Sounds are especially helpful in the Mountain scene because they let you know what is happening in the Cavern. \ Bell tone: When you hit or catch a star \ Four rising notes: When you hit a meteor, creating two empty buckets \ "Swoosh" sound: When a broom is created or stopped \ SORCERER'S APPRENTICE tune: When the water level changes \ In the Cavern, try placing Mickey on different parts of the staircase. Find a place where you can stop most brooms. Also, don't get too close to the sides of the staircase. You could easily fall off and end up back in the Mountains. \ Run into the Cavern to stop brooms when you see the water level getting too high. \ Likewise, if you run out of empty buckets in the cavern, return to the Mountains to get more. [Warplock] File=/rom/Warplock.a26 Platform=DataAge Sort=Warplock Year=1982 Genre=paddle Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Wing War] File=/rom/WingWar.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Wing War Year=1983 Genre=Imagic Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Winter Games] File=/rom/WinterGames.a26 Platform=Epyx Sort=Winter Games Year=1987 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Wizard of Wor] File=/rom/WizardofWor.a26 Platform=CBS Sort=Wizard of Wor Year=1982 Genre=console Description=Up to two players fight together in a series of monster-infested mazes, clearing each maze by shooting the creatures. Note= \ Player Mode:Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Use the GAME SELECT switch to select either the one-player or two-player version. The version you select will be indicated by the number of score boards appearing above the dungeon. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Set the DIFFICULTY switches to B for beginner level. Setting the switches to A will result in extra sneaky Worlings.\ \ 4. Instructions. \ You begin each game with a squadron of three Worriors. Only one Worrior may enter and move about a dungeon at a time. Push up on your Joystck and a Worrior will move into the dungeon from the entrance below. \ \ Use your joystick to maneuver the Worrior through the dungeon maze. To fire the laser, press down on the red firing button. A laser will fire only in the direction that your Worrior is facing. You have an unlimited supply of ammunition. However, after a Worrior fires a shot, he cannot reshoot until that bullet makes contact with either a Worling or a wall. [Worm War I] File=/rom/WormWarI.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Worm War I Year=1982 Genre=console Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ Jogo bem simples comparada a alguns lançamentos, tendo apenas a opção de movimentação de ir para esquerda ou para a direita limitando a apenas aceleração ou desaceleração sem poder se movimentar livremente pela fase. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Xenophobe] File=/rom/Xenophobe.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Xenophobe Year=1990 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Zaxxon] File=/rom/Zaxxon.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Zaxxon 1 Year=1982 Genre=console Description=The evil robot ZAXXON and its fierce armies have conquered an asteroid belt. You must stop them before they enslave the entire galaxy! Note= \ Player Mode:Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press Select until the Game number you want appears at the top of the screen: \ 1 = Skill 1 / One Player \ 2 = Skill 2 / One Player \ 3 = Skill 3 / One Player \ 4 = Skill 4 / One Player \ 5 = Skill 1 / Two Players \ 6 = Skill 2 / Two Players \ 7 = Skill 3 / Two Players \ 8 = Skill 4 / Two Players \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Game Reset to begin the first phase. \ \ To battle: Your fighter approaches Zaxxon's first asteroid base. Fly high to avoid crashing into the first wall! Then swoop down to attack enemy targets. Watch out for return fire from turrets and dodger guns. \ Running out of fuel: Careful! Your fighter guzzles fuel as you zoom over Zaxxon's territory. Keep an eye on your fuel gauge. Fire at fuel tanks to fill up. Then slip over the gap in the wall at the end of the asteroid base and prepare for a battle in space. \ Attack in space: You've made it past Zaxxon's first ground force. Now try your skill against Zaxxon's planes in space. They can dive at you from above, below or hit you head on. Eliminate as many planes as you can in this sudden attack. \ More asteroid action: You're heading toward another asteroid. In games played at skills 2-4, some targets are protected by electronic barriers. Slip through gaps in the barriers to avoid the deadly electronic beams. \ Meet the robot Zaxxon: Pass the final barrier and your fighter no longer moves forward. A deadly force holds it back! But fortunately, you can still move up, down and sideways. Suddenly, the robot Zaxxon approaches. Only one spot on Zaxxon is vulnerable - the missile under its arm. To eliminate Zaxxon, you must shoot its missile repeatedly before it fires. If you fail, you still have a chance to hit the speeding missile and proceed to the next round of play. If you don't eliminate the missile, your fighter will be eliminated. \ \ It takes several hits to eliminate Zaxxon's missile: \ Skill Level 1........3 hits \ Skill Level 2........4 hits \ Skill Level 3........5 hits \ Skill Level 4........6 hits \ Onward through the galaxy!: Once you've gone past the robot Zaxxon, another asteroid challenges your skill and coordination. Then it's back into deep space to confront another wave of enemy fighters. \ Starting over: Keep defending the universe until you run out of fighters. To replay the Game Option that you have been playing, press Reset. To select another Game Option, press Game Select, then press Reset. [2005 MiniGame MultiCart] File=/rom/2005Minigame.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=04 2005 Minigame Multicart Year=2005 Genre=Homebrew Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Allia Quest] File=/rom/AlliaQuest.a26 Platform=Ebivision Sort=Allia Quest Year=2001 Genre=Homebrew Description=Fly through the space and destroy the Aliens before they desroy you! You must learn how the eight different Alien races move and attack. Plan you own strategy to get the next level. Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ You must Kill'em all! It's the only way to complete your quest for the mother ship Allia... \ It was a simple enough mission, return the ceremonial pants that the Prince of the Agrob system had left behind on his latest diplomatic mission to your home world. \ The journey to planet G45 was a pretty boring affair. \ Or so you thought! Not far into your mission, a squadron of ships appears on your radar, but it's not a welcoming committee! \ After the surprise of shots echoing against your hull, you scramble to get the ship into combat mode, knowing that your simple delivery mission has now turned into a fight for your life! \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Avalanche] File=/rom/Avalanche.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Avalanche Year=1982 Genre=Homebrew Description=The object of the game is to catch rocks falling from above. You start with 5 lives but if you let a rock fall to the bottom you lose one. Rocks get smaller after each line and you lose a basket. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-Player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Use select for 1 or 2 players \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use joysticks to move back and forth to catch the rocks. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. [Bee·Ball] File=/rom/BeeBall.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Bee Ball Year=2007 Genre=Homebrew Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-Player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Use select for 1 or 2 players \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use joysticks to move back and forth to catch the rocks. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. [Boulder Dash] File=/rom/BoulderDash.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Boulder Dash Year=2012 Genre=Homebrew Description= Note= \ Player Mode:Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT or RESET to restart the current cave at the cost of 1 life.\ Press SELECT and RESET to restart the game.\ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch: A for PAL or B for NTSC \ LEFT DIFFICULTY switch: A for 60Hz or B for 50Hz \ \ 4. Instructions. [Colony 7] File=/rom/Colony7.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Colony 7 Year=2007 Genre=Homebrew Description=Your mission: To defend Colony 7 from the evil Jarvians. Wave after wave of enemy fighters strafe the Colony's defensive shield, attempting to break through. You're in command of the Colony's defensive guns, unleashing a converging stream of laser fire at the attacking hordes. You must wipe out the invading craft before either the cannons or the entire Colony are destroyed. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use your joystick to steer the targeting crosshairs around the screen. The defensive cannons will automatically fire salvo after salvo towards the current crosshair position. Your goal is to completely annihilate each attacking squadron, since even a single attacker breaking through can destroy your colony. \ If the situation seems desperate, hit the fire button to activate the Mega Blaster, your special weapon that, in one blast, will empty the sky. Use it sparingly. \ Each shot drains an entire Fuel Cell, of which the Colony has only three. If you succeed in destroying a squadron, it will soon be replaced a new, even more dangerous one. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Four different types of enemies will attempt to destroy your colony! The Fighter is the most common element of the Javian fleet, \ and several of them will attack simultaneously, first blasting away the Colony's defensive shield and ultimately destroying the colony itself. \ They will also destroy your cannons if you are not careful. \ When The Advisor appears, it will guide the fighters faster to their targets, so destroy it quickly! \ The Bomber will launch a guided payload directly at one of your cannons, so you must be alert for its presence and if it succeeds in launching its bomb, destroy it before it reaches its target. \ And when The Scout enters your field of view it will call in replacement ships, so be sure to give it your utmost priority! [Conquest of Mars ] File=/rom/ConquestofMars.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Conquest of Mars Year=2006 Genre=Homebrew Description=In the year 4014, the planet Earth and the planet Mars are locked in a century-long war. The Martians have devised a plan to destroy Earth using the power from their latest weapon: the Destructo-Bomb!! The Martian forces have managed to construct five bombs and have placed them deep inside the Martian Caverns, awaiting the final command from their leader to attack!!! Do you have the skill to navigate to the depths of the Martian caverns, activate the Destructo-Bombs, and escape before they explode? Good Luck! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to select 1 player or 2 player version. Press START or your controller's "FIRE" button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT & RIGHT DIFFICULTY switches - "B" Novice (disable enemy cannons), "A" Expert (enable enemy cannons). \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Using a joystick, the player controls a ship descending into the tunnels of Mars, firing at targets along the way. The player's spacecraft features two cannons, positioned on either side of the craft, firing downwards. The player needs to avoid hitting the cavern walls, while shooting targets of opportunity along the way. Fuel tanks can be shot to add 5 points of fuel, and the craft is destroyed if it runs out. \ \ There are several different sections of the map, with easier skill levels removing the more difficult sections from the areas through which the player has to fly. The easiest skill level has only three sections, the hardest has six. On any skill level the last section of the map is a reactor, which the player lands on and thereby sets to explode. The player then has to reverse course and fly up and out of the caverns to escape before the reactor explodes. [Donkey Kong VCS] File=/rom/DonkeyKongVCS.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Donkey Kong 1D Year=2017 Genre=Homebrew Description=Donkey Kong the ape has kidnapped Mario's girlfriend! Move Mario through incredible dangers to save her. Your speed and skill will determine your score. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function. Start the game by pressing the red button on the Joystick. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick to control the Mario up the ladders and ramps toward Donkey Kong to save his girlfriend. Mario can't climb on broken ladders. Press the red button to have Mario jump over rolling barrels and menacing fireballs. Jump up and grab a hammer to destroy an oncoming barrel or fireball to score extra points. Hammers disappear after a few seconds. The Score/Bonus indicator counts down throughout each level. If it reaches zero before Mario gets to the top, he is elminiated! [Draconian] File=/rom/Draconian.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Draconian Year=2014 Genre=Homebrew Description=As pilot of the Space Fighter Draconian, your mission is to destroy enemy space stations – sector by sector – until they’re all wiped out! Your task won’t be easy - the enemy stations will relentlessly attack you with aggressive missiles and a barrage of defensive fire. Formations of missiles will gang up and hunt you down. But if you take out the lead missile, the others will scatter! If you see one of the enemy’s Spy Ships you need to destroy it immediately! If it escapes, it will report your position, and then... The enemy will throw everything it has at you. Can you survive long enough to move onto the next sector? Good luck! The galaxy is counting on you! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function. Use joystick to navigate main menu and select difficulty (Level: 1-6) and TV type. Press START or your controller's "FIRE" button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT & RIGHT DIFFICULTY switches should be left in the "B" position throughout play. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The objective of Draconian is to score as many points as possible by destroying enemy missiles and bases. The player controls a small fighter ship that can move in eight directions and can fire both forward and backward. Each round consists of a number of green enemy bases that must all be destroyed to advance to the next round (a semi-transparent automap helps identify their location). Each station consists of six cannons arranged in a hexagon, surrounding a central core. The player must either destroy all six cannons (200 points each) or shoot the core to destroy a station (1,500 points), and in later rounds the core is capable of defending itself (opening and closing while launching missiles). \ \ Additionally, the player must avoid or destroy stationary asteroids (10 points), mines (20 points), and a variety of enemy missiles and ships which attempt to collide with his or her ship. Enemy bases will also occasionally launch a squadron of ships in formation attacks — destroying the leader causes all remaining enemies to disperse but destroying all enemies in a formation scores extra bonus points. A spy ship (worth a random bonus value) will also appear occasionally, which must be destroyed, or the round will go to "condition red" regardless of how long the player has taken. [Fall Down] File=/rom/FallDown.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Fall Down Year=2005 Genre=Homebrew Description=Fall Down pits the ever-opposed forces of RED and BLUE* against each other in an ultimate battle to capture scrolling platforms! The first player to fall past a platform captures it and scores a point. Taking time to collect power-ups can give some advantage, but taking too long only results in death at the top of the screen. Watch out, because as you progress, the platforms slowly accelerate! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2). \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose game variation options. Press START to begin the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or Left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or Right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ DIFFICULTY switches independently control whether players wrap around ("B" - amateur) or bounce off ("A" - pro) the edge of the screen. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The first player to fall past a platform captures it and scores a point. \ \ Pass-by mode allows the players to pass by each other, instead of bouncing off each other as in the other modes. \ \ Invisibility mode alternates the background color so that one of the players is invisible for a short time. \ \ Occasionally you can collect power-ups, which are then displayed under your score. Pressing "FIRE" will use all the power-ups you've collected, but the effects vary based on how many you have" \ 1. gives a short speed boost. \ 2. digs a hole in the platform beneath you. \ 3. gives a long speed boost. \ 4. swaps places with the other player in 2-player mode, or teleports to the bottom of the screen in 1-player mode. [Galaxian Arcade] File=/rom/GalaxianArcade.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Galaxian Arcade Year=2011 Genre=Homebrew Description=You'll be battling the same age-old threat, the Galaxian fleet but this game has a more arcade look to it. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Notes from the Commander: Welcome aboard the missile laser base. I'm Commander Champion, your training instructor. These laser bases are used to protect our \ Universe from alien attack. Each laser base carries missiles which you'll launch from your control panel. \ In your first training mission, you'll be battling an age-old threat,the Galaxian fleet, which has thrived on war and terrorism for centuries. Together, we must destroy these warmongers to maintain \ peace and tranquility over the Universe.\ Before we go into action, let's talk about Galaxian battle tactics. The Galaxian fleet always flys in formation. As one ship descends from the extreme right or extreme left it drops deadly bombs and then \ returns to original position. The Galaxian leaders, Flagships, are usually flanked by protective Escorts. The best way to get them is to \ first destroy the Escorts, then go after the Flagship. \ \ 2. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to to choose the desired skill level, 1-9. \ Level 1 is relatively slow and easy,and level 9 is fast and difficult. The higher the skill level, the faster and harder the Galaxian fleet attacks. \ \ 3. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 4. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch determines your laser base firing response mode. Set the DIFFICULTY switch to B and hold the fire button down for continuous firing. Set the DIFFICULTY switch to A and use your \ thumb to tap the fire button each time you want to fire a missile. \ \ 5. Instructions. \ Use your Joystick to slide your laser base right and left across the bottom of the screen. Press the red fire button to launch laser missiles at the Galaxian fleet. \ \ Destroy the Galaxian fleet before they blast your laser base to stardust. The fleet lines up in ranking order before plunging down to bombard your laser base. If a Galaxian survives a bombing run, he returns to his original position. \ You begin the game with three laser bases, and score points for each Galaxian destroyed with your laser missiles. You earn extra points for destroying a Galaxian in flight, and at 7000 points, you receive a bonus laser base. \ The Galaxian fleet attacks in waves. Each time you manage to destroy an entire wave, another fiercer wave is launched. \ \ 6. Hints \ Shoot escorts (red members of the Galaxian fleet) only when they are escorting a Flagship; shoot the Flagship only in flight. Doing this will help you score higher points. \ Destroy Galaxians when in flight will double your score. [Halo 2600] File=/rom/Halo2600.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Halo 2600 Year=2010 Genre=Homebrew Description=The year is 2552 and earth is at war with a powerful alien alliance called The Covenant. You are a genetically enhanced super soldier with the rank of Master Chief. The space ship you were aboard has crashed on a mysterious artificial ring world called Halo and you are surrounded by Covenant forces. You must fight your way across the many environments of the ring world and stop the Covenant from using Halo to destroy all life in the galaxy. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in the game. To start the game, press the "FIRE" button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY Switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Move Master Chief to the edge of the screen to enter the next area. Remember where you've been to keep from getting lost. The game begins with two extra lives. The number of remaining lives is displayed in the bottom left corner of the screen. \ \ ITEMS & UPGRADES \ PISTOL - Use to shoot aliens. \ SUPER PISTOL - Shoots faster. \ SHIELD - Single shot invulnerability. \ KEY - Collect colored keys to open gates of the same colors. \ SPEED BOOTS - Run faster to avoid enemy plasma rounds. \ \ ENEMIES \ Gray Elite - Slow Single Shot \ Orange Grunt - Slow Single Shot \ Red Elite - Fast Single Shot \ Red Grunt - Fast Single Shot \ Elite Squad - Slow Triple Shot \ Brute - Fast Single Shot \ Mega Elite & Grunt, Cloak Elite, Boss - ??? \ \ OBJECTS & AREAS \ Safe Objects: Trees, Energy Gates. \ Dangerous: Walls, Rocks, Alien Technol-ogy, Turrets, Exploding Aliens. \ AREA 1: Forrest \ AREA 2: Alien Base \ AREA 3: Snow \ AREA 4: Mega Forrest \ AREA 5: Snow \ AREA 6: Boss Base \ \ To shoot, press the red "FIRE" button. You must wait for your shot to reach a target before shooting again. [Juno First] File=/rom/JunoFirst.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Juno First Year=2009 Genre=Homebrew Description=There is no one left. No attack fleet. No reinforcements. Just you and a handful of reserve ships. Enemy forces are threatening the Juno colony--Earth's last defense post. You must fend off wave after wave of enemy ships, skimming dangerously above the planet's force field. How long can you hold them off? You must persevere--whoever controls Earth, must take Juno first! This is the Final War - the Last Battle. Transcending time and space, the outcome determines the fate of our Earth! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select Wave Level: 1-32 . To start the game, press the "FIRE" button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT Difficulty switch in position "B" activates "Autofire Mode". \ The LEFT Difficulty switch in position "A" activates "Rapidfire Mode". \ The RIGHT Difficulty switch in position "B" enables "Continue Mode" (each new game with continue at the highest wave of the previous game. \ The LEFT Difficulty switch in position "A" disables "Continue Mode". \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The joystick controls the players ships direction of flight. The ship can be moved in one of eight directions. The FIRE button shoots lasers in the forward direction. \ \ The game starts with the players ship flying towards the horizon where enemy aliens are seen. The player must avoid their bombs while shooting lasers with the FIRE button. \ \ During each wave, a space capsule containing an enemy astronaut momentarily appears. For bonus points, the player must hit the capsule with laser fire, which dislodges the enemy astronaut, causing him to float freely in space. The player can then capture the enemy astronaut with the ship. At this point, the screen will change colors (you are now in HYPERSPACE) and the enemy aliens stop shooting at the player's ship. The player can now shoot as many of the aliens as possible for bonus points until the screen changes back to the original color. \ \ It is advantageous to destroy the aliens as quickly as possible because their longevity allows them to become faster and more dangerous to the players ship. If the timer is allowed to decrement to zero the player loses his ship. [Lady Bug] File=/rom/LadyBug.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Lady Bug Year=2006 Genre=Homebrew Description=It's dinnertime and Lady Bug is ready to eat! Take a stroll through the garden and nibble on the rows and rows of pretty flowers. Be careful though – there are many dangerous insects that just love to eat ladybugs – and they're fast too! Block their way by swinging the gates closed, and stay away from the deadly poison. Oh – and don't forget to collect the bonus prizes to get the help of other ladybugs and a special invite to the Veggie Bounty Harvest! GOOD LUCK! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT (or move Joystick Left/Right) for game options. Press START to begin game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT DIFFICULTY switch controls the speed of the ladybug. \ "A" = Moves ladybug slower \ "B" = Moves ladybug faster \ RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch adjusts the brightness of the maze. \ "A" = Maze color is brighter \ "B" = Maze color is darker \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of Lady Bug is to clear the maze of all the dots while avoiding up to four insects. Once all four insects have entered the maze, a bonus vegetable appears in the middle. \ Eating this veggie not only earns big points, but also freezes the insects for a few seconds. \ Also appearing in the maze are hearts that increase the bonus multiplier and letters that can be used to spell EXTRA for a bonus ladybug or SPECIAL to earn a round in the bounty harvest maze full of vegetables to eat! \ If the insects start to gain on the ladybug, she can use the revolving doors to block their attack as she tries to clear each maze. \ When all flowers and items have been collected, you advance to the next level where the insects are even faster. \ \ The game ends when the last ladybug has been eaten. [Lunar Rescue] File=/rom/LunarRescue.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Lunar Rescue Year=2005 Genre=Homebrew Description=Your goal in This Planet Sucks is to rescue colonists trapped on the planet's surface while avoiding the asteroid belt between your mother ship and the colonists. In addition to fighting gravity and avoiding the asteroids, care must also be taken not to squash the poor colonists you're trying to save! And to make matters worse the asteroids turn into enemy ships after rescuing a colonist! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ Homebrew - AKA This Planet Sucks \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. [Medieval Mayhem] File=/rom/MedievalMayhem.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Medieval Mayhem Year=2006 Genre=Homebrew, paddle Description=Destroy the other three kings before you are destroyed by moving your shield around your castle and catching or defelcting the fireball to return fire. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-4) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Sping the paddle controller to select game variations. Press the "FIRE" button enter selections. Press START to begin game. \ \ 2. Use paddle controller. \ Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ LEFT DIFFICULTY switch controls shield direction for Player 1 (Purple) \ RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch controls shield direction for Player 3 (Red) \ \ 4. Instructions. \ This action game features a king in each of the four corners of the screen. Each king is protected by a brick castle. The object of the game is to destroy the opponents' kings by breaking through the walls of the castle with a fireball. Up to four players can play simultaneously; each controls a shield in front of the castle. If there are fewer than four players, the remaining shields are controlled by the computer. \ \ At the start of the game (and each round), a "launch dragon" appears and releases a fireball. As the game progresses, additional fireballs appear. A round is complete when three kings have been destroyed, leaving one remaining. The player with the surviving king wins the round, and a knight marches across the screen, carrying the banner of the winning player \ \ Hold down the "FIRE" button to capture the fireball if you can. Then take aim and release the button to launch your own fireball attack. Beware - a captured fireball held too long will start to flare up and damage your own castle wall! [Phantom II] File=/rom/PhantomII.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Phantom II Year=2007 Genre=Homebrew Description=Fight your way through day and night zones and shoot down the enemy bomber! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the joystick to move your fighter and the fire button to fire missiles. You only get one life, so avoid colliding with the enemy jets (you are safe at the lowest level of the screen)! In the night zone the enemy jets are only visible when the radar wave passes over them. \ \ 3. Instructions \ You start with approximately 60 seconds in the guided missile version and 90 seconds in the regular missile version. If you can reach and shoot down the bomber (which requires three hits), you'll be awarded with additional time (represented by a bar on the left of the screen). \ The enemy jets get more evasive and you receive less time to accomplish your goals with each successive round. [Pong: The Official Arcade Game] File=/rom/PongArcade.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Pong 1 Year=2012 Genre=Homebrew, paddle Description=The original 1972 arcade version of Pong® from Atari, the video game that started it all! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT to select 1 player or 2 player version. Press your Joystick's "FIRE" button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joysticl controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Pong is a two-dimensional sports game that simulates table tennis. Controls the bat by moving it vertically across the left or right side of the screen. \ Compete against another player controlling a second bat on the opposing side. Players use the bats to hit a ball back and forth. The goal is for each player to reach 11 points before the opponent. \ Points are earned when one fails to return the ball to the other. [Rally-X] File=/rom/RallyX.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Rally X Year=2013 Genre=Homebrew Description=In the game, the player controls a blue racecar that must collect all of the yellow flags in each stage, while avoiding red enemy cars and rocks. A radar is displayed at the right of the screen, showing the location of the player, remaining flags and enemies, alongside a fuel meter that gradually depletes as the stage progresses. Enemy cars can be stunned by releasing smoke screens, which will deplete the fuel meter. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in the game. To start the game, press the "FIRE" button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY Switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The player drives a blue car around a multi-directional, scrolling maze. The car automatically moves in whichever direction the joystick is pushed, but if it runs into a wall, it will turn and continue. In every round, ten flags are scattered around the maze. The player must collect all of them to clear the round and move on to the next round. \ \ Several red cars chase the blue one around the maze, and contact with any of them results in losing a life when hit. The number of these cars begins at three and increases in number throughout each normal round to eight. \ The first five appear at the bottom of the maze, and the next three will appear at the top of the maze. However, the player has a smoke screen, to use against the red cars. If a red car runs into a cloud of smokescreen, it will be momentarily stunned (but will still kill the player on contact). \ The amount of time stunned decreases with each level, but will still always cause the red car to chase the blue car using an alternate route. Using the smokescreen uses a small amount of fuel, and using it more than once every 30 seconds will almost ensure that it runs out before the round finishes. \ \ The car has a limited amount of fuel which is consumed with time, though it is normally sufficient to last until all ten flags have been collected. \ When fuel runs out, the car moves very slowly and the smoke screen no longer works, so it very quickly falls victim to the red cars. \ If the player should clear any round without any fuel remaining (a rare occurrence), they will not receive a fuel bonus as a result. \ \ There are also stationary rocks that the player must avoid. The rocks are randomly distributed throughout the maze, increasing in number as the game progresses. \ Unlike the cars and flags, their positions are not shown on the radar, so the player has to be careful for them. \ The rocks will also kill the player on contact, so the player has to be careful not to get trapped between rocks and the red cars. If this happens there is no escape. [Scramble] File=/rom/Scramble.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Scramble Year=2016 Genre=Homebrew Description=Scramble is based on the classic arcade game of the same name, in which the player must navigate their ship across a side-scrolling terrain through six unique stages. Each stage has its own challenges and obstacles, including ground targets, rockets, fuel tanks, flying saucers and meteors. The player must avoid or destroy these hazards while maintaining the ship's limited fuel supply. The objective is to reach the end stage and destroy the enemy's base while trying to get a high score. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT (or move Joystick Left/Right) for game options. Press START to begin game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick to navigate your ship over the terrain while avoiding the enemy attacks. \ Press the "FIRE" button to launch missiles and drop bombs. Points are scored for traveling a certain distance and destroying enemy installations. \ Additional fuel is gained by destroying the fuel tanks. A player starts with 3 ships; a bonus ship is awarded at 10,000 points and every 50,000 points. \ The game ends when all ships have been destroyed. Good luck! [Seawolf] File=/rom/Seawolf.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Seawolf Year=2004 Genre=Homebrew Description=You command a submarine lurking below the surface of the ocean, where you need to attack enemy convoys while avoiding depth charges and other dangers. But use your resources wisely, as you don't want to be a sitting duck when you run out of torpedoes, or worse, fuel! And watch out for the Red Cross ships, as they have a surprise for you if you accidentally target them! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. [Space Rocks] File=/rom/SpaceRocks.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Rocks Year=2015 Genre=Homebrew Description=While on a routine Stellar Cartography mission, UESC Rains experienced a malfunction and warped into an asteroid field in an unknown sector of space. Unable to get a bearing to safely warp out, the ship must blast the asteroids into smithereens to prevent imminent destruction. As the pilot of your ship you must maneuver instantly, rotating left, right and energizing your thrusters to avoid destruction. A direct hit on an asteroid with your laser cannon breaks it in two. A hit on one of these breaks it into two smaller asteroids, a final hit on a small asteroid destroys it completely. Your ship is equipped with a special defensive option to help you avoid collisions when the action gets intense! Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function. Use joystick to navigate main menu and select difficulty level, number of players and other game variations. Press START or your controller's "FIRE" button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to destroy as many asteroid boulders as possible and keep your ship in space as long as possible. Maneuver your ship through space and press the red controller "FIRE" button to shoot photon torpedoes at the asteroid boulders. When an asteroid is hit, it may just break up into smaller boulders, or it may be completely pulverized. You'll face additional space hazards such as satellites and UFOs (Unidentified Flying Objects); both of which may be firing torpedoes at you. \ \ Pulling back on the joystick activates a special ship option that can be chosen in the main menu prior to the start of the game such as Hyperspace, Flipping 180 degrees, Shields or no option at all. [Space Zap] File=/rom/SpaceZap.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Zap Year=2005 Genre=Homebrew Description=Your mission: You control the guns of a space station, and must defend it against attack. Enemies will appear on the four sides of the screen, then launch their weapons at you. If they hit you, your station is destroyed. Lose all of your stations, and the game is over. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ Homebrew - AKA Vault Assault \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button is not used in this game. To start the game, press the START switch. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. [Star Castle] File=/rom/StarCastle.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Star Castle 1 Year=2013 Genre=Homebrew Description=Star Castle Arcade is a frantic, single-screen space shooter! You control a spaceship that navigates around a giant space cannon which is enclosed and protected by three oppositely rotating concentric energy rings. You must successfully overcome the Star Castle’s formidable defenses, then fire your ship’s weapon, impact the cannon and destroy it. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button (at the title screen) will change the color palette (NTSC, PAL, B/W). Press the START button (during the game) will abort game. Press the "FIRE button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Setting t?he LEFT DIFFICULTY to "A" will cause game to start at a higher difficulty. \ Setting t?he LEFT DIFFICULTY to "B" will cause game to start at a lower difficulty. \ Setting the RIGHT DIFFICULTY to "A" will cause the ship to be destroyed by the rings. \ Setting the RIGHT DIFFICULTY to "B" will cause the ship to bounce off the rings. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You must destroy an enemy cannon which sits in the center of three concentric, rotating energy shield rings while avoiding or destroying 'mines' – enemies that spawn from the core, pass through the energy rings, and then home in on the player's ship. \ They can stick back to the shield if the player maneuvers in such a way that a ring is between the ship and the mines. The player-controlled spaceship can rotate, thrust forward, and fire small projectiles. \ The cannon's shields are composed of twelve sections each, and each section takes two hits to destroy. Once a section is breached, rings beneath it are exposed to fire. \ \ Moving the joystick RIGHT will rotate your ship clockwise. \ Moving the joystick LEFT will rotate your ship counter-clockwise. \ Moving the joystick FORWARD will accelerate yoou ship in the direction that it is facing. \ Press the "FIRE" button to shoot a missle from the front of your ship. [Tetris] File=/rom/Tetris.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Tetris Year= Genre=Homebrew Description= Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Toyshop Trouble] File=/rom/ToyshopTrouble.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Toyshop Trouble Year=2007 Genre=Homebrew Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Berzerk Voice] File=/rom/BerzerkVoice.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Berzerk 2 Year=2002 Genre=Hack Description=The same game as Berzerk but this time the robots have a voice. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Background: The Astro Date is 3200 and you are the last survivor of a small group of earth people who came to explore the planet Mazeon. Soon after landing, you discovered the planet is a dark, apparently uninhabitable place. But by then it was too late to turn back because your space craft had been destroyed by Automazeons. \ Now you are a prisoner here. You are trapped in a maze where even the walls are death to touch. Grim robot thugs known as "Automazeons" stalk you relentlessly and you must systematically pulverize them with your laser gun before they eliminate you with theirs. \ You are never safe on the planet Mazeon. Even when you've destroyed the mechanical heavies, Evil Otto, the mad and merciless mind behind the robot gangs, leaps out from where he's been observing the battle. You flee in panic because you know that you cannot kill Evil Otto and that, once he catches you, you'll never escape. \ He will pound you to a lifeless pulp, grinning like a maniac all the while. Your only hope is to get out of the electrified maze before Evil Otto catches you. \ If you do get out, you find yourself in another maze. Again the faceless robots shoot at you, again Evil Otto pursues you, again you must dodge and shoot and run ... into yet another maze. It's enough to drive you bonkers! \ \ 2. SELECT button. \ To select a BERZERK game, press down the GAME SELECT switch. If you press and hold down this switch, the game numbers automatically change at the bottom center of the screen. \ GAME 1: You receive an extra life every 1,000 points, there is no Evil Otto to pursue you, but watch out for the robots - they'll be shooting at you! \ GAME 2: You get a bonus life every time you make 1,000 points, the robots fire at you and Evil Otto rebounds when you shoot him. \ GAME 3: You win a new life every 1,000 points. You'll need all the lives you can get because in this game Evil Otto is invincible and the robots stalk you with their lasers. \ GAME 4: You have the opportunity to gain a new life every 2,000 points, there is no Evil Otto, but the robots are militant and you must dodge their deadly laser beams. \ GAME 5: With a rebound Evil Otto and mean robots on the prowl, Game 5 is like Game 2 - except a bonus life is won at 2,000 points rather than 1,000. \ GAME 6: Win another life every 2,000 points, but watch out for invicible Evil Otto and combatant robot goons. \ GAME 7: There are no bonus lives and no Evil Otto. You have only the laser-firing robots to contend with. \ GAME 8: There is a rebound Evil Otto. Otherwise it is exactly like Game 7. \ GAME 9: Here, Evil Otto is invincible, the robot gangs are armed and dangerous, and you have no bonus lives to prolong game play. \ GAME 10: You have the opportunity to win a new life every 1,000 points, the robots don't shoot, but watch out for Evil Otto - he's invincible! \ GAME 11: The robots don't shoot, Evil Otto rebounds and you get a new life every 1,000 points. \ GAME 12: This is the easiest of all BERSERK variations. There is no Evil Otto, the robots don't shoot at you, and you win a bonus life every 1,000 points. It's a good game for beginners or young children. [Crazy Otto] File=/rom/CrazyOtto.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Crazy Otto Year=1982 Genre=Hack Description=Before Ms. Pac-Man there was Crazy Otto. A Pac-Man with legs developed by GCC for Midway. In the end Midway released the female counterpart and called her Ms. Pac Man. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1 - CHERRIES: Crazy Otto is pursued by four ghosts. \ GAME 2 - ONE BEAR: A good choice for beginners. Crazy Otto is pursued by only one ghost. \ GAME 3 - TWO BEARS: A novice player's choice. Crazy Otto is pursued by only two ghosts. \ GAME 4 - THREE BEARS: An intermediate player's choice. Crazy Otto is pursued by only three ghosts. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to score as many points as you can while Crazy Otto eats dots, fruit, pretzels, energy pills, and ghosts. Score 10,000 points and earn a bonus Crazy Otto. \ Use your Joystick controller to guide Crazy Otto around the maze. When he passes over dots, he gobbles them up, and you score points. If he eats all the dots on the screen, the maze flashes momentarily, and you start playing on a new maze. \ As soon as he gulps down the energy pill, the ghosts turn blue with fright. You earn 200 points for the first ghost, 400 points for the second ghost, 800 for the third ghost, and a whopping 1600 points for the fourth ghost, all on the same energy pill. \ Unfortunately, the effects of the energy pills are short-lived, so you'll have to move fast. After the ghosts are gobbled up, their eyes head back to the chamber in the center of the screen for reincarnation. If you don't gobble up the ghosts, they start to blink just before they turn back to their original colors. [Dr. Who: Daleks Invasion] File=/rom/DalekInvasion.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Dr Who Dalek Invasion Year=2005 Genre=Hack Description=You are the doctor investigating a maze like planet when all of a sudden you hear the words "Annihilate!!" You destroy one but more come, you need to leave. The only exit leads to another maze with more Daleks and now here is bouncing Davros out to get you. You need to find the Tardis. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ To select a game, press down the GAME SELECT switch. If you press and hold down this switch, the game numbers automatically change at the bottom center of the screen. \ GAME 1: You receive an extra life every 1,000 points, there is no Davros to pursue you, but watch out for the Daleks - they'll be shooting at you! \ GAME 2: You get a bonus life every time you make 1,000 points, the Daleks fire at you and Davros rebounds when you shoot him. \ GAME 3: You win a new life every 1,000 points. You'll need all the lives you can get because in this game Davros is invincible and the Daleks stalk you with their lasers. \ GAME 4: You have the opportunity to gain a new life every 2,000 points, there is no Davros, but the Daleks are militant and you must dodge their deadly laser beams. \ GAME 5: With a rebound Davros and mean Daleks on the prowl, Game 5 is like Game 2 - except a bonus life is won at 2,000 points rather than 1,000. \ GAME 6: Win another life every 2,000 points, but watch out for invicible Davros and combatant Daleks. \ GAME 7: There are no bonus lives and no Davros. You have only the laser-firing robots to contend with. \ GAME 8: There is a rebound Davros. Otherwise it is exactly like Game 7. \ GAME 9: Here, Davros is invincible, the Daleks are armed and dangerous, and you have no bonus lives to prolong game play. \ GAME 10: You have the opportunity to win a new life every 1,000 points, the Daleks don't shoot, but watch out for Davros - he's invincible! \ GAME 11: The Daleks don't shoot, Davros rebounds and you get a new life every 1,000 points. \ GAME 12: There is no Davros, the Daleks don't shoot at you, and you win a bonus life every 1,000 points. It's a good game for beginners or young children. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ After you have selected the game number you wish to play, press down the GAME RESET switch to start the action. Your score is determined by the number of robots that are destroyed. You will earn bonus points when all the robots in a single maze are annihilated. Occasionally, you will meet a super strong robot who is merely stunned by your first shot. Be brave, it will take a second hit to destroy this tough enemy. \ \ Your score will appear at the bottom of the screen, off-centered to the right. When all robots in a maze are destroyed, your score disappears and your bonus points flash on the screen, off-centered on the left. The computer automatically combines all points and your total score is displayed in the next maze. You can score a maximum of 999,999 points before the score rolls back to zero. [Defender III] File=/rom/DefenderIII.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Defender 4 Year=2018 Genre=Hack Description=As Commander of Universal Space Ship Defender, you have been assigned by Earth Security to rid Planet Earth of the Aliens and rescue Humanoids from the Landers. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT switch until the number appears in the game window at the bottom. The number on the left is the game number; the number on the right indicates the number of players. Games 1-10 are one player, Games 11-20 are 2 players. Games 10 & 20 are Children's versions. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for Player 1. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for Player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The position of your DIFFICULTY switch determines Defender's vertical speed: \ Set to "B": Defender rises and descends rapidly. \ Set to "A": Defender rises and descends slowly, making it harder to chase Aliens and rescue Humanoids. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Defender moves in the direction you move the Joystick Controller. You begin a game with three Defender lives and three smart bombs. The number of lives remaining in a game is displayed at the bottom left of the television screen, and the number of smart bombs remaining is shown at the bottom right. \ \ To deploy missiles, point Defender at the target and press the red controller button. To detonate a smart bomb to destroy all enemy craft on the screen, move Defender down behind the city and press the red button. To enter Hyperspace, push the Joystick Controller fully forward (away from you) and hold it in that position until Defender has moved to the top of the television screen and disappeared behind the Scanner. \ Then press the red controller button on your Joystick. As Defender warps through time and space, Aliens disappear. When Defender reappears, the Aliens also reappear. \ \ The Scanner is similar to a radar screen. Every "blip" on it reflects an object in the game. The four small stationary blips at the bottom of the Scanner are Humanoids. \ To save a Humanoid from being abducted, you can either destroy the Lander cand let the Humanoid free-fall safely to earth, or destroy the Lander, catch the Humanoid, and carry him back to earth. [E.T. The Extra-Terrestrial (Fixed)] File=/rom/ET_Fixed.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=E T 2 Year=2013 Genre=Hack Description=We came here to conduct a simple study of primitive planets, and look what happened! These...things...came and scared away my friends. Before I knew it, all my friends boarded our lightship and flew home. The only one I can trust is that nice little alien, Ellleeott. He gives me those tasty energy pills (Reese's Pieces) But these other aliens! Every time I get ready to assemble my transgalactic communicatior, they come and take me away. I just want to go home! I hope Elllleeott and I can assemble all the pieces of my communicator before my energy runs out. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT switch to select a game variation. Press START to begin game.\ Game 1 - All humans present in game. \ Game 2 - Elliott and FBI agent present, no scientist. \ Game 3 - Only Elliott present in game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch controls the speed of the humans. In the "A" position, the humans move faster than in the B position. The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch determines the landing conditions for the rescue ship. If the switch is in position "A", Elliott cannot be present on the landing field when the rescue ship arrives. If the switch is in the "B" position, Elliott can be present when E.T. calls the ship and when it lands. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Your mission is to help E.T. find the three pieces of his interplanetary telephone, call his ship, and guide him to the landing pad in time to be rescued. Do this before E.T.'s energy runs out, and you'll win the round and score points! E.T. transverses six sites on Planet Earth. Four of these are full of pitfalls - they are dotted with deep wells into which E.T. can fall. A fifth site shows Elliott's house, the Institute of Science, and the FBI building. Here, E.T. is taken by the scientist to be studied. The sixth site is a forest setting where E.T. first lands and where the ship will land to pick him up. \ \ A round ends when E.T. boards the spaceship. At the end of each round, all your bonus points are displayed. If you want to play another round, simply press the controller button. E.T.'s telephone pieces and the Candy will be redistributed for him to find again. You can play as many rounds as you like, since your bonus points will accumulate. \ \ On each site E.T. moves through various power zones. While in a power zone, E.T. can execute only one of his extraordinary powers. For example, if E.T. is ready to call his spaceship, he must be in a "call ship" zone. As E.T. stands in a power zone, the symbol for that zone appears at the top center of the screen. At the beginning of each new round, the power zones are redistributed on each site. \ \ Pressing the red FIRE button allows E.T. to use his speical powers when in a power zone (like call ship, call Elliot, or teleport to another site.) He also can elivatate out of a pit when pressing the FIRE button - his head will elivate when using a power. Additionally, E.T. also has "super speed" when moving the joystick in the desired direction, while simultaneously holding down the FIRE button. Energy point are expelled at a greater rate when using any of E.T.'s special powers. \ \ A game ends when E.T. runs out of energy or when you decide to quit playing. [Indy 500 XE] File=/rom/Indy500XE.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Indy 500 2 Year=2004 Genre=Hack Description=Bored with Indy 500, then try 16 new tracks, including Bezerk and ET. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 28. Games 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28 are one-player time trial games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move your joystick in the direction you want to steer and press the controller button to accelerate. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, your car travels at a higher speed than in the B position, making it harder to control. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player time trial games, you race against the clock. See how many laps you can make around the tracks in 60 seconds. Race against another player in two-player racing games. The first player to complete 25 laps wins. \ In all games you lose only time, not points, when you crash into any playfield boundary or barrier. [Miniature Golf +] File=/rom/MiniatureGolfPlus.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Miniature Golf 2 Year=2003 Genre=Hack Description=This hack of Miniature Golf has new holes to play with. Just like the original you play a nine hole mini golf course, complete with moving obstacles. To beat the par for each hole, you'll need a good sense of timing, along with an ability to judge distance. Win by getting the lowest score. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between a 1 or 2 player game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick to position the club. Press the controller button to release the club and hit the ball. \ The club actually covers the ball at the beginning of each hole. Your first step therefore is to move the club into a hitting position away from the ball. The farther away you move the club, the longer the ball rolls or travels when hit. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The ball travels a much longer distance when the difficulty switch is in the A position than it does when it's in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ There are nine holes in which you must succeed in hitting the ball into a cup. Each time you hit the ball in an effort to reach the cup, it's called a stroke. Although the number of strokes you take to hit the ball into the cup is unlimited, each hole has a designated par. Par represents the number of strokes you are ideally supposed to take to complete the hole. \ After being struck, the ball travels along the same line of trajectory already established by the club. \ You may position the club anywhere on the playfield (regardless of course boundaries), before releasing it to hit the ball. Remember however, that the ball must travel around all boundaries, including moving obstacles. [Moon Patrol Arcade] File=/rom/MoonPatrolArcade.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Moon Patrol 2 Year=2009 Genre=Hack Description=As a Moon Buggy driver, your objective is to travel across the surface of the moon as quickly as you can but this time with bigger wheels. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 player EASY \ GAME 2: 2 player EASY \ GAME 3: 1 player MEDIUM \ GAME 4: 2 player MEDIUM \ GAME 5: 1 player HARD \ GAME 6: 2 player HARD \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch can be used to turn off the background MOON PATROL music when placed in the "A" position. \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch can be used to select either two moving speeds or three moving speeds. Set the switch to "B" for three speeds, set it to "A" for two speeds. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use your Joystick to maneuver your Moon Buggy across the lunar surface. Push the Joystick right to accelerate forward; push it left to slow down, push it up to jump. Press the red fire button to shoot missiles; your shots will go up and directly out in front of your Moon Buggy at the same time. \ You start the game with four Moon Buggy lives. If one is destroyed, you restart at the course segment where your Moon Buggy was destroyed. The number of Moon Buggies remaining is shown at the bottom of the screen. When all your Moon Buggy lives are lost, the game ends. To restart the game at the beginning, press the red fire button. \ The gauge at the lower center of the screen indicates your location on the course. It is divided into five sections, 1-5, 6-10, 11-15, 16-20, and 21-26. The gauge fills with color as you travel along the course. When you complete course 1, your Moon Buggy moves on to course 2, which continues to progress in difficulty. \ A timer at the bottom of the screen clocks your journey. It starts ticking away the seconds as soon as you start. When the timer reaches 999 seconds, it stops counting. but you can continue driving. \ You score points for shooting UFOs and for destroying or jumping over rocks, enemy cars, craters, tanks. and land mines. You can also earn bonus points for completing the course in less than the average time. \ \ 5. Hints \ As you travel along the course, you'll see areas where a rock is placed just behind a land mine or crater. When this happens, time your shot very carefully. \ Another trick: Try taking one long jump over two closely positioned obstacles. \ To protect yourself, shoot at UFO missiles while they're in the air. \ Start your jumps well in front of a hole to land just on the other side, giving you more time and space to begin a second jump. \ Scoring points for destroying the enemy car is random, so just shoot as soon as you can. [Pac-Law] File=/rom/PacLaw.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Pac Law Year=2001 Genre=Hack Description=In this hack of Outlaw you are a Pac-Man ghost. You take aim to shoot targets or your opponent who is also a Pac-Man ghost. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 16. Games 1 - 12 are two-player Gunslinger Games. Games 13 - 16 are one-player Target Shoots. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the gunslinger with the joystick. When you want to aim the gunslinger's gun, press the controller button. Hold the button down while you control the movement of the gunslinger's arm up and down and aim. After you have aimed the gunslinger's arm, release the controller button to shoot the bullet. \ In one-player games (Target Shoot), you control the movement of a gunfighter with the left, or P1, joystick controller. Practice target shooting with the moving target that appears on the screen. \ In two-player games (Gunslinger Games), each player controls the movement of a gunslinger with a joystick controller. You score points when your gunslinger shoots your opponent's gunslinger. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ In A position, your bullets will disappear in flight if your gunslinger is shot before your bullets hit a target. \ In the B position, your bullets will continue in flight even if your gunslinger is hit before your bullet hits a target. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ In one-player games, you score one point each time a bullet from your gunslinger's gun hits the moving target. You have 99 seconds to score a maximum of ten points. The timing clock appears in the upper right corner of the playfield; the gunslinger's score is in the upper left corner. \ In two-player games you score one point each time a bullet from your gunslinger's gun hits the opposing gunslinger. When a gunslinger is hit, it will sit down and the point appears at the top of the screen. \ The score of the gunslinger from the left side of the playfield appears in the upper left corner; the right playfield gunslinger's score appears in the upper right corner. The first player to score ten points wins the game. [Pac-Man: Arcade Edition] File=/rom/PacManArcade.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Pac-Man 4 Year=2014 Genre=Hack Description=Keep PAC-MAN happy and healthy in his home of Mazeland. You score a point for every video wafer that PAC-MAN eats. You also score points when PAC-MAN eats power pills, vitamins, and ghosts. Everytime PAC-MAN eats all of the video wafers on the maze, he earns an extra life and a new maze full of video wafers. But beware of the GHOSTS that chase him through Maxeland! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the "FIRE" button. \ GAME 1 Cherry Stage - 100 oints. \ GAME 2 Strawberry Stage - 300 points. \ GAME 3 Orange Stage - 500 points \ GAME 4 Apple Stage - 700 points. \ GAME 5 Melon Stage - 1000 points. \ GAME 6 Galaxian Boss Stage - 2000 points. \ GAME 7 Bell Stage - 3000 points. \ GAME 8 Key - 5000 points. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY swritch have no function in the game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick Controller to guide PAC-MAN around the maze. Move the Joystick in the direction you want PAC-MAN to move. PAC-MAN moves around the area of the maze, but he can use the opening at the top and bottom of the maze as an escape route. \ Remember that the ghosts can use the same escape routes, and that they may be waiting for PAC-MAN when he reenters the maze. When PAC-MAN escapes through the bottom opening, he reenters through the top. When he escapes through the top, he reenters at the bottom. \ \ The red fire button is not used during game play, although it may be used to start a game. \ \ VIDEO WAFERS: These are the dotted lines on the screen. You maneuver PAC-MAN around the playfield over the video wafers. He automatically eats the video wafers, and they disappear from the maze. You score one point for each video wafer he eats. \ POWER PILLS: Power pills are located in the four corners of the playfield. Each power pill is worth five points. When PAC-MAN eats a power pill, the ghosts become a transparent blue color. \ During this time, PAC-MAN has the super-strength to overcome the ghosts. This is his big chance to chase and gobble down each ghost. Unfortunately, this great power only lasts a few seconds. When the power starts wearing off, the ghosts turn pink and then back to yellow. \ VITAMINS: Vitamins are the two intersecting rectangles in the center of the playfield. They only appear for a few moments and then disappear and reappear. The vitamins are worth 100 points each time PAC-MAN eats them. \ GHOSTS: The ghosts are the quartet of bad guys chasing PAC-MAN around the maze. If a ghost eats PAC-MAN, you lose one life. On the other hand, if PAC-MAN eats a ghost, you score points. \ PAC-MAN can only eat ghosts after eating a power pill. Then he can run around the maze eating ghosts. If the power pill wears off before PAC-MAN eats all the ghosts, he must eat another power pill and start chasing the ghosts again. \ After PAC-MAN eats a ghost, you only see eyes left on the ghost. But, the ghosts are reincarnated by returning to the big, square chamber in the center of the playfield. [Pac-Man Plus] File=/rom/PacManPlus.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Pac-Man 5 Year=2003 Genre=Hack Description=In this hack of Pac-Man, the ghosts turn blue and you can drink coke. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1: 1 Ghost to Chase. \ GAME 2: 2 Ghosts to Chase. \ GAME 3: 3 Ghosts to Chase. \ GAME 4: Normal Game with all 4 Ghosts. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. Use the P2 or right slot joystick for player 2. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ When the DIFFICULTY switch is in the "B" position, the power pills last longer and the vitamins stay on the screen longer. \ The "A" position is for the advanced PAC-MAN player. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Use the Joystick Controller to guide PAC-MAN around the maze. Move the Joystick in the direction you want PAC-MAN to move. \ PAC-MAN moves around the area of the maze, but he can use the opening at the top and bottom of the maze as an escape route. \ Remember that the ghosts can use the same escape routes, and that they may be waiting for PAC-MAN when he reenters the maze. When PAC-MAN escapes through the bottom opening, he reenters through the top. \ When he escapes through the top, he reenters at the bottom. \ \ The red fire button is not used during game play, although it may be used to start a game. \ \ GHOSTS: The ghosts are the quartet of bad guys chasing PAC-MAN around the maze. If a ghost eats PAC-MAN, you lose one life. \ On the other hand, if PAC-MAN eats a ghost, you score points and the ghost turns blue with a leaf on his head. \ PAC-MAN can only eat ghosts after eating a power pill. Then he can run around the maze eating ghosts. If the power pill wears off before PAC-MAN eats all the ghosts, he must eat another power pill and start chasing the ghosts again. \ After PAC-MAN eats a ghost, you only see eyes left on the ghost. But, the ghosts are reincarnated by returning to the big, square chamber in the center of the playfield. [River Raid Plus] File=/rom/RiverRaid-Plus.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=River Raid 3 Year=2002 Genre=Hack Description=Balons version. \ Your mission is to score as many points as possible by destroying enemy tankers, helicopters, fuel depots, jets, and bridges before your jet crashes or runs out of fuel. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ Hack que inclui balões. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to alternate between a one player game and two players taking turns. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick left or right to turn in that direction. Press the joystick button to fire missiles. Push the joystick up to fly faster, or down to go slower. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, missiles streak straight ahead. With switches in the B position, you can control the direction of your missiles after they have been fired by steering with your joystick. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Move the joystick or press the joystick button to start the action. \ Always keep an eye on your fuel gauge. Fuel is used up at a constant rate, regardless of speed. When your fuel drops below 1/4 full, a warning siren sounds to alert you--it's time to refuel! The slower you fly over a depot, the more fuel you receive. A bell will sound while you are refueling. The sound changes to a higher pitch when your fuel tank is full. The farther down the river you fly, the fewer fuel depots you'll find, so you'll have to increase your flight speed if you want to survive. \ You lose a jet when it collides with the river bank or one of the enemy objects (except fuel depots), or when you run out of fuel. If you lose a jet before destroying a bridge, you will restart at the beginning of that section. If you lose a jet after destroying a bridge, you will instead restart at that location. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [River Raid III] File=/rom/RiverRaidIII.a26 Platform=Digitel Sort=River Raid 5 Year=1989 Genre=Hack Description=Your mission is to score as many points as possible by destroying enemy tankers, helicopters, fuel depots, jets, and bridges before your jet crashes or runs out of fuel. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to alternate between a one player game and two players taking turns. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move the joystick left or right to turn in that direction. Press the joystick button to fire missiles. Push the joystick up to fly faster, or down to go slower. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With difficulty switches in the A position, missiles streak straight ahead. With switches in the B position, you can control the direction of your missiles after they have been fired by steering with your joystick. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Move the joystick or press the joystick button to start the action. \ Always keep an eye on your fuel gauge. Fuel is used up at a constant rate, regardless of speed. When your fuel drops below 1/4 full, a warning siren sounds to alert you--it's time to refuel! The slower you fly over a depot, the more fuel you receive. A bell will sound while you are refueling. The sound changes to a higher pitch when your fuel tank is full. The farther down the river you fly, the fewer fuel depots you'll find, so you'll have to increase your flight speed if you want to survive. \ You lose a jet when it collides with the river bank or one of the enemy objects (except fuel depots), or when you run out of fuel. If you lose a jet before destroying a bridge, you will restart at the beginning of that section. If you lose a jet after destroying a bridge, you will instead restart at that location. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Softball] File=/rom/Softball.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Softball Year=2004 Genre=Hack Description=It might look like Home Run, but it's really a fast-paced version of softball. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 8. Games 1 - 4 are for one player, and games 5 - 8 are for two players. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ As the Batter, swing the bat by moving your Joystick from the neutral position to any other position. If, after hitting the ball, it looks as though the outfielder has a chance to make a putout if you take an extra base, push the controller button before reaching base and your runner(s) will stop at that base. \ As a Pitcher, to pitch the ball, press the controller button. Throw curves, fastballs, screwballs, or change-up pitches by moving your joystick after the ball leaves the pitcher. \ As an Outfielder, after the batter hits the ball, move with the joystick to catch the ball and make putouts. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The difficulty switches control the speed of the outfielders and batted balls. In the A position, the outfielders and batted balls will move more slowly than in the B position. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Play Home Run just as you would play baseball. The left or blue player is the "visiting team" and is the first to bat. The pitcher pitches the ball. Three strikes (either swinging or pitched) are an out; four balls (any pitch not struck at that is not over the plate) are a walk and the batter advances to first base. \ If the pitcher hits the batter (and the batter does not strike at the pitch, or the pitch does not pass over Home Plate) the batter will advance to first base. \ If the batter hits the ball, the outfielder(s) can catch the ball and make a putout by touching first base ahead of the runner or by tagging the runner. \ If there are other runners on base, a putout can be made by tagging any runner, or, if the runner is in a "force play", by touching the base in front of that runner. \ With practice, double-plays (two outs on one pitched ball) can be made with ease. [Yar Vs Yar] File=/rom/YarvsYar.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Yars 4 Year=2002 Genre=Hack Description= Yar vs.Yar is supposed to be the third instillation in the Yar Trilogy, taking place after Yars' Revenge. In this story, Yar must battle up once again, but this time against one of his own kind who has joined forces with the Qotile Continuum. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 7. One player games are the odd numbers, and two player games are the even numbers. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ Move with the joystick. To fire, press the controller button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The B position is for normal gameplay, and the A position is more difficult. In the A position, the Swirl will be propelled faster and if the Zorlon Cannon and the Destroyer Missile touch, they will destroy each other. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. To start the game over again, either press START button or the controller button. \ The primary objective of the game is to break a path through the shield, and destroy the traiter with a blast from the Zorlon Cannon. The secondary objective is to score as many points as possible. \ The shield is the red area in front of the traiter's base. The shield is made up of cells. The Yar scout can destroy these cells by firing at them with energy missiles, from any location on the playfield, or by devouring them on direct contact. The Zorlon Cannon can also be used to destroy the cells, but this is a waste of a powerful weapon. \ Once a path has been cleared through the shield, the Zorlon Cannon must be used to destroy the traiter. To call up the cannon, the Yar can either eat a cell, or run over the traiter. The Zorlon Cannon appears on the left side of the playfield, and moves in a direct line with the Yar. This means the Yar is in its line of fire. It is important therefore, to aim the cannon at the traiter, fire it, and fly out of the way fast! \ When you destroy the traiter, or a Swirl, there will be an explosion, during which the Yar stays on the screen. Use this opportunity to make up your own victory dance. And watch out for the Ghost of Yars! You'll see his mean streak, so stay off it! [Zaxxon Arcade] File=/rom/ZaxxonArcade.a26 Platform=SEGA Sort=Zaxxon 2 Year=2004 Genre=Hack Description=The evil robot ZAXXON and its fierce armies have conquered an asteroid belt. You must stop them before they enslave the entire galaxy! Note= \ Player Mode:Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press Select until the Game number you want appears at the top of the screen: \ 1 = Skill 1 / One Player \ 2 = Skill 2 / One Player \ 3 = Skill 3 / One Player \ 4 = Skill 4 / One Player \ 5 = Skill 1 / Two Players \ 6 = Skill 2 / Two Players \ 7 = Skill 3 / Two Players \ 8 = Skill 4 / Two Players \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Game Reset to begin the first phase. \ \ To battle: Your fighter approaches Zaxxon's first asteroid base. Fly high to avoid crashing into the first wall! Then swoop down to attack enemy targets. Watch out for return fire from turrets and dodger guns. \ Running out of fuel: Careful! Your fighter guzzles fuel as you zoom over Zaxxon's territory. Keep an eye on your fuel gauge. Fire at fuel tanks to fill up. Then slip over the gap in the wall at the end of the asteroid base and prepare for a battle in space. \ Attack in space: You've made it past Zaxxon's first ground force. Now try your skill against Zaxxon's planes in space. They can dive at you from above, below or hit you head on. Eliminate as many planes as you can in this sudden attack. \ More asteroid action: You're heading toward another asteroid. In games played at skills 2-4, some targets are protected by electronic barriers. Slip through gaps in the barriers to avoid the deadly electronic beams. \ Meet the robot Zaxxon: Pass the final barrier and your fighter no longer moves forward. A deadly force holds it back! But fortunately, you can still move up, down and sideways. Suddenly, the robot Zaxxon approaches. Only one spot on Zaxxon is vulnerable - the missile under its arm. To eliminate Zaxxon, you must shoot its missile repeatedly before it fires. If you fail, you still have a chance to hit the speeding missile and proceed to the next round of play. If you don't eliminate the missile, your fighter will be eliminated. \ \ It takes several hits to eliminate Zaxxon's missile: \ Skill Level 1........3 hits \ Skill Level 2........4 hits \ Skill Level 3........5 hits \ Skill Level 4........6 hits \ Onward through the galaxy!: Once you've gone past the robot Zaxxon, another asteroid challenges your skill and coordination. Then it's back into deep space to confront another wave of enemy fighters. \ Starting over: Keep defending the universe until you run out of fighters. To replay the Game Option that you have been playing, press Reset. To select another Game Option, press Game Select, then press Reset. [The A-Team] File=/rom/ATeam.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=A Team Year=1984 Genre=Prototype Description=The A-Team has been hired to stop evil forces from destroying the world with a nuclear weapon!! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 4, with 1 being normal difficulty and 4 being insane difficulty. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Use the joystick to move Mr. T through the rocket complex. \ At the Launch Site, press and hold the controller button to shoot up to four shots at one time. Use the joystick to aim shots in one of eight directions. \ At the Warhead Assembly and Warhead Battle, press the controller button to shoot up to two shots at once. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Use the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch to control game difficulty. If set to A, Mr. T will have 29 seconds to complete the Warhead Assembly Screen. If set to B, he will have 38 seconds. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button or the controller button to begin play. \ The object of the game is to help the A-Team destroy the warhead and save the world from annihilation. Gameplay takes places across three different boards, each of which represents different stages of the rocket construction. [Actionauts] File=/rom/Actionauts.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Actionauts Year=1984 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [The Alligator People] File=/rom/AlligatorPeople.a26 Platform=20th Century Fox Sort=Alligator People Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Bloody Human Freeway] File=/rom/BloodyHumanFreeway.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Bloody Human Freeway Year=1984 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Boggle] File=/rom/Boggle.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Boggle Year=1977 Genre=Prototype Description=Play the classic board game Boggle Note= \ Player Mode: 2 Player Game \ \ 1. SELECT button is not used. \ \ 2. Instructions. \ Each player takes turns selecting the letters they want to use to form the word using the joystick, when the player is done they simply need to press the fire button again (a dot will appear at the end of the word). After which, the the other player will begin his turn (indicated by the word GO below the players score). \ Each player has 99 seconds to form as many words as they can. [Bugs Bunny] File=/rom/BugsBunny.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Bugs Bunny Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description=Pick up carrots and avoid being shot by Elmer Fudd. Note= \ \ Press RESET or joystick button to begin play. \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Game type 1 & 3 are 1-player games. Game type 2 & 4 are 2-player games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The LEFT DIFFICULTY switch controls the size of the rabbit hole. A = Small B = Large \ The RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch controls the speed of Elmer Fudd. A = slow B = fast \ \ 4. Instructions. [Cabbage Patch Kids: Adventure in the Park] File=/rom/CPK.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Cabbage Patch Kids Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [CareBears] File=/rom/CareBears.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Carebears Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Crack'ed] File=/rom/Cracked.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Crack´ed Year=1987 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Cubicolor] File=/rom/Cubicolor.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Cubicolor Year=1982 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Dukes of Hazzard] File=/rom/DukesofHazzard.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dukes Of Hazzard 1 Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description=Break Daisy out of jail before Boss Hogg can get to her. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Instructions. \ You control the General Lee and must attempt to break Daisy out of jail before Boss Hog can get his slimy hands on her. To perform this jailbreak, you must drive the General Lee to the top of a giant mazelike board and touch the jail. \ Along the way you must avoid Sheriff Rosco P. Coltrane and Deputy Enos Strate as they attempt to put an end to your reckless disregard for the law \ The General Lee is represented by a little car (which looks like a Volkswagen Beetle) with a white X on top. Rosco and Enos are represented by little white cars with flashing lights. \ If Rosco or Enos get too close to the General Lee they will switch to ramming speed and smash into the side of your car and you'll lose a life. Scattered around the level are little piles of dots, \ which you can pick up and drop in front of the enemy to temporarily stun them. If you make it to the jail before Boss Hog grabs Daisy (which is shown at the top of the screen), you'll be rewarded with a nice animation of the General Lee jumping over a broken bridge (yeeha!) and are taken to the next level. [Elevator Action] File=/rom/ElevatorAction.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Elevator Action Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description=Recover secret documents on each level and make your getaway at street level all the way at the bottom of the building. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. Use your joystick controller to move your agent in the direction you want to go. Pushing up will cause the agent \ to jump up and cling to the ceiling. Pulling the joystick back will cause the agent to crouch down to avoid bullets from the enemy. The fire button will fire a shot you're facing. \ To enter an elevator, move the agent onto it when the elevator car is at the floor you are on. Exit the elevator by moving the joystick left or right at the floor you wish to get off on. \ Your joystick controls the movement of the elevator in either up or down direction while you are on it. \ \ 3. Instructions. \ Rooms containing the documents are designated by a red door. Move your agent over these doors to recover the documents. \ When you have recovered them all, make your way to the street where you will be picked-up and taken to the next level. [Elk Attack] File=/rom/ElkAttack.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Elk Attack Year=1987 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Entity] File=/rom/Entity.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Entity Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Garfield] File=/rom/Garfield.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Garfield Year=1984 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Kabobber] File=/rom/Kabobber.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Kabobber Year=1983 Genre=Atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Lasercade] File=/rom/Lasercade.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Lasercade Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Looping] File=/rom/Looping.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Looping Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [The Lord of the Rings: Journey to Rivendell] File=/rom/LordoftheRings.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Lord of the Rings Journey to Rivendell Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Meltdown] File=/rom/Meltdown.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Meltdown Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Muppets: Miss Piggy's Wedding] File=/rom/PiggyWedding.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Muppets 1 Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description=Help get Kermit out of the church before Miss Piggy marries him. Note= \ Player Mode: Two-player game \ \ 1. Instructions \ In this maze game one player controls Miss Piggy and the other player controls Kermit. As Kermit you have to maneuver your way through the church and make your way to the cab waiting for you at the bottom of the screen. \ While Kermit is wandering the maze, he'll encounter wedding guests (the blocks), which will attempt to block his path. \ Kermit will also find a key that randomly moves through the maze, touching the key as Kermit will cause the entrances on the top and bottom of the screen to open (allowing Kermit to make his getaway) \ and touching the key as Miss Piggy will cause them to close. [A Mysterious Thief] File=/rom/MysteriousThief.a26 Platform=Vidco Sort=Mysterious Thief Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Pick Up] File=/rom/PickUp.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Pick Up Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Planet of the Apes] File=/rom/POTA.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Planet Of The Apes Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Polo] File=/rom/Polo.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Polo Year=1978 Genre=Prototype Description=In this game you ride your pony and put the ball in your goal. Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ The match begins with each player in front of their goal mouths. The ball is at rest and located in the center of the playing field. The objective of Polo is for each player to score as many goals as possible during the allotted game time. The player with the highest number of goals scored at the end of the game is the winner of the match.\ \ 2. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select between 24 different games. Games 2-24 by twos are two player games. Games 5-8, 13-16, 21-24 have the goals shorter in width. Games 3-4, 7-8, 11-12, 15-16, 19-20, 23-24 have a faster ball and the player shots have more power. Games 9-16 have a wrap field. In games 17-24 you can have 2 members on each side controlled by the player. \ \ 3. Use joystick controller. \ The left player uses the left controller and vice versa. You have no control over your polo mallet, you automatically swing the polo mallet to strike the ball. The ball will be struck toward the opponents end of the playing field regardless of the direction you are facing. The button is not used. \ \ 4. Difficulty switches. \ With the left or RIGHT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, your pony moves slower than in the A position. [Save the Whales] File=/rom/SaveWhales.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Save the Whales Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Sinistar] File=/rom/Sinistar.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sinistar Year=1984 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Sky Patrol] File=/rom/SkyPatrol.a26 Platform=Imagic Sort=Sky Patrol Year=1982 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Walt Disney: Snow White and the Seven Dwarves] File=/rom/SnowWhite.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Walt Disney Snow White Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Star Wars: Return of the Jedi: Ewok Adventure] File=/rom/StarWarsEwok.a26 Platform=ParkerBros Sort=Star Wars 4 Year=1984 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Telepathy] File=/rom/Telepathy.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Telepathy Year=1982 Genre=Prototype Description=Telepathy is one of two known prototype games that were developed for Atari's failed Mindlink controller. Telepathy was actually developed as a demo to show what kind games the Mindlink could do. \ This "demo" is made up of seven different action screens held together by a loose "mine" theme. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Instructions \ The game starts off with a really cool sign which descends from the top of the screen telling you which mine your on. \ After that you're whisked off to the first screen. \ The Plain: You control a large white man with antennas sticking out of his head. You must guide the man over the glowing triangles as he walks along the plain. \ Each glowing triangle is initially worth 5 points, but each successive triangle you collect is worth an addition 5 points (5, 10, 15, 20, etc.). If you miss a triangle the point value starts back over at 5. \ Once you reach the hole at the end of the path you are taken to the spider screen. \ The Spiders: Your guy is now a small Indiana Jones looking character. The goal of this level is to run past the spiders and get to the hole at the bottom of the screen before the timer runs out. \ If you get hit by one of the spiders, you start over at the top of the screen and lose a life. The spiders are fast and hard to avoid because they bounce around the screen, but you can always find a safe zone at the edges of each ledge. \ You can either run (your normal mode of transportation) or walk by holding down the fire button. Walking allows you to move more accurately, but since it's speed that counts you'll want to run to the exit. \ You have 15 seconds to complete this level, but since the timer counts in tenths of a second it starts at 1500. \ From here on every time you complete a level you'll get 100 points for each second left on timer. In the higher mines the spiders are faster and move more erratically. \ Elevators: This level starts to appear beginning in mine 2. The board structure is very similar to the spider level, but instead of avoiding spiders you need to avoid moving elevator platforms. \ If your man happens to bump into a moving platform he'll be thrown back a bit, but if he steps onto one he'll be transported back to the top of the elevator. \ Since time is short anything that keeps you from getting to the screen is bad, even if it's not deadly. For some reason the holes in the ledges have been replaced by white hatches, but they function the same way. \ In later mines the speed of the elevators increases dramatically. \ Ledges: This level begins to appear starting in mine 3. You must carefully maneuver you man as he falls from ledge to ledge, avoiding the fireballs being shot from the sides of the mine. \ The fireballs move with blinding speed, and with your slow rate of decent there is almost time to avoid them. You can tell where the fireballs are about come from by looking for the red glow around the rocks on the sides of the screen. \ The best strategy for this level is to land on each ledge and wait for the next fireball to launch before continuing. \ The Mashers: This level starts to appear from mine 4 onward. At first glance the level appears to be empty, but suddenly large mashers will quickly descend and retract from the ceiling. \ Timing is crucial on this level as the mashers are very fast and are invisible until they descend from the ceiling. As always, your goal is to reach the bottom of the screen before the timer runs out. \ The Miner: After your man falls down the shaft you can either walk over to the left and save the stranded miner (ala HERO), or exit to the right and forget the miner. \ Grabbing the miner doesn't seem to do anything, but since this is the goal of the game it would be dumb not to. If you choose to rescue the miner you can levitate out of the hole by pushing against the wall. \ There are large boulders which fall down from the top of the shaft, but they're slow so they don't pose much of a threat. \ The River: This is always the last level in each mine. On this level you must move your man through the gaps in the river walls while avoiding the deadly piranha. \ Your man will automatically move through the gaps in the river when he is in front of them, but since the level is constantly scrolling forward this is a good thing. \ If you get bumped off the bottom of the screen or touch a piranha your man will be killed and you'll have to start the level over. \ The higher the mine level, the faster the fish and scrolling become. If you complete this level you will be transported to the next mine. [Thwocker] File=/rom/Thwocker.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Thwocker Year=1984 Genre=Atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Turbo] File=/rom/Turbo.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Turbo Year=1982 Genre=Prototype Description=Based on the 1981 Sega coin-op of the same name, Turbo is one of those prototypes that everyone was sure existed somewhere (it was shown at the 1983 CES once), but never seemed to show up. Note= \ Player Mode: Single Player Game. \ \ Thankfully all this changed when former Atari 2600 programmer Anthony Henderson happened to stumble across his long lost copy of Turbo while searching his attic. According the programmer, Coleco originally wanted the game to use paddle controllers in order to better simulate a steering wheel. \ However reading the input from paddle controllers takes up considerably more clock cycles than reading regular joysticks, and there was not enough time to animate the road edges. \ After pleading with Coleco, they were allowed switch the game from using paddles to joysticks, which freed up enough time to insert the road edge movement but the game was cancelled before it was actually implemented. \ Other missing features include the ambulance, water puddles, and the enemy car AI (although implemented in the current prototype, it was never tweaked and finalized). \ The game difficulty also needed to be tweaked a little as dodging oncoming cars in this version is more a matter of luck than skill. \ According to the programmer there was actually one more revision of the game completed before the project was cancelled that included moving trees on the sides of the road on the curve stages. \ It is unknown what happened to that particular prototype. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Unknown] File=/rom/Activision.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Unknown 1 Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Unknown II] File=/rom/Activision2.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Unknown 2 Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Heart Like a Wheel] File=/rom/Fox.a26 Platform=20thCenturyFox Sort=Heart Like a Wheel Year=1984 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Unknown Game] File=/rom/DataTech.a26 Platform=DataTech Sort=Unknown 3 Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Mazy Match] File=/rom/DataTech2.a26 Platform=DataTech Sort=Mazy Match Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Multi-player game (1-2) \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Venetian Blinds] File=/rom/VenetianBlinds.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Venetian Blinds Year=1982 Genre=atvi Description=Venetian Blinds demo não é um jogo, ele se encaixaria melhor como um teste de tecnologia, onde é simulada uma persiana que pode ser levantada e abaixada com o seu controle clássico, mostrando um belo por do sol. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ Existe toda uma história por traz desse demo que é muito interessante. \ Não sei se todos sabem, mas a Activision foi fundada por ex-funcionários da Atari que saíram por causa da política de reconhecimento dos programadores, ou a falta dela. \ \ Um desses funcionários era o Bob Whitehead, criador da Tecnica Venetian Blinds (é um algoritmo que renderiza cada frame a partir de uma reutilização do espaço horizontal e de um interlaço vertical, \ criando assim uma ilusão de que o sistema tem mais números de sprites do que ele realmente tem), que primeiramente foi utilizada no jogo desenvolvido pela Atari o Video Chess ou Computer Chess que mostrava oito objetos \ na tela ao invés de apenas seis. A Activision nunca usou a técnica em nenhum de seus jogos, mas isso não impediu a Atari de processar a Activision por “roubar” a técnica alem de outras informações de propriedade da Atari. \ \ Desde que a Activision sabia que não tinha roubado nada da Atari, eles decidiram fazer uma piada pra cima deles. \ De acordo com David Crane, quando os advogados da Atari perguntaram sobre o roubo da técnica David mostrou a demo e disse “É sobre isso que vocês estão se referindo?”. \ Aparentemente a Atari não estava de bom humor e levou até o fim esse processo. No final, a Atari perdeu o processo e a Activision se tornou dentre as empresas da linha Atari 2600, a mais bem sucedida. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games, and the P2 or right slot joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Toggle Switches for Difficulty. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Walt Disney: Donald Duck's Speedboat] File=/rom/DonaldDuck.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Walt Disney Donald Duck Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description=Help Donald Duck maneuver his speedboat through an obstacle course of deadly rocks, dangerous whirl pools, and other water hazards as fast as possible to get to the finish line. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Instructions. [Walt Disney: Dumbo's Flying Circus] File=/rom/Dumbo.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Walt Disney Dumbos Flying Circus Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description=Help guide Dumbo around the screen and catch or shoot balloons before they reach the top of the screen. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. Instructions \ Some balloons have bombs attached to them and are deadly to the touch, so they must be shot down using peanuts from your trunk. Every now and then you will see a balloon with a clown riding it, you must shoot these balloons and catch the falling clown before he hits the bottom. \ If the clown makes it to the top of the screen he'll stay up there and begin to drop things on you. \ Every time three balloons reach the top of the screen the ceiling gets slightly lower, this gives you less and less room to grab the incoming balloons. \ The ceiling can be raised a bit by safely catching clowns or by winning the bonus round. \ At the end of each wave you are presented with a bonus round where your mouse friend (Timothy Q. Mouse) comes flying from the left side out the screen. \ If you can catch him before he bounces off to the right, you earn some bonus points and he'll raise the ceiling a bit. \ After the bonus round you are shown a status screen which displays the number of clowns you've caught, and the number of lives you have left. \ After two waves you are presented with an intermission where Dumbo picks up and flies around the screen with a banner that says Dumbo. [Xevious] File=/rom/Xevious.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Xevious Year=1983 Genre=Prototype Description=It's a nightmare, but it's true. Scientific research has determined that we are the actual aliens on Earth and the evil Xevions are the original inhabitants. \ Now the Xevions want Earth back, minus the humans! Earth's last hope is an experimental fighter plane known as the Solvalou. The mission is dangerous, success isn't guaranteed, and odds are this is a one-way trip. \ But at this point it's do or die! Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ This is an unfinished protype. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ A=Slow, B=Fast \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. [Airlock] File=/rom/Airlock.a26 Platform=DataAge Sort=Airlock Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Air Raid] File=/rom/AirRaid.a26 Platform=Men-A-Vision Sort=Air Raid 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sesame Street: Alpha Beam with Ernie] File=/rom/AlphaBeamwithErnie.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sesame Street Alpha Beam Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Apples and Dolls] File=/rom/ApplesAndDolls.a26 Platform=unclassified Sort=Apples and Dolls Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Assault] File=/rom/Assault.a26 Platform=Bomb Sort=Assault Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Asteroid Fire] File=/rom/AsteroidFire.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=Asteroids 0 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Astro War] File=/rom/AstroWar.a26 Platform=Goliath Sort=Astro War Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Base Attack] File=/rom/BaseAttack.a26 Platform=Bomb Sort=Base Attack Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Basic Math] File=/rom/BasicMath.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Basic Math Year=1980 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sesame Street: Big Bird's Egg Catch] File=/rom/BigBirdsEggCatch.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sesame Street Big Bird Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [BMX: Air Master] File=/rom/BMX.a26 Platform=TNT Sort=Bmx Air Master Year=1989 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Boing!] File=/rom/Boing.a26 Platform=First Star Sort=Boing Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Brain Games] File=/rom/BrainGames.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Brain Games Year=1978 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Challenge] File=/rom/Challenge.a26 Platform=Unknown Sort=Challenge Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [China Syndrome] File=/rom/ChinaSyndrome.a26 Platform=Spectravision Sort=China Syndrome Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Codebreaker] File=/rom/Codebreaker.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Codebreaker Year=1978 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Concentration] File=/rom/Concentration.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Concentration Year=1978 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Condor Attack] File=/rom/CondorAttack.a26 Platform=K-Tel Sort=Condor Attack Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sesame Street: Cookie Monster] File=/rom/CookieMonster.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sesame Street Cookie Monster Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cosmic Creeps] File=/rom/CosmicCreeps.a26 Platform=Telesys Sort=Cosmic Creeps Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cosmic Swarm] File=/rom/CosmicSwarm.a26 Platform=CommaVid Sort=CosmicSwarm Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Criminal Persuit] File=/rom/CriminalPersuit.a26 Platform=Quelle Sort=CriminalPersuit Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cross Force] File=/rom/CrossForce.a26 Platform=Spectravision Sort=Cross Force Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dancing Plate] File=/rom/DancingPlate.a26 Platform=BitCorp Sort=Dancing Plate Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Death Trap] File=/rom/DeathTrap.a26 Platform=Avalon Hill Sort=Death Trap Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Demolition Herby] File=/rom/DemolitionHerby.a26 Platform=Telesys Sort=Demolition Herby Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dishaster] File=/rom/Dishaster.a26 Platform=ZiMAG Sort=Dishaster Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dice Puzzle] File=/rom/DicePuzzle.a26 Platform=Sancho Sort=Dice Puzzle Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dragon Defender] File=/rom/DragonDefender.a26 Platform=Quelle Sort=Dragon Defender Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [DragonStomper] File=/rom/Dragonstomper.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Dragonstomper Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game ["Eli's Ladder"] File=/rom/ElisLadder.a26 Platform=Simage Sort=Eli's Ladder Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Entombed] File=/rom/Entombed.a26 Platform=USGames Sort=Entombed Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Escape from the Mindmaster] File=/rom/EscapeMindmaster.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=Escape from the Mindmaster Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Exocet] File=/rom/Exocet.a26 Platform=Goliath Sort=Exocet Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Farmyard Fun] File=/rom/FarmyardFun.a26 Platform=Quelle Sort=Farmyard Fun Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Final Approach] File=/rom/FinalApproach.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Final Approach Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Fire Fly] File=/rom/FireFly.a26 Platform=Mythicon Sort=Fire Fly Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Firebug] File=/rom/Firebug.a26 Platform=Suntek Sort=Firebug Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Frisco] File=/rom/Frisco.a26 Platform=Homevision Sort=Frisco Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Forest] File=/rom/Forest.a26 Platform=Sancho Sort=Forest Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gamma Attack] File=/rom/GammaAttack.a26 Platform=Gammation Sort=GammaAttack Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gangster Alley] File=/rom/GangsterAlley.a26 Platform=Spectravision Sort=Gangster Alley Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gas Hog] File=/rom/GasHog.a26 Platform=Spectravideo Sort=Gas Hog Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ghost Manor] File=/rom/GhostManor.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Ghost Manor Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Glacier Patrol] File=/rom/GlacierPatrol.a26 Platform=Telegames Sort=Glacier Patrol Year=1988 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Glib: Video Word Game] File=/rom/Glib.a26 Platform=QDI Sort=Glib Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Go Go Home Monster] File=/rom/GoGoHomeMonster.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=GoGoHomeMonster Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gopher] File=/rom/Gopher.a26 Platform=U.S. Games Sort=Gopher Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Great Escape] File=/rom/GreatEscape.a26 Platform=Bomb Sort=Great Escape Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sesame Street: Grover's Music Maker] File=/rom/GroversMusicMaker.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sesame Street Grovers Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hell Driver] File=/rom/HellDriver.a26 Platform=ITT Family Games Sort=Hell Driver Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hole Hunter] File=/rom/HoleHunter.a26 Platform=Unknown Sort=Hole Hunter Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hunt & Score] File=/rom/HuntScore.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Hunt e Score Year=1978 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [I Want My Mommy] File=/rom/IWantMyMommy.a26 Platform=ZiMAG Sort=I Want My Mommy Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Inca Gold] File=/rom/IncaGold.a26 Platform=Funvision Sort=Inca Gold Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Infiltrate] File=/rom/Infiltrate.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Infiltrate Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [I.Q. 180] File=/rom/IQ180.a26 Platform=Unknown Sort=I Q 180 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [I.Q. Memory Teaser] File=/rom/IQMemoryTeaser.a26 Platform=Unknown Sort=I Q Memory Teaser Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Karate] File=/rom/Karate.a26 Platform=Ultavision Sort=Karate Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Killer Satellites] File=/rom/KillerSatellites.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=KillerSatellites Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Lilly Adventure] File=/rom/LillyAdventure.a26 Platform=Homevision Sort=Lilly Adventure Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Lochjaw] File=/rom/Lochjaw.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Lochjaw Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [London Blitz] File=/rom/LondonBlitz.a26 Platform=Avalon Hill Sort=London Blitz Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Lost Luggage] File=/rom/LostLuggage.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Lost Luggage Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [M.A.D.] File=/rom/MAD.a26 Platform=USGames Sort=M A D Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Malagai] File=/rom/Malagai.a26 Platform=Answer Sort=Malagai Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mangia'] File=/rom/Mangia.a26 Platform=Spectravideo Sort=Mangia Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Master Builder] File=/rom/MasterBuilder.a26 Platform=Spectravideo Sort=Master Builder Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [MegaBoy Compact] File=/rom/MegaBoy.a26 Platform=Dynacom Sort=MegaBoy Compact Year=1992 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mines of Minos] File=/rom/MinesMinos.a26 Platform=CommaVid Sort=Mines of Minos Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Missile Control] File=/rom/MissileControl.a26 Platform=VideoGems Sort=Missile Control Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mission 3000] File=/rom/Mission3000AD.a26 Platform=BitCorp Sort=Mission 3000 AD Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mission Survive] File=/rom/MissionSurvive.a26 Platform=VideoGems Sort=Mission Survive Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mogul Maniac] File=/rom/MogulManiac.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=Mogul Maniac Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Motocross] File=/rom/Motocross.a26 Platform=Suntek Sort=Motocross 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Motocross Racer] File=/rom/MotocrossRacer.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Motocross 2 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Music Machine] File=/rom/MusicMachine.a26 Platform=Sparrow Sort=Music Machine Year=1983 Genre=paddle, unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ Note: Paddle-based game. It might not control well with a joystick. Paddles must be plugged in after a game is started. [My Golf] File=/rom/MyGolf.a26 Platform=HES Sort=My Golf Year=1990 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Challenge of Nexar] File=/rom/Nexar.a26 Platform=Spectravision Sort=Challenge of Nexar Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Nightmare] File=/rom/Nightmare.a26 Platform=Sancho Sort=Nightmare Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Nuts] File=/rom/Nuts.a26 Platform=TechnoVision Sort=Nuts Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ocean City Defender] File=/rom/OceanCityDefender.a26 Platform=Zellers Sort=Ocean City Defender Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Open Sesame] File=/rom/OpenSesame.a26 Platform=Goliath Sort=Open Sesame Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sesame Street: Oscar's Trash Race] File=/rom/OscarsTrashRace.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sesame Street Oscars Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Out Of Control] File=/rom/OutOfControl.a26 Platform=Avalon Hill Sort=Out Of Control Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Panda Chase] File=/rom/PandaChase.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=Panda Chase Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Parachute] File=/rom/Parachute.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=Parachute Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Peter Penguin] File=/rom/PeterPenguin.a26 Platform=ITT Family Games Sort=Peter Penguin Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Phantom Tank] File=/rom/PhantomTank.a26 Platform=Goliath Sort=Phantom Tank Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pharaoh's Curse] File=/rom/PharaohsCurse.a26 Platform=TechnoVision Sort=Pharaohs Curse Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Phaser Patrol] File=/rom/PhaserPatrol.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=Phaser Patrol Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pick 'n Pile] File=/rom/PicknPile.a26 Platform=Salu Sort=Pick n Pile Year=1990 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Planet Patrol] File=/rom/PlanetPatrol.a26 Platform=Spectravision Sort=Planet Patrol Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Quest for Quintana Roo] File=/rom/QuestQuintanaRoo.a26 Platform=Telegames Sort=Quest for Quintana Roo Year=1988 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rabbit Transit] File=/rom/RabbitTransit.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=Rabbit Transit Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Racing Car] File=/rom/RacingCar.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=Racing Car Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Racquetball] File=/rom/Racquetball.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Racquetball Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Radar] File=/rom/Radar.a26 Platform=Zellers Sort=Radar 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Raft Rider] File=/rom/RaftRider.a26 Platform=USGames Sort=Raft Rider Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [- Ram It -] File=/rom/RamIt.a26 Platform=Telesys Sort=Ram It Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Raumpatrouille] File=/rom/Raumpatrouille.a26 Platform=Quelle Sort=Raumpatrouille Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Red Sea Crossing] File=/rom/RedSeaCrossing.a26 Platform=IVC Sort=Red Sea Crossing Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rescue Terra I] File=/rom/RescueTerraI.a26 Platform=Venture Vision Sort=Rescue Terra I Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Robin Hood] File=/rom/RobinHood.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Robin Hood Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Room Of Doom] File=/rom/RoomOfDoom.a26 Platform=CommaVid Sort=Room Of Doom Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Save Our Ship] File=/rom/SaveOurShip.a26 Platform=TechnoVision Sort=Save Our Ship Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Seahawk] File=/rom/Seahawk.a26 Platform=Sancho Sort=Seahawk Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sea Hunt] File=/rom/SeaHunt.a26 Platform=Froggo Games Sort=Sea Hunt Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sea Monster] File=/rom/SeaMonster.a26 Platform=Puzzy Sort=Sea Monster Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Shuttle Orbiter] File=/rom/ShuttleOrbiter.a26 Platform=Avalon Hill Sort=Shuttle Orbiter Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sir Lancelot] File=/rom/SirLancelot.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Sir Lancelot Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Skeet Shoot] File=/rom/SkeetShoot.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Skeet Shoot Year=1981 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Skindiver] File=/rom/Skindiver.a26 Platform=Sancho Sort=Skindiver Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sky Alien] File=/rom/SkyAlien.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=Sky Alien Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Snail Against Squirrel] File=/rom/SnailAgainstSquirrel.a26 Platform=BitCorp Sort=Snail Against Squirrel Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sorcerer] File=/rom/Sorcerer.a26 Platform=Mythicon Sort=Sorcerer Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Cavern] File=/rom/SpaceCavern.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Space Cavern Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spacechase] File=/rom/Spacechase.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Space Chase Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Jockey] File=/rom/SpaceJockey.a26 Platform=U.S. Games Sort=Space Jockey Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spectracube Invasion] File=/rom/SpectracubeInvasion.a26 Platform=Suntek Sort=Spectracube Invasion Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spider Maze] File=/rom/SpiderMaze.a26 Platform=K-Tel Sort=Spider Maze Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spike's Peak] File=/rom/SpikesPeak.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Spikes Peak Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spitfire Attack] File=/rom/SpitfireAttack.a26 Platform=Milton Bradley Sort=Spitfire Attack Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Squeeze Box] File=/rom/SqueezeBox.a26 Platform=U.S. Games Sort=Squeeze Box Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Star Fox] File=/rom/StarFox.a26 Platform=Mythicon Sort=Star Fox Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Stargunner] File=/rom/Stargunner.a26 Platform=Telesys Sort=Stargunner Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Stronghold] File=/rom/Stronghold.a26 Platform=CommaVid Sort=Stronghold Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Stunt Man] File=/rom/StuntMan.a26 Platform=Panda Sort=Stunt Man Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Suicide Mission] File=/rom/SuicideMission.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=Suicide Mission Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Surfer's Paradise] File=/rom/SurfersParadise.a26 Platform=Video Gems Sort=Surfers Paradise Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Survival Island] File=/rom/SurvivalIsland.a26 Platform=Starpath Corporation Sort=Survival Island Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Survival Run] File=/rom/SurvivalRun.a26 Platform=Milton Bradley Sort=Survival Run Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sword of Saros] File=/rom/SwordOfSaros.a26 Platform=Starpath Corporation Sort=Sword of Saros Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tanks But No Tanks] File=/rom/TanksButNoTanks.a26 Platform=ZiMAG Sort=Tanks But No Tanks Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tapeworm] File=/rom/Tapeworm.a26 Platform=Spectravision Sort=Tapeworm Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tax Avoiders] File=/rom/TaxAvoiders.a26 Platform=American Videogame Sort=Tax Avoiders Year=1986 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Time Warp] File=/rom/TimeWarp.a26 Platform=Funvision Sort=TimeWarp Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tomarc the Barbarian] File=/rom/TomarcBarbarian.a26 Platform=Xonox Sort=Tomarc the Barbarian Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tooth Protectors] File=/rom/ToothProtectors.a26 Platform=Camelot Sort=Tooth Protectors Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Topy] File=/rom/Topy.a26 Platform=Jone Yuan Sort=Topy Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Treasure Below] File=/rom/TreasureBelow.a26 Platform=Video Gems Sort=Treasure Below Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Treasure Island] File=/rom/TreasureIsland.a26 Platform=Suntek Sort=Treasure Island Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Universal Chaos] File=/rom/UniversalChaos.a26 Platform=Telegames Sort=Universal Chaos Year=1988 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Video Jogger] File=/rom/VideoJogger.a26 Platform=Exus Sort=Video Jogger 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Video Life] File=/rom/VideoLife.a26 Platform=CommaVid Sort=Video Life Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Video Reflex] File=/rom/VideoReflex.a26 Platform=Exus Sort=Video Jogger 2 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Vulture Attack] File=/rom/VultureAttack.a26 Platform=KTel Sort=Vulture Attack Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Wabbit] File=/rom/Wabbit.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Wabbit Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Walker] File=/rom/Walker.a26 Platform=Suntek Sort=Walker Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Wall Ball] File=/rom/WallBall.a26 Platform=Avalon Sort=Wall Ball Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Wall Break] File=/rom/WallBreak.a26 Platform=Bomb Sort=Wall Break Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Wall Defender] File=/rom/WallDefender.a26 Platform=Bomb Sort=WallDefender Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Words-Attack] File=/rom/WordsAttack.a26 Platform=Sancho Sort=Words Attack Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Word Zapper] File=/rom/WordZapper.a26 Platform=U.S. Games Sort=Word Zapper Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [World End] File=/rom/WorldEnd.a26 Platform=Home Vision Sort=World End Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [X'Mission] File=/rom/XMission.a26 Platform=Unknown Sort=X Mission Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Z-Tack] File=/rom/ZTack.a26 Platform=Bomb Sort=Z Tack Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Zoo Fun] File=/rom/ZooFun.a26 Platform=ITT Sort=ZooFun Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Alfred Challenge] File=/rom/AlfredChallenge.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=AlfredChallenge Year=1998 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Alien Greed] File=/rom/AlienGreed.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Alien Greed 1 Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Alien Greed II] File=/rom/AlienGreed2.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Alien Greed 2 Year=2008 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Alien Greed 3] File=/rom/AlienGreed3.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Alien Greed 3 Year=2010 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Alien Greed 4] File=/rom/AlienGreed4.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Alien Greed 4 Year=2011 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Angry Video Game Nerd] File=/rom/AVGN.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Angry Video Game Nerd 1 Year=2013 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Asteroids Arcade] File=/rom/ArcadeAsteroids.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Asteroids 2 Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Astar] File=/rom/AStar.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Astar Year=2006 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [AVCStec Challenge] File=/rom/A-VCS-tecChallenge.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=AVCSTec Challenge Year=2006 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Angry Video Game Nerd: K.O. Boxing] File=/rom/AVGN-KO-Boxing.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Angry Video Game Nerd 2 Year=2009 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Backfire] File=/rom/Backfire.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Backfire Year=2003 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bifröst] File=/rom/Bifrost.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Bifrost Year=2019 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Blinky Goes Up] File=/rom/BlinkyGoesUp.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Blinky Goes Up Year=2012 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [BLiP Football] File=/rom/BLiPFootball.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=BLiP Football Year=2006 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bomb On Pixel City] File=/rom/BombOnPixelCity.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Bomb On Pixel City Year=2012 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cave In] File=/rom/CaveIn.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Cave In Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Caverns of Mars] File=/rom/CavernsofMars.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Caverns of Mars Year=2006 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cosmic Invaders] File=/rom/CosmicInvaders.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Cosmic Invaders Year=2009 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cubis] File=/rom/Cubis.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Cubis Year=1997 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Crazy Valet] File=/rom/CrazyValet.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Crazy Valet Year=2000 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dark Mage] File=/rom/DarkMage.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dark Mage Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Defender Arcade] File=/rom/DefenderArcade.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Defender 1 Year=2008 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dig Dug Arcade] File=/rom/DigDugArcade.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dig Dug 2 Year=2009 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Duck Attack!] File=/rom/DuckAttack.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Duck Attack Year=2010 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dungeon] File=/rom/Dungeon.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dungeon Year=2009 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Edtris 2600] File=/rom/Edtris2600.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Edtris 2600 Year=1995 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Encaved] File=/rom/Encaved.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Encaved Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Enigma Machine] File=/rom/EnigmaMachine.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Enigma Machine Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Euchre: Special Edition] File=/rom/Euchre.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Euchre Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Evil Magician Returns] File=/rom/EvilMagicianReturns.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Evil Magician Returns Year=2009 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Fix-It Felix Jr.] File=/rom/FixItFelix.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Fix It Felix Jr Year=2014 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Flap-Ping] File=/rom/FlapPing.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Flap Ping Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Flappy] File=/rom/Flappy.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Flappy 1 Year=2014 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Four-Play] File=/rom/FourPlay.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Four Play Year=2006 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gauntlet 2600] File=/rom/Gauntlet2600.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Gauntlet 2600 Year=2015 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gingerbread Man] File=/rom/GingerbreadMan.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Gingerbread Man Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Go Fish!] File=/rom/GoFish.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Go Fish Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Go Sub] File=/rom/GoSub.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Go Sub Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gorf Arcade] File=/rom/GorfArcade.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Gorf 2 Year=2004 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gunfight] File=/rom/Gunfight.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Gunfight Year=2001 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hunchy 2] File=/rom/HunchyII.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Hunchy 2 Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [I Project] File=/rom/IProject.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=I Project Year=2008 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Incoming!] File=/rom/Incoming.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Incoming Year=2008 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [INV] File=/rom/INV.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Inv 1 Year=1998 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [inv+] File=/rom/INV+.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Inv 2 Year=2004 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Joust Pong] File=/rom/JoustPong.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Joust 2 Year=2004 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Katamari] File=/rom/Katamari.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Katamari Year=2013 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [K.O. Cruiser] File=/rom/KO-Cruiser.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=KO Cruiser Year=2009 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Lead] File=/rom/Lead.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Lead Year=2008 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Lord of the Rings: The Fellowship of the Ring] File=/rom/LordRings_FellowshipRing.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Lord of the Rings Fellowship Ring Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Marble Craze] File=/rom/MarbleCraze.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Marble Craze Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mental Kombat] File=/rom/MentalKombat.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Mental Kombat Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Merlin's Walls] File=/rom/MerlinsWalls.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Merlins Walls Year=1999 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mine Sweeper] File=/rom/Minesweeper.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Mine Sweeper Year=2015 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mondo Pong] File=/rom/MondoPong.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Mondo Pong Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mortal Kombat: Netherrealm Journey] File=/rom/MKNJ.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Mortal Kombat 2 Year=2015 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mortal Kombat] File=/rom/MortalKombat.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Mortal Kombat 1 Year=2016 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Muncher] File=/rom/Muncher.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Muncher Year=2003 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Okie Dokie] File=/rom/OkieDokie.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Okie Dokie Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Omicron] File=/rom/Omicron.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Omicron Year=2013 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Oystron] File=/rom/Oystron.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Oystron Year=1997 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pesco] File=/rom/Pesco.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Pesco Year=1999 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Piñata] File=/rom/Pinata.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Pinata Year=2014 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pirate: Special Edition] File=/rom/PirateSpecialEdition.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Pirate Special Edition Year=2011 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Poker Squares] File=/rom/PokerSquares.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Poker Squares Year=2001 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Power Off] File=/rom/PowerOff.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Power Off Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pressure Gauge] File=/rom/PressureGauge.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Pressure Gauge Year=2000 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Princess Rescue] File=/rom/PrincessRescue.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Princess Rescue Year=2013 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Qb] File=/rom/Qb.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Q B1 Year=2001 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Q*bert Arcade] File=/rom/QBertArcade.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Q Bert 2 Year=2011 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rainbow Invaders] File=/rom/RainbowInvaders.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Rainbow Invaders Year=2006 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Raster Fahndung] File=/rom/RasterFahndung.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Raster Fahndung Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Reindeer Rescue] File=/rom/ReindeerRescue.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Reindeer Rescue Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rescue Bira Bira] File=/rom/RescueBiraBira.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Rescue Bira Bira Year=1997 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Revenge of the Apes] File=/rom/RevengeApes.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Revenge Apes Year=2003 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [SCSIcide] File=/rom/SCSIcide.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=SCSIcide Year=2001 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Seaweed Assault] File=/rom/SeaweedAssault.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Seaweed Assault Year=2011 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Skeleton] File=/rom/Skeleton.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Skeleton 1 Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Skeleton+] File=/rom/Skeleton+.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Skeleton 2 Year=2003 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Solar Plexus] File=/rom/SolarPlexus.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Solar Plexus Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Battle] File=/rom/SpaceBattle.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Battle Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Duel] File=/rom/SpaceDuel.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Duel Year=2010 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Instigators] File=/rom/SpaceInstigators.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Instigators Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Treat] File=/rom/SpaceTreat.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Treat 1 Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Treat Deluxe] File=/rom/SpaceTreatDeluxe.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Space Treat 2 Year=2003 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Squish 'Em] File=/rom/SquishEm.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=SquishEm Year=2007 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Star Fire] File=/rom/StarFire.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Star Fire Year=2003 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Stell-A-Sketch] File=/rom/StellASketch.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Stell A Sketch Year=2001 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [StratOGems Deluxe] File=/rom/StratOGemsDeluxe.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Strat O Gems Deluxe Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Super Mario Bros.] File=/rom/SuperMario.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Super Mario Bros Year=2013 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Swoops!] File=/rom/Swoops.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Swoops Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sync] File=/rom/Sync.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Sync Year=2008 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Synthcart] File=/rom/Synthcart.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Synthcart Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Thrus+] File=/rom/Thrust+DC.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Thrust 1 Year=2000 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Thrus+: Platinum Edition] File=/rom/Thrust+Platinum.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Thrust 2 Year=2004 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ultra SCSIcide] File=/rom/UltraSCSIcide.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Ultra SCSIcide Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Vault Assault] File=/rom/VaultAssault.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Vault Assault Year=2001 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Venture II: The Abysmal Abyss] File=/rom/VentureII.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Venture 3 Year=2001 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Video Simon] File=/rom/VideoSimon.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Video Simon Year=2000 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Vong] File=/rom/Vong.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Vong Year=2008 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Warring Worms] File=/rom/WarringWorms.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Warring Worms 1 Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Warring Worms: The Worm (Re)turns] File=/rom/WarringWorms_WormReTurns.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Warring Worms 2 Year=2005 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Yahtzee] File=/rom/Yahtzee.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Yahtzee Year=2000 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Z-Blocks] File=/rom/Z-Blocks.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Z-Blocks Year=2002 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Genesis 3D] File=/rom/3DGenesis.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=Genesis 3D Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ghost Attack! 3D] File=/rom/3DGhostattack.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=Ghost Attack 3D Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Havoc 3D] File=/rom/3DHavoc.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=Havoc 3D Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Androman on the Moon] File=/rom/AndroMan.a26 Platform=Androbot Sort=AndroMan Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Atom Smasher] File=/rom/AtomSmasher.a26 Platform=Video Soft Sort=Atom Smasher Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bionic Breakthrough] File=/rom/BionicBreakthrough.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Bionic Breakthrough Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Computer Chess] File=/rom/ComputerChess.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Computer Chess Year=1978 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Confrontation] File=/rom/Confrontation.a26 Platform=Answer Sort=Confrontation Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Depth Charge] File=/rom/DepthCharge.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=Depth Charge Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dune] File=/rom/Dune.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dune Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Funky Fish] File=/rom/FunkyFish.a26 Platform=UA Limited Sort=Funky Fish Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Holey Moley] File=/rom/HoleyMoley.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Holey Moley Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Immies And Aggies] File=/rom/ImmiesAndAggies.a26 Platform=ZiMAG Sort=Immies And Aggies Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ixion] File=/rom/Ixion.a26 Platform=Sega Sort=Ixion Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Kamikaze Saucers] File=/rom/KamikazeSaucers.a26 Platform=Syncro Sort=Kamikaze Saucers Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Kyphus] File=/rom/Kyphus.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Kyphus Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Last Starfighter] File=/rom/LastStarfighter.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Last Starfighter Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mind Maze] File=/rom/MindMaze.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Mind Maze Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sesame Street: Monstercise] File=/rom/MonsterCise.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sesame Street Monstercise Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Off Your Rocker] File=/rom/OffYourRocker.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=Off Your Rocker Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Peek A Boo] File=/rom/PeekABoo.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Peek A Boo Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pizza Chef] File=/rom/PizzaChef.a26 Platform=ZiMAG Sort=Pizza Chef Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pleiades] File=/rom/Pleiades.a26 Platform=UA Limited Sort=Pleiades Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pompeii] File=/rom/Pompeii.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Pompeii Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rocky & Bullwinkle] File=/rom/RockyAndBullwinkle.a26 Platform=M Network Sort=Rocky And Bullwinkle Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rubik's Cube 3-D] File=/rom/RubiksCube3D.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Rubiks Cube 3D Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rush Hour] File=/rom/RushHour.a26 Platform=Commavid Sort=Rush Hour Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [S.A.C. Alert] File=/rom/SACAlert.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=SAC Alert Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Secret Agent] File=/rom/SecretAgent.a26 Platform=Data Age Sort=Secret Agent Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Shooting Arcade] File=/rom/ShootingArcade.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Shooting Arcade Year=1989 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spinning Fireball] File=/rom/SpinningFireball.a26 Platform=Zimag Sort=Spinning Fireball Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Squoosh!] File=/rom/Squoosh.a26 Platform=Apollo Sort=Squoosh Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Stunt Cycle] File=/rom/StuntCycle.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Stunt Cycle Year=1980 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Surf's Up] File=/rom/SurfsUp.a26 Platform=Amiga Sort=Surf's Up Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Wings] File=/rom/Wings.a26 Platform=CBS Sort=Wings Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [32 in 1 Game Cartridge] File=/rom/32in1.a26 Platform=unclassified Sort=01 32 in 1 Year=1988 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Basic Programming] File=/rom/BasicProgramming.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Basic Programming Year=1979 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Berenstain Bears] File=/rom/BerenstainBears.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Berenstain Bears Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [CompuMate] File=/rom/CompuMate.a26 Platform=Spectravideo Sort=CompuMate Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [MagiCard] File=/rom/MagiCard.a26 Platform=Commavid Sort=MagiCard Year=1981 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [McDonald's Golden Arches Adventure] File=/rom/McDonalds.a26 Platform=Parker Bros Sort=McDonalds Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Racer] File=/rom/Racer.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Racer Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sentinel] File=/rom/Sentinel.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Sentinel Year=1990 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Smurfs Save the Day] File=/rom/Smurfs2.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Smurf 2 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sweat! The Decathlon Game] File=/rom/SweatTheDecathlonGame2.a26 Platform=Arcadia Sort=Sweat The Decathlon Game Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Zoo Keeper] File=/rom/ZooKeeper.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=ZooKeeper Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Adventure III: Hell] File=/rom/Adventure3.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Adventure 6 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Adventure Plus] File=/rom/AdventurePlus.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Adventure 4 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Adventure Black] File=/rom/AdventureBlack.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Adventure 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Another Adventure] File=/rom/AnotherAdventure.a26 Platform=Hack Sort=Another Adventure Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Flappo Bird] File=/rom/FlappoBird.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Flappo Bird Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mario Bros. 4K] File=/rom/MarioBros4K.a26 Platform=Nintendo Sort=Mario Bros 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ms. Pac-Man Black] File=/rom/MsPacManblack.a26 Platform=Namco Sort=Ms Pacman 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [River Raid Black] File=/rom/RiverRaidBlackV2.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=River Raid 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Climber 5] File=/rom/Climber5.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Climber 5 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Action Man: Action Force] File=/rom/ActionManActionForce.a26 Platform=Parker Bros Sort=Action Man Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Laser Volley] File=/rom/LaserVolley.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Laser Volley Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tank-Plus] File=/rom/TankPlus.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Tankplus Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Elevators Amiss] File=/rom/ElevatorsAmiss.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Elevators Amiss Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pac-Man 4K] File=/rom/PacMan4K.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pacman 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Arcade Golf] File=/rom/ArcadeGolf.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Arcade Golf Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Capture] File=/rom/Capture.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Capture Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bogey Blaster] File=/rom/BogeyBlaster.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Bogey Blaster Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Night Stalker] File=/rom/NightStalker.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Night Stalker Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Maze] File=/rom/Maze.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Maze Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Chess] File=/rom/Chess.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Chess Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cruise Missile] File=/rom/CruiseMissile.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Cruise Missile Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Crazy Balloon] File=/rom/CrazyBalloon.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Crazy Balloon Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Gunslinger] File=/rom/Gunslinger.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Gunslinger Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Slots] File=/rom/Slots.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Slots Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Combat] File=/rom/SpaceCombat.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Space Combat Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Speedway II] File=/rom/SpeedwayII.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Speedway 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Target Fun] File=/rom/TargetFun.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Target Fun Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [This Planet Sucks] File=/rom/ThisPlanetSucks.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=This Planet Sucks Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Task Force] File=/rom/TaskForce.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Task Force Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spiderdroid] File=/rom/Spiderdroid.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Spiderdroid Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tom Boy] File=/rom/TomBoy.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Tom Boy Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Top Gun] File=/rom/TopGun.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Top Gun Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Memory Match] File=/rom/MemoryMatch.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Memory Match Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pac-Kong] File=/rom/PacKong.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pac Kong Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Billard] File=/rom/Billard.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Billard Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bermuda] File=/rom/Bermuda.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Bermuda 1 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Air Wolf] File=/rom/AirWolf.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Air Wolf Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dragon Treasure] File=/rom/DragonTreasure.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dragon Treasure Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Galactic] File=/rom/Galactic.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Galactic Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Soccer] File=/rom/Soccer.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Soccer Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Adventure] File=/rom/SpaceAdventure.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Space Adventure Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Shark Attack] File=/rom/SharkAttack.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Shark Attack Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pong Sports] File=/rom/PongSports.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pong Sports Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pong Kombat] File=/rom/PongKombat.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Pong Kombat Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Canyon] File=/rom/SpaceCanyon.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Space Canyon Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [A Roach in Space] File=/rom/AroachInSpaceRC2.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Roach In Space Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Super Action Pak] File=/rom/SuperActionPak.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Super Action Pak Year=1984 Genre=atvi Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Space Robot] File=/rom/SpaceRobot.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Space Robot Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Super-Ferrari] File=/rom/SuperFerrari.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Super Ferrari Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Outer Space] File=/rom/OuterSpace.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Outer Space Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Boom Bang] File=/rom/BoomBang.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Boom Bang Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Chase] File=/rom/Chase.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Chase Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Race] File=/rom/Race.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Race Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cosmic Corridor] File=/rom/CosmicCorridor.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Cosmic Corridor Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Earth Attack] File=/rom/EarthAttack.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Earth Attack Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Alien Greed 5] File=/rom/AlienGreed5.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Alien Greed 5 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Doom] File=/rom/Doom.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Doom Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Donkey Kong 3] File=/rom/DonkeyKong3.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Donkey Kong 4 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [1942] File=/rom/1942.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=03 1942 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [AVP: Alien Vs. Predator] File=/rom/AVP.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=AVP Alien Vs Predator Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pitfall III: Harry Jr.] File=/rom/Pitfall3.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pitfall 3 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [INV2] File=/rom/INV2.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Inv 3 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Star Wars: Droidworld] File=/rom/SWDroidworld.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Star Wars 7 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Stay Frosty] File=/rom/StayFrosty.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Stay Frosty Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cold War] File=/rom/ColdWarFixed.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Cold War Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Grandma's Revenge] File=/rom/GrandmasRevenge.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Grandmas Revenge Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [A Very 2600 Christmas] File=/rom/AVery2600Christmas.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Very 2600 Christmas Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Santa's Helper] File=/rom/SantasHelper.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Santas Helper Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Elf Dash] File=/rom/ElfDash.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Elf Dash Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bell Hopper!] File=/rom/BellHopper.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Bell Hopper Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [CPS 2600 Diagnostic Test Cartridge] File=/rom/Test.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=C P S 2600 Diagnostic Test Cartridge Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Color Bar Generator] File=/rom/ColorBar.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Color Bar Generator Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Arctic Landtran] File=/rom/ArcticLandtran.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Arctic Landtran Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tossing Cookies] File=/rom/TossingCookies2.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Tossing Cookies Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Donkey Claus] File=/rom/DonkeyClaus.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Donkey Claus Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [AtariAge: Holliday Greetings 2003] File=/rom/HollidayGreetings2003.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=AtariAge Holliday Greetings 2003 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cosmic Avenger] File=/rom/CosmicAvenger.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Cosmic Avenger Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Amidar Double Speed] File=/rom/AmidarDoubleSpeed.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Amidar 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Snowboarding] File=/rom/Snowboarding.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Snowboarding Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Double Dragon Arcade] File=/rom/DoubleDragonArcade.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Double Dragon 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Donkey Kong Remix] File=/rom/DonkeyKongRemix.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Donkey Kong 1C Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Star Wars: Dark Empire] File=/rom/StarWarsDarkEmpire.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Star Wars 5 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Super 3D Portals 6] File=/rom/Super3DPortals6.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Super 3D Portals 6 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pink Floyd: The Wall] File=/rom/Pinkfloydwall.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pink Floyd The Wall Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Venture Arcade] File=/rom/VentureArcade.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Venture 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Atari 2600: testcart] File=/rom/TestCart.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Atari 2600 Testcart Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Krokodile Cartridge] File=/rom/Krokodile.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Krokodile Cartridge Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Venture III] File=/rom/Venture3.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Venture 4 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Centipede: 2K Edition] File=/rom/Centipede2K.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Centipede 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tempest (Fixed)] File=/rom/Tempestfix401.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Tempest 1 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Aardvark] File=/rom/Aardvark9.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Aardvark Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rocket Pod] File=/rom/RocketPod.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Rocket Pod Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Wings of Death] File=/rom/WingsOfDeath.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Wings Of Death Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pac-Man Vector] File=/rom/PacManVector.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pacman 6 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pac-Man 8K] File=/rom/PacMan8K.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pacman 3 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Galaga] File=/rom/Galaga.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Galaga Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pyramid War] File=/rom/PyramidWar.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pyramid War Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Zzyzzyx X] File=/rom/Zzyzzyxx.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Zzyzzy X Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Donkey Kong Arcade] File=/rom/DonkeyKongArcade.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Donkey Kong 1A Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Donkey Kong II: The Lost Levels] File=/rom/DonkeyKongII.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Donkey Kong 1Z Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Fat Albert] File=/rom/FatAlbert.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Fat Albert Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Mario Vs Luigi] File=/rom/MarioVsLuigi.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Mario Vs Luigi Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Meteor Defense] File=/rom/MeteorDefense.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Meteor Defense Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Root Beer Pong] File=/rom/RootBeerPong.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Root Beer Pong Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Zombie Chase] File=/rom/ZombieChase.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Zombie Chase Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Godzilla] File=/rom/Godzilla4K.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Godzilla Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Death Match] File=/rom/DeathMatch.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Death Match Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Grave Robber] File=/rom/GraveRobber.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Grave Robber Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Donkey Kong Arcade 2600] File=/rom/DKArcade2600.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Donkey Kong 1B Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Donkey Kong: The Missing Levels] File=/rom/DonkeyKongML.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Donkey Kong 1Ca Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [L.E.M. Lunar Excursion Module] File=/rom/LEM.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=L E M Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Automaton] File=/rom/Automaton.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Automaton Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Walt Disney: Pocahontas] File=/rom/Pocahontas.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Walt Disney Pocahontas Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Transformers Energon: The Search for Energon] File=/rom/TransformersEnergon.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Transformers Energon Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ature] File=/rom/Ature.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Ature Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Star Castle Arcade] File=/rom/StarCastleArcade.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Star Castle 2 Year=2013 Genre=Homebrew Description=Star Castle Arcade is a frantic, single-screen space shooter! You control a spaceship that navigates around a giant space cannon which is enclosed and protected by three oppositely rotating concentric energy rings. You must successfully overcome the Star Castle’s formidable defenses, then fire your ship’s weapon, impact the cannon and destroy it. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button (at the title screen) will change the color palette (NTSC, PAL, B/W). Press the START button (during the game) will abort game. Press the "FIRE button to start the game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for player 1. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Setting t?he LEFT DIFFICULTY to "A" will cause game to start at a higher difficulty. \ Setting t?he LEFT DIFFICULTY to "B" will cause game to start at a lower difficulty. \ Setting the RIGHT DIFFICULTY to "A" will cause the ship to be destroyed by the rings. \ Setting the RIGHT DIFFICULTY to "B" will cause the ship to bounce off the rings. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ You must destroy an enemy cannon which sits in the center of three concentric, rotating energy shield rings while avoiding or destroying 'mines' – enemies that spawn from the core, pass through the energy rings, and then home in on the player's ship. \ They can stick back to the shield if the player maneuvers in such a way that a ring is between the ship and the mines. The player-controlled spaceship can rotate, thrust forward, and fire small projectiles. \ The cannon's shields are composed of twelve sections each, and each section takes two hits to destroy. Once a section is breached, rings beneath it are exposed to fire. \ \ Moving the joystick RIGHT will rotate your ship clockwise. \ Moving the joystick LEFT will rotate your ship counter-clockwise. \ Moving the joystick FORWARD will accelerate yoou ship in the direction that it is facing. \ Press the "FIRE" button to shoot a missle from the front of your ship. [Donkey Kong Junior Improved] File=/rom/DKJRImproved.a26 Platform=Coleco Sort=Donkey Kong 3 Year=1987 Genre=atari Description= Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [Amoeba Jump] File=/rom/AmoebaJump.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Amoeba Jump Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Planet of the Grapes] File=/rom/PlanetOfTheGrapes.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Planet Of The Grapes Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Insane Painter 8] File=/rom/InsanePainter8.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Insane Painter Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Peruvian Dental Floss] File=/rom/PeruvianDentalFloss.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Peruvian Dental Floss Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Pixels] File=/rom/Pixels.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Pixels Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [1775] File=/rom/1775.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=02 1775 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hunchy] File=/rom/Hunchy.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Hunchy 1 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [South Park: Terrance & Phillip 2: Not Without My Anus] File=/rom/SouthParkTerrance&Phillip2.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=South Park 2 Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Zippy the Porcupine] File=/rom/Zippy.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Zippy Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Spies in the Night] File=/rom/SpiesNight.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Spies In The Night Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [You Can't Win] File=/rom/YouCantWin.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=You Cant Win Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dr. Flin and His Pills] File=/rom/DrFlin.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Dr Flin Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Candy Catcher] File=/rom/CandyCatcher.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Candy Catcher Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Harbor Rescue] File=/rom/HarborRescue.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Harbor Rescue Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Marble Jump] File=/rom/MarbleJump.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Marble Jump Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Keystone Kapers Christmas: Bad Elf] File=/rom/BadElf.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=Keystone Kapers 2 Year=1983 Genre=atvi Description=Control Officer Keystone Kelly in hot pursuit of Harry Hooligan in this madcap dash through a department store. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ The SELECT button has no function in this game. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move Keystone Kelley with the joystick. Press the controller button to jump. For a long, running jump, press the controller button while pushing the joystick left or right. Push the joystick down to duck. Push the joystick up to step into an open elevator and down to step out. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Points are earned each time a Krook (Harry Hooligan) is apprehended. The sooner you catch him, the more points you'll get. Krooks 1 through 8 are worth 100 times the amount left on Bonus Timer. Krooks 9 through 16 are worth 200 times the amount left on Bonus Timer. After your 16th arrest, each Krook will be worth 300 times the amount left on Bonus Timer. Also, every recovered moneybag and suitcase is worth 50 points. \ You must jump to avoid a rapid onslaught of shopping carts, beach balls, and cathedral radios. If you collide, a valuable 9 seconds will be deducted from your time. As your score rises, toy biplanes whizz by. Duck to avoid them. \ You'll lose a Keystone Kelley if you collide with a biplane, run out of time, or allow Harry Hooligan to escape off the roof. \ Score 10,000 points to earn an extra life. [Joy Ride] File=/rom/Joyride.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Joy Ride Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Brik] File=/rom/Brik.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Brik Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Celery Game] File=/rom/CeleryGame.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Celery Game Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Nitebear on Sleepy Street] File=/rom/Nitebear.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Nitebear Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Drunken Pooper] File=/rom/DrunkenPooper.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Drunken Pooper Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Primate Plunge] File=/rom/PrimatePlunge.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Primate Plunge Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Star Trek: Vector Edition] File=/rom/StarTrekVector.a26 Platform=Sega Sort=Star Trek 2 Year=1983 Genre=console Description=Star Trek: Strategic Operations Simulator traz para você que é fã da franquia de Star Trek, um universo gigante, batalhas espaciais contra os Klingons, que vão ficando cada vez mais fortes, mas muito cuidado por onde anda, pois existem meteoros espalhados pelos setores. Note= \ Player Mode: \ \ Com uma jogabilidade intuitiva, o jogo flui muito bem, não demora muito para você entender a complexidade do jogo e com isso a diversão é garantida. \ Na época quando era comprado o jogo, ele vinha com um “Combat Control Panel” que nada mais era do que um overlay (uma “capa”) para melhorar ainda mais jogabilidade e a interação do jogo com o jogador. \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1, or left, joystick for one player games, and the P2, or right, joystick for the second player in two player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. [The Naughty List] File=/rom/NaughtyList.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Naughty List Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [I Love Bacon] File=/rom/ILoveBacon.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=I Love Bacon Year=1984 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [H.E.R.O.+] File=/rom/Hero+.a26 Platform=Activision Sort=HERO 2 Year=1984 Genre=atvi Description=Guide R. Hero through caverns filled with flying critters, tentacles, moving walls, and other dangers. He's equipped with a jetpack, laser beam, and a limited supply of dynamite, all of which will be needed to negotiate a path to his ultimate goal, the trapped miners. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to choose between games 1 - 5. The higher the number, the deeper within the mine R. Hero begins and the more advanced the challenge. \ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. \ Move with the joystick. Press the controller button to fire the Microlaser Beam. To drop dynamite, land and move near the wall you want to destroy and place and ignite the dynamite by pushing the joystick down. Once set, move out of the way or be blown up! \ Press and hold the joystick up to fly again.\ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ Difficulty switches have no function in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. Move the joystick to start. \ Rescue all miners before running out of lives. \ The power gauge fills at the start of each level. Power begins to diminish when the joystick is moved at the beginning of each level or after a reserve life appears on the screen. If power runs out and a reserve life remains, R. Hero reappears at the top of that level. \ Use the Microlaser Beam to vanquish enemies. Use the dynamite (you start with six) to get past otherwise impassable walls. \ A heat-resistant raft floats on certain stretches of the lava river. A word to the wise: Getting off isn't always easy! \ Score 20,000 points to earn an extra life. [Ms. Pac-Man: Speed Up] File=/rom/MsPacManSpeedUp.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Ms Pacman 3 Year=1982 Genre=atari Description=Get ready to feast your eyes on the original video beauty queen. She's ready to bring you many delightful hours of fun and excitement. So, sit back, relax and have a good time playing MS. PAC-MAN. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press the SELECT button to select game variation. To start the game, press the START switch. \ GAME 1 - CHERRIES: An arcade version MS. PAC-MAN. Just like the original game, MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by four ghosts. \ GAME 2 - ONE BEAR: A good choice for beginners. MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by only one ghost. \ GAME 3 - TWO BEARS: A novice player's choice. MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by only two ghosts. \ GAME 4 - THREE BEARS: An intermediate player's choice. MS. PAC-MAN is pursued by only three ghosts. \ \ 2. Use joystick controllers. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for one player games. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ The DIFFICULTY switches are not used in this game. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ The object of the game is to score as many points as you can while MS. PAC-MAN eats dots, fruit, pretzels, energy pills, and ghosts. Score 10,000 points and earn a bonus MS. PAC-MAN life. \ Use your Joystick controller to guide MS. PAC-MAN around the maze. When she passes over dots, she gobbles them up, and you score points. If she eats all the dots on the screen, the maze flashes momentarily, and you start playing on a new maze. \ \ As soon as she gulps down the energy pill, the ghosts turn blue with fright. You earn 200 points for the first ghost, 400 points for the second ghost, 800 for the third ghost, and a whopping 1600 points for the fourth ghost, all on the same energy pill. \ Unfortunately, the effects of the energy pills are short-lived, so you'll have to move fast. After the ghosts are gobbled up, their eyes head back to the chamber in the center of the screen for reincarnation. If you don't gobble up the ghosts, they start to blink just before they turn back to their original colors. [Harbor Escape] File=/rom/HarborEscape.a26 Platform=Panda Sort=Harbor Escape Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Panky the Panda] File=/rom/Panky.a26 Platform=homebrew Sort=Panky Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tower Zone] File=/rom/TowerZone.a26 Platform=homebrew Sort=Tower Zone Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Tin-Man] File=/rom/TinMan.a26 Platform=homebrew Sort=TinMan Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Metal Max] File=/rom/MetalMax.a26 Platform=homebrew Sort=Metal Max Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dojo Tournament] File=/rom/Dojo.a26 Platform=homebrew Sort=Dojo Tournament Year=1982 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Adventure Enhanced] File=/rom/AdventureEnhanced.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Adventure 3 Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Rescue the Enchanted Chalice stolen by an evil magician and return it to the Golden Castle without getting eaten by evil dragons. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose between three difficulty levels, with 1 being the easiest, and 3 being the hardest.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. To pick up an item, touch it. To drop an item, press the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, it is more difficult to escape the dragons. With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the dragons will hesitate before biting. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each area shown on your screen will have one or more barriers or walls, through which you cannot pass. There are one or more openings that can be moved through to get to the next screen. \ Scattered throughout the Kingdom are certain objects to help you in your search for the Enchanted Chalice, including a sword that can slay dragons. To open any Castle, touch the Gate with that Castle's corresponding colored key. The Gate will slide open and you can enter the Castle by moving upward through the Gate. If you are leaving the Castle, it is advisable to push the Key out first or you may inadvertently close the Castle Gate behind you. \ You cannot pick up and carry a slain dragon. In Skill Levels 2 and 3, besides the dragons, the evil magician has created a black bat that carries objects around throughout the Kingdom and trades them for an object that you may be carrying. The black bat may trade a live dragon for the sword and leave you defenseless, or it may trade you something for the Enchanted Chalice just as you are ready to put it into the Golden Castle. \ You can catch the black bat and carry it and whatever the black bat may be carrying. However, sometimes the black bat will escape. If you have slain a dragon and he is blocking your path so you cannot get through, you can use this to your advantage by placing one or two objects in the same area and then move through the slain dragon. Finally, sometimes the black bat can be used to your advantage by getting it to swap for an object you need that may be stuck in a wall. [Adventure 6 Dragons] File=/rom/Adventure6Dragons.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Adventure 9 Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Rescue the Enchanted Chalice stolen by an evil magician and return it to the Golden Castle without getting eaten by evil dragons. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose between three difficulty levels, with 1 being the easiest, and 3 being the hardest.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. To pick up an item, touch it. To drop an item, press the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, it is more difficult to escape the dragons. With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the dragons will hesitate before biting. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each area shown on your screen will have one or more barriers or walls, through which you cannot pass. There are one or more openings that can be moved through to get to the next screen. \ Scattered throughout the Kingdom are certain objects to help you in your search for the Enchanted Chalice, including a sword that can slay dragons. To open any Castle, touch the Gate with that Castle's corresponding colored key. The Gate will slide open and you can enter the Castle by moving upward through the Gate. If you are leaving the Castle, it is advisable to push the Key out first or you may inadvertently close the Castle Gate behind you. \ You cannot pick up and carry a slain dragon. In Skill Levels 2 and 3, besides the dragons, the evil magician has created a black bat that carries objects around throughout the Kingdom and trades them for an object that you may be carrying. The black bat may trade a live dragon for the sword and leave you defenseless, or it may trade you something for the Enchanted Chalice just as you are ready to put it into the Golden Castle. \ You can catch the black bat and carry it and whatever the black bat may be carrying. However, sometimes the black bat will escape. If you have slain a dragon and he is blocking your path so you cannot get through, you can use this to your advantage by placing one or two objects in the same area and then move through the slain dragon. Finally, sometimes the black bat can be used to your advantage by getting it to swap for an object you need that may be stuck in a wall. [Adventure IV: Adventure Kingdoms] File=/rom/AdventureKingdoms.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Adventure 7 Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Rescue the Enchanted Chalice stolen by an evil magician and return it to the Golden Castle without getting eaten by evil dragons. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose between three difficulty levels, with 1 being the easiest, and 3 being the hardest.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. To pick up an item, touch it. To drop an item, press the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, it is more difficult to escape the dragons. With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the dragons will hesitate before biting. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each area shown on your screen will have one or more barriers or walls, through which you cannot pass. There are one or more openings that can be moved through to get to the next screen. \ Scattered throughout the Kingdom are certain objects to help you in your search for the Enchanted Chalice, including a sword that can slay dragons. To open any Castle, touch the Gate with that Castle's corresponding colored key. The Gate will slide open and you can enter the Castle by moving upward through the Gate. If you are leaving the Castle, it is advisable to push the Key out first or you may inadvertently close the Castle Gate behind you. \ You cannot pick up and carry a slain dragon. In Skill Levels 2 and 3, besides the dragons, the evil magician has created a black bat that carries objects around throughout the Kingdom and trades them for an object that you may be carrying. The black bat may trade a live dragon for the sword and leave you defenseless, or it may trade you something for the Enchanted Chalice just as you are ready to put it into the Golden Castle. \ You can catch the black bat and carry it and whatever the black bat may be carrying. However, sometimes the black bat will escape. If you have slain a dragon and he is blocking your path so you cannot get through, you can use this to your advantage by placing one or two objects in the same area and then move through the slain dragon. Finally, sometimes the black bat can be used to your advantage by getting it to swap for an object you need that may be stuck in a wall. [The Adventures of the 50-Foot-Tall Stalk of Celery] File=/rom/Celery.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Adventures of the Fifty Foot Tall Stalk of Celery Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [South Park: Terrance & Phillip: Asses of Fire] File=/rom/SouthPark.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=South Park 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Aaron the Aant!] File=/rom/AaronAant.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Aaron The Aant Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Acid Fish] File=/rom/AcidFish.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Acid Fish Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [15 Racing] File=/rom/15Racing.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=0 B 15 Racing Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ascend] File=/rom/Ascend.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Ascend Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [A.I. Project] File=/rom/AIProject.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=A I Project Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ants 2K] File=/rom/Ants2k.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Ants 2k Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [A Duck Game] File=/rom/DuckGame.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Duck Game Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Action Simon Says...] File=/rom/ActionSimonSays.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Action Simon Says Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Atari VCS (Point-of-Purchase)] File=/rom/AtariPOP.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Atari VCS Point Of Purchase Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Anaconda] File=/rom/Anaconda.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Anaconda Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Assembloids 2600] File=/rom/Assembloids.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Assembloids Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Goblin Chaser] File=/rom/GoblinChaser.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Goblin Chaser Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Traffic Cop] File=/rom/TrafficCop.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Traffic Cop Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Kar Kombat] File=/rom/KarKombat.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Kar Kombat Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [2048 2600] File=/rom/20482600.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=05 2048 2600 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [1 Vs 1] File=/rom/1vs1Basketball.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=0 1 Vs 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Larry the Lemon] File=/rom/LarryLemon.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Larry The Lemom Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Balloon Girl] File=/rom/BalloonGirl.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Balloon Girl Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Uppa Creek!] File=/rom/UppaCreek.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Uppa Creek Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bird Brain] File=/rom/BirdBrain.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Bird Brain Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Ed, Edd n Eddy Adventures] File=/rom/EdEddEddy.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Ed Edd N Eddy Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Wolfenstein 2600] File=/rom/Wolfenstein2600.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Wolfenstein 2600 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dominant Amber] File=/rom/DominantAmber.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dominant Amber Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cave 1k] File=/rom/Cave1k.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Cave 1k Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Caves of Zargon] File=/rom/CavesOfZargon.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Caves Of Zargon Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cave Ropes] File=/rom/CaveRopes.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Cave Ropes Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Meteor Shower] File=/rom/MeteorShower.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Meteor Shower Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [UFO Blast 3D] File=/rom/UFOBlast3D.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=UFO Blast 3D Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bird Poop] File=/rom/BirdPoop.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Bird Poop Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Stardust] File=/rom/Stardust.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Stardust Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Flappy the Duck] File=/rom/FlappyDuck.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Flappy 2 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Sand Castles] File=/rom/SandCastles.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Sand Castles Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bit Quest] File=/rom/BitQuest.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Bit Quest 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Bit Quest II] File=/rom/BitQuest2.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Bit Quest 2 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Adventure V: Hot Air Balloon] File=/rom/AdventureHotAirBalloon.a26 Platform=Atari Sort=Adventure 8 Year=1979 Genre=atari Description=Rescue the Enchanted Chalice stolen by an evil magician and return it to the Golden Castle without getting eaten by evil dragons. Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game \ \ 1. SELECT button. \ Press SELECT button to choose between three difficulty levels, with 1 being the easiest, and 3 being the hardest.\ \ 2. Use joystick controller. \ Use the P1 or left slot joystick for this one player game. Move the joystick in the same direction you want to move. To pick up an item, touch it. To drop an item, press the joystick button. \ \ 3. Difficulty switches. \ With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the A position, it is more difficult to escape the dragons. With the LEFT DIFFICULTY switch in the B position, the dragons will hesitate before biting. \ \ 4. Instructions. \ Press START button to begin play. \ Each area shown on your screen will have one or more barriers or walls, through which you cannot pass. There are one or more openings that can be moved through to get to the next screen. \ Scattered throughout the Kingdom are certain objects to help you in your search for the Enchanted Chalice, including a sword that can slay dragons. To open any Castle, touch the Gate with that Castle's corresponding colored key. The Gate will slide open and you can enter the Castle by moving upward through the Gate. If you are leaving the Castle, it is advisable to push the Key out first or you may inadvertently close the Castle Gate behind you. \ You cannot pick up and carry a slain dragon. In Skill Levels 2 and 3, besides the dragons, the evil magician has created a black bat that carries objects around throughout the Kingdom and trades them for an object that you may be carrying. The black bat may trade a live dragon for the sword and leave you defenseless, or it may trade you something for the Enchanted Chalice just as you are ready to put it into the Golden Castle. \ You can catch the black bat and carry it and whatever the black bat may be carrying. However, sometimes the black bat will escape. If you have slain a dragon and he is blocking your path so you cannot get through, you can use this to your advantage by placing one or two objects in the same area and then move through the slain dragon. Finally, sometimes the black bat can be used to your advantage by getting it to swap for an object you need that may be stuck in a wall. [Dueling Borg] File=/rom/DuelingBorg.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dueling Borg Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Adventures on GX-12] File=/rom/AdventuresOnGX12.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Adventures On GX 12 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Star Wars: Asteroid Chase] File=/rom/AsteroidChase.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Star Wars 8 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Asteroid Escape] File=/rom/AsteroidEscape.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Asteroid Escape Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Angriff der Luftflotten] File=/rom/AngriffDerLuftflotten.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Angriff Der Luftflotten Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Cosmic Bowling] File=/rom/CosmicBowling.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Cosmic Bowling Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Defend Your Castle] File=/rom/DefendYourCastle.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Defend Your Castle Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Diamond Drop] File=/rom/DiamondDrop.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Diamond Drop Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Denial '77] File=/rom/Denial77.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Denial 77 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Delta Force Sniper] File=/rom/DeltaForceSniper.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Delta Force Sniper Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dinosaur!] File=/rom/Dinosaur.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dinosaur Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Drag Race] File=/rom/DragRace.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Drag Race Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Down the Chimney] File=/rom/DownTheChimney.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Down The Chimney Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [DoubleGap] File=/rom/DoubleGap.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=DoubleGap Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dot] File=/rom/Dot.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dot Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dukes of Hazzard 2] File=/rom/DukesOfHazzard2.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dukes Of Hazzard 2 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Dungeons & Dragons: Dungeon Gladiator] File=/rom/DungeonGladiator.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Dungeons And Dragons Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Electric Yo-Yo] File=/rom/ElectricYoYo.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Electric Yoyo Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Egg Drop] File=/rom/EggDrop.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Egg Drop Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hailfire] File=/rom/Hailfire.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Hailfire Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hacker Face] File=/rom/HackerFace.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Hacker Face Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hack'Em!] File=/rom/HackEm.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Hack Em Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Heartbreak] File=/rom/Heartbreak.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Heartbreak Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Handy Pick Hank] File=/rom/HandyPickHank.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Handy Pick Hank Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Inferno] File=/rom/Inferno.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Inferno Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Havoc Bug] File=/rom/HavocBug.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Havoc Bug Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Housekeeping] File=/rom/Housekeeping.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Housekeeping Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Hungershark] File=/rom/Hungershark.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Hungershark Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [I, Lowercase i] File=/rom/Ilowercasei.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=I Lowercase I Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Indentures at an Exhibition] File=/rom/IndenturesAtAnExhibition.a26 Platform=Homebrew Sort=Indentures At An Exhibition Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Official Frogger] File=/rom/OfficialFrogger.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Frogger 1 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Happy Halloween Hack (Zombie Invaders)] File=/rom/HappyHalloween.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Happy Halloween Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Jet!] File=/rom/Jet.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Jet Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Jex] File=/rom/Jex.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Jex Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Jammed] File=/rom/Jammed.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Jammed Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [The Invisible Maze] File=/rom/InvisibleMaze.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Invisible Maze Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Jack and the Beanstalk] File=/rom/JackBeanstalk.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Jack And The Beanstalk Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Isaiah's Wii Chase] File=/rom/IsaiahsWiiChase.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Isaiahs Wii Chase Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Jupiter Wars] File=/rom/JupiterWars.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Jupiter Wars Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Kraken Attack!] File=/rom/KrakenAttack.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Kraken Attack Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Project Z] File=/rom/ProjectZ.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Project Z Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Radiant Force] File=/rom/RadiantForce.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Radiant Force Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rip-Off] File=/rom/Ripoff.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Rip Off Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Rest 1K] File=/rom/Rest1k.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Rest 1k Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game [Reflex '99] File=/rom/Reflex99.a26 Platform=Starpath Sort=Reflex 99 Year=1983 Genre=unclassified Description= Note= \ Player Mode: Single-player game